Buhler Versatile - OwnerIQdl.owneriq.net/8/85708321-657d-6c34-29fc-5ca26a10d63f.pdf · Buhler Versatile is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure under

2145216021802210

BuhlerVersatile

89007102 01/06

Genesis II

TO THE OWNER:Thewarranty coverage that is extended to your tractor is explained in theWarrantyandLimitationof Liability form.Your dealer will provide you with a copy of the warranty and retain a copy which you have signed. After you readthe warranty, ask your dealer to explain any points that you may not understand.

This tractor was designed to power and propel itself. It is intended for use in normal and customary agriculturalapplications.

Do not modify or alter or permit anyone else to modify or alter this tractor or any of its components or any tractorfunctionwithout first consulting anauthorizedBuhlerVersatile dealer. If youhaveanyquestions regarding tractormodifications, contact Buhler Versatile Inc., 1260 Clarence Avenue, Winnipeg, MB R3C 4E8

A safety cab incorporating a Roll Over Protection Structure (ROPS) and a seat belt were standard equipmentfor the tractor at the time of factory assembly. If the safety cab/ROPShas beenmodified or removed by the origi-nal purchaser, it is recommended that you equip your tractor with a safety cab/ROPS and seat belt. A safetycab/ROPS is effective in reducing injuries during tractor overturn accidents. Overturning a tractor without aROPS can result in serious injury or death. Safety cab/ROPSand seat belts are available for your tractor. If yourtractor is not equipped with a safety cab/ROPS and seat belt, see your Buhler Versatile dealer.

Your safety and the safety of those around you depends upon the care and good judgment you use while operat-ing this equipment. Read the safety precautions carefully.

For a complete list of the delivery service checks performed by your dealer, refer to DELIVERY REPORT in thismanual. The first copy is your record of the service performed and the second copy, which is to be removed fromthe manual, is your dealer’s record. MAKE SURE THAT YOU AND THE DEALER SIGN BOTH COPIES.

After you have operated the tractor for 50 hours, take your tractor and this manual to your selling dealer. He willperform the factory recommended 50-hour service. Youwill be responsible for the cost of lubricants, fluids, filtersand other items replaced as part of normal maintenance. Prior to taking the tractor to your selling dealer for ser-vice, it is recommended that you contact them to determine any other charges for which youmay be responsible.

All data given in this book is subject to production variations. Dimensions andweights are approximate only andthe illustrations donot necessarily show tractors in standard condition. For exact informationabout anyparticulartractor please consult your Buhler Versatile dealer.

CAUTIONThis symbol is used throughout this book whenever personal safety is involved. Take time to read andfollow the instructions. Be careful!

Pictures in this manual may show protective shielding open or removed to better illustrate a particularfeature or adjustment.

Be certain, however, to close or replace all shielding before operating the machine.

IMPROVEMENTSBuhler Versatile Inc. is continually striving to improve its products. We reserve the right to make improvementsor changes when it becomes practical and possible to do so, without incurring any obligation to make changesor additions to the equipment sold previously.

0-1

CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENTYOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS

The California Air Resources Board and Buhler Versatile are pleased to explain the emission control systemwarranty on your engine. In Califor-nia, new 1996 and later heavy-duty off-road engines from 175 to 750 HP must be designed, built, and equipped to meet the State’s stringentanti-smog standards. Buhler Versatile must warrant the emission control system on your engine for the periods of time listed below, providedthere has been no abuse, neglect, or improper maintenance of your engine.

Your emission control system includes parts such as the fuel injection system and the air induction system.

Where awarrantable condition exists, Buhler Versatilewill repair your heavy-duty off-road engine at no cost to you, including diagnosis, parts,and labor.

Manufacturer’s Warranty Coverage:The 1996 and later heavy-duty off-road engines are warranted from the original date of delivery for five years or 3,000 hours of operation,whichever occurs first. If any emission-related part on your engine is defective, the part will be repaired or replaced by Buhler Versatile.

Owner’s Warranty Responsibilities:D As the heavy-duty off-road engine owner, you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance listed in your owner’s

manual. Buhler Versatile recommends that you retain all receipts covering maintenance on your heavy-duty off-road engine, but BuhlerVersatile cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for your failure to ensure the performance of all scheduledmaintenance.

D As the heavy-duty off-road engine owner, you should, however, be aware that Buhler Versatile may deny you warranty coverage if yourheavy-duty off-road engine or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect, improper maintenance, or unapproved modifications.

D Your engine is designed to operate on commercially available diesel fuel only. Use of any other fuel may result in your engine no longeroperating in compliance with California’s emissions requirements.

D You are responsible for initiating the warranty process. The ARB suggests that you present your heavy-duty off-road engine to a BuhlerVersatile dealer as soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed by the dealer as expeditiously as possible.

If you have questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should contact the Buhler Versatile Warranty Department.

D Prior to the expiration of the warranty, you must give notice of any failure of an emission control warranted part. Such notice must begiven to Buhler Versatile or an authorized dealer, and you must deliver the engine to the repair location.

D You, the owner, are responsible for incidental costs incurred by yourself or your employees as a result of awarrantable failure. Examplesof such costs are communication expenses, meals and lodging.

D The owner is responsible for any business costs or losses, any “downtime” expenses and any “cargo” damage which result from thefailure of a warranted part. Buhler Versatile is not responsible for other incidental or consequential damages, including but not limitedto fines, theft, vandalism or collisions.

Parts covered:This emission control system warranty applies to the following 675TA/KA emission control parts.

Fuel Injection PumpFuel InjectorsTurbochargerIntake ManifoldCharge Air CoolerExhaust Manifold

Any replacement part, equivalent in performance and durability, may be used in the performance of any maintenance or repairs and mustbe providedwithout charge to the owner. The use of these parts does not reduce thewarranty obligations of BuhlerVersatile. However, BuhlerVersatile recommends the use of new, genuineBuhler Versatile service parts or Buhler Versatile approved rebuilt parts and assemblies. Buh-ler Versatile also recommends that the engine be serviced by a Buhler Versatile authorized dealer.

Buhler Versatile ResponsibilitiesWarranty work will be provided at no charge to the owner at any authorized dealer, using newgenuine Buhler Versatile service parts or BuhlerVersatile approved rebuilt parts or assemblies..

The owner will not be charged for diagnostic labor which leads to the determination that a warranted part is defective, if the diagnostic workwas performed at a warranty station.

Buhler Versatile is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure under warranty of any warranted part.

Warranty LimitationsBuhler Versatile is not responsible for failures resulting from abuse or neglect by owner or operator.

Buhler Versatile warrants to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the engine is designed, built, and equipped so asto conform with all applicable regulations adopted by the Air Resources Board, and that it is free from defects in materials and workmanshipwhich cause the failure of a warranted part.

Any warranted part which is not scheduled for replacement as required maintenance, or which is scheduled only for regular inspection tothe effect of “repair or replace as necessary” is warranted for the warranty period.

Anywarranted part which is scheduled for replacement as requiredmaintenance is warranted for the period of time prior to the first scheduledreplacement point for that part.

Buhler Versatile is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure under warranty of any warranted part.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-2

FEDERAL EMISSIONS WARRANTYBuhler Versatile warrants that your new 2003 and later heavy-duty off-road diesel engine was designed, built, and equipped to conform toapplicable U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations for a period of use of five years or 3,000 hours of operation, whichever occursfirst.

The new model year, class of diesel engine, and emission application determination for your engine are identified on the emission controlinformation label affixed to the top of your engine’s rocker arm cover. The warranty period begins on the date the new equipment is sold tothe first retail purchaser.

Any emission control system parts which are proven defective during normal use will be repaired or replaced during the warranty period. Thewarranty repairs and service will be performed by any authorized Buhler Versatile dealer at the dealer’s place of business, with no chargefor parts or labor (including diagnosis).

As the engine owner, you are responsible to performall the requiredmaintenance listed in your owner’smanual. Buhler Versatilewill not denyan emission warranty claim solely because you have no record of maintenance; however, a claim may be denied if your failure to performmaintenance resulted in the failure of a warranted part. Receipts covering regular maintenance should be retained in the event of questionsand these receipts should be passed on to each subsequent owner of the engine.

It is recommended replacement parts used for maintenance or repairs be Buhler Versatile Service Parts to maintain the quality originallydesigned into your emission certified engine. The use of non-Buhler Versatile parts does not invalidate the warranty on other componentsunless the use of such parts causes damage to warranted parts.

Buhler Versatile wishes to assure the emission control systemswarranty is being properly administered. If you believe you have not receivedthe service entitled to under this warranty, you should contact the Buhler Versatile Service Department.

Service DepartmentBuhler Versatile Inc.1260 Clarence Avenue, Box 7300Winnipeg, MB R3C 4E8(204) 284--6100

Please note that the Emission Warranty does not cover:

1. Systems and parts that were not first installed on the new equipment or engine as original equipment by Buhler Versatile.

2. Part malfunctions caused by abuse, misuse, improper adjustment, modification, alteration, tampering, disconnection, improper orinadequate maintenance, or use of non-recommended fuels and lubricating oils.

3. Accident caused damage, acts of nature, or other events beyond Buhler Versatile’s control.

4. Replacement of expendable items made in connection with scheduled maintenance.

5. Parts requiring replacement, inspection or adjustment maintenance intervals for reasons other than being defective.

6. Parts which are not Buhler Versatile Service Parts.

7. Loss of time, inconvenience, loss of use of equipment/engine or commercial loss.

8. Equipment with altered or disconnected hourmeter where the hours cannot be determined.

9. Equipment normally operated outside the United States.

10. Non-defective parts replaced by other than Buhler Versatile dealers.

Coverage

This emission control system warranty applies to the following 675TA/** emission control parts.

Fuel Injection PumpFuel InjectorsTurbochargerIntake ManifoldCharge Air CoolerExhaust Manifold

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-3

CONTENTSSAFETY 0-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

GENERAL INFORMATION 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

OPERATION 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TROUBLESHOOTING 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SPECIFICATIONS 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INDEX 5-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DELIVERY REPORT 5-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SERVICE REPORTS 5-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-4

PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS

PERSONAL SAFETY

Throughout this manual and on machine decals, you will find precautionary statements (“CAUTION”,“WARNING”, and “DANGER”) followed by specific instructions. These precautions are intended for the personalsafety of you and those working with you. Please take the time to read them.

CAUTIONTheword “CAUTION” is usedwhere a safe behavioral practice according to operating andmaintenanceinstructions and common safety practices will protect the operator and others from accidentinvolvement.

WARNINGThe word “WARNING” denotes a potential or hidden hazard which has a potential for serious injury. Itis used to warn operators and others to exercise every appropriate means to avoid a surpriseinvolvement with machinery.

DANGERThe word “DANGER” denotes a forbidden practice in connection with a serious hazard.

FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE “CAUTION”, “WARNING”, AND “DANGER” INSTRUCTIONS MAY RESULT INSERIOUS BODILY INJURY OR DEATH.

MACHINE SAFETY

Additional precautionary statements (“ATTENTION” and “IMPORTANT”) are followed by specific instructions.These statements are intended for machine safety.

ATTENTION: The word “ATTENTION” is used to warn the operator of potential machine damage if a certainprocedure is not followed.

IMPORTANT: The word “IMPORTANT” is used to inform the reader of something he needs to know to preventminor machine damage if a certain procedure is not followed.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-5

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-6

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

A careful operator is the best operator. Mostaccidents can be avoided by observing certainprecautions. To help prevent accidents, read andtake the following precautions before operatingthe tractor. Equipment should be operated onlyby those who are responsible and instructed todo so.

THE TRACTOR

1. Read the Operator’s Manual carefully beforeusing the tractor. Lack of operating knowl-edge can lead to accidents.

2. Only allow properly trained and qualifiedpersons to operate the tractor.

3. To prevent falls, use the assist rails and stepplates when getting on and off the tractor.Keep steps and platform clear of mud anddebris.

4. Do not permit anyone but the operator to rideon the tractor. There is no safe place for extrariders.

5. Replace all missing, illegible or damagedsafety decals.

6. Keep safety decals free of dirt or grime.

7. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone elseto modify or alter the tractor or any of itscomponents or any tractor function withoutfirst consulting an authorized dealer.

8. Install all shields before starting or operatingthe tractor.

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

1. Always sit in the driver’s seat while startingor driving the tractor.

2. Whendrivingonpublic roads, haveconsider-ation for other road users. Pull to the side ofthe road so that any following traffic maypass.

3. Dim the tractor lights whenmeeting a vehicleat night. Make sure the lights are adjusted toprevent blinding the driver of an oncomingvehicle.

4. Reduce speed before turning or applying thebrakes. Lock the brake pedals together whentraveling at road speeds or when on thehighway. Brake both wheels simultaneouslywhen making an emergency stop.

5. Use extreme caution and avoid hard applica-tion of the tractor brakes when towing heavyloads at road speeds.

6. Any towed vehicle whose total weightexceeds that of the towing tractor must beequipped with brakes for safe operation.

7. Never apply the differential lock whenturning. When engaged, the differential lockwill prevent the tractor from turning.

8. Always check overhead clearance, especial-lywhen transporting the tractor.Watchwhereyou are going, especially at row ends, onroads and around trees and low overhangingobstacles.

9. Use extreme caution when operating onsteep slopes.

10. To avoidoverturns, drive the tractorwith careand at speeds compatible with safety,especially when operating over roughground,when crossingditchesor slopes andwhen turning corners.

11. If the tractor becomes stuck or the tires arefrozen to the ground, engage a reverse gearto free the tractor and prevent overturning.

12. Keep the tractor in the samegearwhengoingdownhill aswouldbeusedwhengoinguphill.Do not coast or freewheel down hills.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-7

OPERATING THE TRACTOR

1. Apply the parking brake, place the PTOcontrol in the “OFF” position, the lift controllever in the downposition, the remote controlvalve levers in the neutral position and thetransmission lever in neutral before startingthe tractor.

2. Do not start the engine or operate controls(other than the external hydraulic liftswitches) while standing beside the tractor.Always sit in the tractor seat when startingthe engine or operating the controls.

3. Do not bypass the transmission neutral startswitch. Consult your authorized dealer ifyour neutral start controls malfunction. Usejumper cables only in the recommendedmanner. Improper use can result in a tractorrunaway.

4. Avoid accidental contact with the gear shiftlever while the engine is running. Unex-pected tractor movement can result fromsuch contact.

5. Do not get off the tractor while it is in motion.

6. Shut off the engine and PTO and apply theparking brake before getting off the tractor.

7. Do not park the tractor on a steep incline.

8. Do not operate the tractor engine in anenclosed building without adequate ventila-tion. Exhaust fumes can cause death.

9. The cab air filter is designed to remove dustfrom the air but will not exclude chemicalvapor. Follow the chemical manufacturersdirections regarding protection fromdanger-ous chemicals.

10. Alwayswearaprotectivemaskwhenworkingwith toxic spray chemicals. Follow thedirections on the chemical container.

11. If the power steering or engine ceases tooperate, stop the tractor immediately as thetractor will be more difficult to control.

12. Stop the engine and relieve pressure beforeconnecting or disconnecting hydraulic,steering or fuel lines.

13. Tighten all connections before starting theengine or pressurizing lines.

14. Pull only from the swinging drawbar. Useonly a drawbar pin that locks in place. Pullingfrom the tractor rear axle or any point abovethe axle may cause the tractor to overturn.

15. If the front end of the tractor tends to risewhen heavy implements are attached to thethree-point hitch, install front end weights.Do not operate the tractor with a light frontend.

16. Always select Position Control when attach-ing equipment and when transporting equip-ment. Be sure hydraulic couplers areproperly mounted and will disconnect safelyin case of accidental detachment of theimplement.

17. Do not leave equipment in the raised positionwhen the vehicle is stopped or unattended.

18. Ensure any attached equipment or accesso-ries are correctly installed, are approved foruse with the tractor, do not overload thetractor and are operated and maintained inaccordance with the instructions issued bythe equipment or accessory manufacturer.

19. Remember that your tractor, if abused orincorrectly used, can be dangerous andbecome a hazard both to the operator and tobystanders. Do not overload or operate withattached equipment which is unsafe, notdesigned for the particular task or is poorlymaintained.

20. The cab is designed to provide the minimumnoise level at the operator’s ears and, in fact,meets or exceeds applicable standards inthis respect.However,noise (soundpressurelevel) in the workplace can exceed 86dB(A)when working between buildings or inconfined spaces, when the cab windows areopen. Therefore, it is recommended that theoperators wear suitable ear protectors whenoperating in high noise level conditions.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-8

OPERATING THE PTO

1. When operating PTO-driven equipment, shutoff the engine and wait until the PTO stopsbefore getting off the tractor and disconnect-ing the equipment.

2. Do not wear loose clothing when operatingthe power take-off or when near rotatingequipment.

3. When operating stationary PTO-drivenequipment, always apply the tractor parkingbrake and block the rear wheels front andback.

4. To avoid injury, do not clean, adjust, unclogor service PTO driven equipment when thetractor engine is running.

5. Make sure the PTO master shield is inposition at all times and always replace thePTO cover when the PTO is not in use.

SERVICING THE TRACTOR

Most accidents can be avoided by observingcertain precautions. To help prevent accidents,read and take the following precautions beforeservicing the tractor.

1. The cooling systemoperates under pressurewhich is controlled by the radiator cap. It isdangerous to remove the cap while thesystem is hot. Always turn the cap slowly tothe first stop and allow the pressure toescape before removing the cap entirely.

2. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor.Keep any type of open flame away. Wait forthe engine to cool before refuelling.

3. Keep the tractor and equipment, particularlybrakes and steering, maintained in a reliableand satisfactory condition to ensure yoursafety and comply with legal requirements.

4. To prevent fire or explosion, keep openflames away from battery or cold weatherstarting aids. To prevent sparks which couldcause explosion, use jumper cables accord-ing to instructions.

5. Do not attempt to service the air conditioningsystem. It is possible to be severely frostbitten or injured by escaping refrigerant.Special equipment and instruments arerequired to service the air conditioningsystem. See your authorized dealer forservice.

6. Stop the engine before performing anyservice on the tractor.

7. Escaping diesel/hydraulic fluid under pres-sure can penetrate the skin causing seriousinjury.

• DONOTuse your hand to check for leaks.Use a piece of cardboard or paper tosearch for leaks.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressurebefore connecting or disconnectinglines.

• Tighten all connections before startingthe engine or pressurizing lines.

• If fluid is injected into the skin, obtainmedical attention immediately or gan-grene may result.

8. Do not modify or alter or permit anyone elseto modify or alter the tractor or any of itscomponents or any tractor function withoutfirst consulting an authorized dealer.

9. The fuel oil in the injection system is underhigh pressure and can penetrate the skin.Unqualified persons should not remove orattempt to adjust a pump, injector nozzle orany other part of the fuel injection system.Failure to follow these instructions can resultin serious injury.

10. Continuous long term contact with usedengine oil may cause skin cancer. Avoidprolonged contact with used engine oil.Wash skin promptly with soap and water.

11. Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle withcare and ensure, when stored, that theycannot fall and cause injury.

12. Dispose of all drained fluids and removedfilters properly.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-9

DIESEL FUEL

1. Under no circumstances should gasoline,alcohol or blended fuels be added to dieselfuel. These combinations can create anincreased fire or explosive hazard. In aclosed container such as a fuel tank, theseblends are more explosive than puregasoline. Do not use these blends.

2. Ignition switch to OFF position.

3. Never remove the fuel cap or refuel with theengine running. Allow the tractor to cool offbefore fueling.

4. Do not smoke while refuelling the tractor orwhen standing near fuel. Keep any type ofopen flame away.

5. Use the proper fuel transfer hose and nozzle.Make sure the nozzle and hose are groundedto dissipate static electric charges.

6. When refueling, make sure the nozzle is incontact with the filler neck of the tractor fueltank before fuel starts to flow and during theentire time fuel is flowing.

7. Maintain control of the fuel filler pipe nozzlewhen filling the tank.

8. Do not fill the fuel tank to capacity. Allowroom for expansion.

9. Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.

10. Always tighten the fuel tank cap securely.

11. If the original fuel tank cap is lost, replace itwith a genuine replacement cap. A non-ap-proved cap may not be safe.

12. Keep equipment clean and properly main-tained.

13. Do not drive equipment near open fires.

14. Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.

15. Arrange fuel purchases so that summergrade fuels are not held over and used in thewinter.

16. Never operate electrical or electronic equip-ment (such as cell phones) while around fuelor while refueling.

SAFETY CAB

Your tractor is equipped with a safety cab whichmust be maintained in a serviceable condition.Be careful when driving through doorways orworking in confined spaces with low headroom.

1. Do not modify, drill, weld or alter the safetycab in any way. Doing so could render youliable to legal prosecution in some countries.

2. Never attempt to straighten or weld any partof themain frameor retaining bracketswhichhave suffered damage. By doing so you mayweaken the structure and endanger yoursafety. Replace all damaged parts.

3. Do not secure any parts on themain frame orattach your safety cab with other than thespecial high tensile bolts and nuts specified.

4. Never attach chains or ropes to the cab ormain frame for pulling purposes.

5. Never take unnecessary risks even thoughyour safety cab affords you the maximumprotection possible.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-10

SAFETY DECALSThe following decals were installed on the tractor inthe areas indicated. They are intended for yoursafety and for those working with you. Please takethis manual and walk around your tractor to note thecontent and location of these decals.

Review these decals and the operating instructionsdetailed in this manual with the machine operators.

Keep the decals legible. If they are not, obtainreplacements from your authorized dealer.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-11

1. Location : Right and left side of radiator support

2. Location : Inside left engine access door

3. Location : Engine air cleanersupport on the right side abovethe alternator.

86501508

86501511

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-12

4. Location : Starter motor

5. Location : Radar sensor mount bracket

6. Location : Front of right side console

8. Location : Left-hand “B” pillar in the cab

7. Location : Top of right side console

5 – Warning: To avoidpossible eye damage frommicrowave signals emittedby this radar sensor DoNotlook directly into the sensorface.

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-13

9. Location : Rear of both rear fenders

11. Location : Lower front corner of rightside window

10. Location : Below PTO stub shaft

WARNINGIF INSTRUMENT PANEL FLASHES “STOP” ANDCONTINUOUS ALARM SOUNDS:

IMMEDIATELY

1. DEPRESS TOP OF SHUTDOWN OVERRIDESWITCH.

2. DOWNSHIFT TO 7TH GEAR OR LOWER.

3. PROCEED TO SAFE STOPPING AREAAND STOP ENGINE.

4. DETERMINE CAUSE AND TAKE CORRECTIVEACTION.

DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DRIVE FURTHER WITHALARM SOUNDING.

IMPORTANTFAILURE TO DEPRESS SWITCH WITHIN 30SECONDS AFTER ALARM SOUNDS WILL STOPENGINE. CAUSING LOSS OF POWER-ASSIST TOSTEERING AND BRAKES.

86002744

12 – Slow-moving vehicle sign

Part #5144870

86516374

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-14

SAFETY CAB/ROPS

Safety Cab/ROPSA safety cab incorporating a Roll Over ProtectiveStructure (ROPS) and seat belt were standardequipment for the tractor at time of factory assembly.The seat belt, when used by the operator,maximizesthe protection offered by the ROPS.

WARNINGAlways use your seat belt with the cab/ROPS.Seat belts save lives when they are used.

Information regarding the safety cab/Roll OverProtective Structure and seat belt are available fromyour authorized dealer.

ROPS Maintenance and InspectionAfter the first 50 hours of operation and every 300hours of operation (or six months, whichever comesfirst):

1. Check the torque of the cab/ROPS mountingbolts. Refer to “Operation 41” in the “Lubricationand Maintenance” section.

2. Check theoperator’s seatmountingbolts and theseat belt mounting bolts. Tighten bolts to 54 N·m(40 ft lbs). Replace any worn or damaged parts.

Damage to the Cab/ROPSIf the tractor has rolled over or the cab/ROPS hasbeen damaged (such as striking an overhead objectduring transport), it must be replaced to provide theoriginal protection.

After an accident, check for damage to the (1)cab/ROPS, (2) operator’s seat, (3) seat belt and seatbelt mountings. Before you operate the tractor,replace all damaged parts.

IMPORTANT: Do not try to weld or straighten thecab/rops.

WARNINGNever attach chains, ropes or cables to thecab/ROPS for pulling purposes; this will causethe tractor to tip backwards. Alwayspull from thetractor drawbar. Be careful when driving throughdoor openings or under low overhead objects.Make sure there is sufficient overhead clearancefor the cab/ROPS.If the cab/ROPS is removed or replaced, makecertain that the proper hardware is used and therecommended torque values are applied to theattaching bolts.

70-000-389

1

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-15

UNIVERSAL SYMBOLS

As a guide to the operation of your tractor, various universal symbols have been utilized on the instruments, con-trols, switches, and fusebox. The symbols are shown below with an indication of their meaning.

40A EHR Power

SECTION 0 -- SAFETY

0-16

1-1

SECTION 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTION TO THIS MANUAL

This manual has been prepared to assist you in thecorrect procedure for running-in, driving, operatingand maintaining your tractor.

The manual is divided into five sections as detailedin the “Contents” page. An index is provided at theback of the manual.

OPERATOR’S MANUAL HOLDERAmanual holder, 1, is attached to the rear of the seat.Store the operator’s manual and other tractorinformation in the holder.

Read this manual carefully and keep it in the manualholder for future reference. If at any time you requireadvice concerning your tractor, do not hesitate tocontact your authorized dealer. He has factory-trained personnel, genuine replacement parts, andthe necessary equipment to carry out your servicerequirements.

1

Your tractor has been designed and built to givemaximum performance, economy and ease ofoperation under a wide variety of operatingconditions. Prior to delivery, the tractor was carefullyinspected, both at the factory and by your dealer, toensure that it reaches you in optimum condition. Tomaintain this condition and ensure trouble-freeoperation, it is important that the routine services, asspecified in this manual, are carried out at therecommended intervals.

All data given in this book is subject to productionvariations.Dimensions andweights are approximateonly, and the illustrations do not necessarily showtractors in standard condition. For exact information

about any particular tractor, please consult yourauthorized dealer.

The company policy is one of continuous improve-ment, and the right to change prices, specificationsor equipment at any time without notice is reserved.

References to the right and left sidesof the tractor aredetermined by sitting in the operator’s seat facing thedirection of forward travel.

Pages 0-5 through 0-12 list the precautions to beobserved to ensure your safety and the safety ofothers. Read the safety precautions carefully andfollow the advice offered BEFORE operating thetractor.


1-2

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATION DATAThe tractor and major components are identifiedusing serial numbers and/or manufacturing codes.The following provides the locations of theidentification data.

NOTE:Tractor identificationdatamust be supplied tothe dealer when requesting parts or service.

Identification data is needed to aid in identifying thetractor if it is ever stolen.

Record the identification data in the sample ID platesor on the lines provided.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATEThe vehicle identification plate, 1, is located insidethe right front lower side panel of the hood.

Record the information on the sample ID plate.

1

2


1-3

TRACTOR IDENTIFICATIONThe serial number and identification information isstamped on the top of the front support, 1. Record allthe numbers on the following line.

3

ENGINE IDENTIFICATIONThe engine identification information is located on atag, 1, on the top front of the engine rocker cover.Record the information on the sample ID plate. Thedecal will appear similar to the illustration below.

1

4


1-4

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FRONT AXLEIDENTIFICATIONThe serial number and axle type are on the platelocated on the right rear of the axle housing, 1.


1

5

TRANSMISSION IDENTIFICATIONThe serial number and type are located on the plateon the lower right side of the transmission, 1.


MODEL

SPEC

SERIAL

EQUIP6


1-5

REAR AXLE IDENTIFICATIONThe serial number is also stamped on the left side ofthe PTO boss on the rear axle housing, 1.

7

CAB IDENTIFICATIONThe serial number is on the certification plate on therear crossbar, 1.

Record the serial number on the following line.

8


1-6

PROTECTIVE SHIELDING

INTRODUCTIONProtective shields have been installed on yourtractor. The shields are intended for your safety andfor those working with you.

SHIELD LOCATIONSUse the following as a guide and familiarize yourselfwith the location of the protective shields.

WARNINGInstall all protective shields before starting oroperating the tractor.

ENGINE HOODThe hood, 1, covers the engine’s moving parts. Thehood must be closed before operating the tractor.

9

FAN SHIELDS - LEFT SIDEThe shield, 1, covers the left side of the fan.

1

10


1-7

FAN SHIELDS - RIGHT SIDEThe shield, 1, covers the right side of the fan.

11

ENGINE ACCESS DOOR - RIGHT SIDEThe door, 1, covers the right rear enginecomponents.

12

ENGINE ACCESS DOOR - LEFT SIDEThe door, 1, covers the left rear engine components.

13


1-8

STARTER SOLENOID SHIELDThe shield, 1, covers the starter solenoid electricalconnections to prevent accidental contact. Theshield must be installed whenever the batteries areconnected to the electrical system.

14

BATTERY COVERThe cover, 1, protects the batteries fromdamageandthe electrical connections from accidental contact.

15

TRACTOR MASTER PTO SHIELDThe shield, 1, covers the tractor PTO stub shaft. Theshield can be pivoted to make installing a PTO shafteasier.

CAUTIONDo not remove or modify the shield.

16


1-9

TRACTOR PTO STUB SHAFT COVERInstall the cover, 1, over the tractor’s PTO stub shaftwhen the shaft is not attached to an implement. Turnthe shield counterclockwise to remove, andclockwise to install.

Store the cover when removed.

WARNINGInstall all protective shields before starting oroperating the tractor.

17


1-10

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS - OVERVIEW OF LOCATION AND FUNCTION

The information on the following pages identifies,locates and briefly describes the function of thecontrols and instruments located in the cab.

The controls have been divided in to the followingfour areas:

1. Forward operator controls

2. Foot and floor controls

3. Overhead controls

4. Right side console controls

IMPORTANT: The following information in thissection provides a general overview of location andfunction but does not provide detailed operationalinformation. Thoroughly read Section 2 - “Operation”for details on how to use the controls and read theinstruments before operating the tractor.

WARNINGDo not operate the tractor until you arethoroughly accustomed with the location andoperation of all controls.


1-11

FORWARD OPERATOR CONTROLS

18

Forward Operator Controls

1. Key-start/stop switch, 4 position2. Engine shutdown override switch3. Creeper switch (if equipped)4. Steering column tilt control lever5. Steering column telescopic adjustment control knob6. Cold start aid switch

7. Multi-function switch - horn, turn signal, high/lowbeam

8. Rotary beacon switch (if equipped)9. Hazard warning switch10. Master light switch, 4 position11. Electronic instrument cluster (EIC)

Each numbered item is discussed under the corresponding heading found on the following pages.


1-12

FORWARD OPERATOR CONTROLS

1. KEY-START/STOP SWITCH

Thekeystart/stop rotary switch, 1, has four positions.

Position A - Accessories “ON,” Engine “OFF”

Position B - Engine and electrical equipment “OFF”

Position C - Warning lights and instruments “ON.”Engine RUN position.

Position D - Starter motor operates

2. ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDE SWITCH

The two-position rocker switch, 2, allows theoperator to over ride the automatic shutdown. See“Operating the Engine” for details on the automaticshutdown feature. The switch should only be used tomove the tractor to a safe area for investigation andrepair. Push the top of the switch to override theshutdown system. Push the bottom to return tonormal automatic shutdown operation.

3. CREEPER SWITCH (If Equipped)

The switch, 3, controls the engagement of thecreeper gears.

Push the top of the switch to select creeper. Push thebottomof the switch to return to normal operation.Donot select creeper unless the tractor has come to acomplete stop. See “Transmission Operation” fordetails.

Tractors without creeper will have a blanking plate inplace of the switch.

19

4. STEERING COLUMN TILT CONTROL LEVER

Pulling on the lever, 4, allows the steering column tobe tilted up or down to a comfortable operatingposition or out of the way for easy exit from the seat.See “Cab” for details.

5. STEERING COLUMN TELESCOPIC ADJUST-MENT CONTROL KNOB

Rotating theknob, 5, allows thesteeringcolumn tobeshortened or lengthened to a comfortable operatingposition. See “Cab” for details.

20


1-13

6. COLD START AID SWITCH

Depressing the switch, 6, activates an air inlet heaterdesigned to pre-heat engine intake air to improvecold starting. A monitoring device prevents theheater from working when system temperature isabove 14°C (57° F). See “ColdWeather Starting” fordetails.

7. MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCH

The stalk-type switch, 7, operates the horn, turnsignals, headlight flash and is also used to select HIor LOWbeam.See “Lights andAccessoryPower” fordetails.

21

8. ROTARY BEACON SWITCH (If Equipped)

The switch, 8, controls the operation of the beacon.

Push the top of the switch to operate the rotarybeacon. Push the bottom of the switch to turn thebeacon off. See “Lights and Accessory Power” fordetails.

Tractors without rotary beacons have a blankingplate in place of the switch.

9. HAZARD WARNING LIGHT SWITCH

Push the top of the switch, 9, to activate the hazardlights. Push the bottom of the switch to turn thehazard lights off. See “Lights and Accessory Power”for details.

10. MASTER LIGHT SWITCH

The master light switch, 10, has 4 positions.

A= Full counterclockwise is off.

B= Parking lights

C= Headlights and parking lights

D= Work lights, headlights and parking lights. Thework lightsareselectedbyusing the touch-sensi-tive switcheson theEICconsole.See “LightsandAccessory Power” for details.

22


1-14

23

11. ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

The central Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 1, hastransmission gear information at the top. Enginespeed appears in the middle display. The bottomdisplays hours, ground speed or PTO speed asselected.

The top section, 2, of the EIC consists of 18 indicatorlamps.

Bar graphs, 3, indicate coolant temperature andengine load.

The right panel, 4, contains the Tractor PerformanceMonitor (TPM)

Eleven touch-sensitive switches, 5, select differentEIC functions and aid in calibration.

Three indicator lamps, 6, are located on the center ofthe lower panel.

Five touch-sensitive switches, 7, select work lightsand dimmer control.

Bar graphs, 8, indicate fuel level and oil pressure.

See “Electronic Instrument Cluster” for details.


1-15

FOOT AND FLOOR CONTROLS

24

1. PARKING BRAKE

The parking brake, 1, uses a conventional lever tooperate brake discs located on the differential inputshaft. The lever is located to the left of the driver’sseat. See “Brakes” for details.

NOTE:A2-minute pulsating audible alarmwill soundin unison with a flashing parking brake lamp toremind the operator to apply the parking brake if theoperator leaves the seatwithout applying the parkingbrake.

2. INCHING PEDAL

The inching pedal, 2, is installed in place of the clutchpedal found on tractors with conventional transmis-sions. The inching pedal operates like a clutch, forsafe, accurate positioning of the tractor whenattaching implements or operating in confinedspaces, etc.

Depressing the pedal interrupts power flow from theengine to the rear axle. Slowly releasing the pedalrestores power flow. See “Transmission” for details.

3. LEFT WHEEL FOOT BRAKE PEDAL

The left foot brake, 3, may be operated independent-ly, to aid turning in confined spaces, or together fornormal stopping. When operating in the field it isadvised that the brake pedals be unlocked. See“Brakes” for details.

WARNINGAlways lock the brakes together when travelingon the highway, or if a hydraulically braked traileris attached. Never use the brakes to aid turningat high speed.

4. BRAKE LOCKING PLATE

To lock the brake pedals together, position thelocking plate, 4, so it engages the slot in the right footpedal as shown. See “Brakes” for details.

5. RIGHT WHEEL FOOT BRAKE PEDAL

The right foot brake, 5, may be operatedindependently, to aid turning in confined spaces, ortogether for normal stopping. When operating in thefield it is advised that the brake pedals be unlocked.See “Brakes” for details.

6. FOOT THROTTLE OR DECELERATOR

The foot throttle, 6, controls engine speed. It may beused independent of the hand throttle to controlengine speed and is recommended for use whentraveling on the highway. This pedal may also beprogrammed as a decelerator control. See dealer forprogramming this feature.

NOTE:When ever the foot throttle is to be used, setthe hand throttle to the idle position.


1-16

OVERHEAD CONTROLS

25

Overhead Controls

1. Air conditioner activation switch2. Temperature control switch3. Pressurizer fan speed switch4. Adjustable pressurizer vents (6)5. Front windshield wiper/washer switch

6. Rear window wiper/washer switch (if equipped)7. Cigar lighter8. Control console illumination lights (2)9. Interior lights (2)10. Interior rearview mirror



1-17

OVERHEAD CONTROLS

1. AIR CONDITIONER ACTIVATION SWITCH

Switch, 1, controls the activation of the airconditioner.

Depress the switch to activate the air conditionercompressor. See “Cab” for details.

2. TEMPERATURE CONTROL SWITCH

Rotate knob, 2, fully clockwise for maximum heat,and fully counterclockwise for less heat and formaximum cooling when the air conditioning isactivated. See “Cab” for details.

3. PRESSURIZER FAN SPEED SWITCH

The pressurizer fan switch, 3, has three positions.Lowspeed is full counterclockwise.Rotate theswitchclockwise for medium and high speeds. See “Cab”for details.

WARNINGThe cab air filter is designed to remove dust fromthe air. When using chemicals follow thechemical manufacturer’s recommendations re-garding protection from dangerous chemicals.

26

4. ADJUSTABLE PRESSURIZER VENTS (6)

The vents direct pressurized air inside the cab.

Rotate the six vents, 4, inside their housings to directair as required. See “Cab” for details.

27


1-18

5. FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHERSWITCH

The windshield wiper switch, 5, has three positions- off, slow, and fast. Push in on the knob to operatethe washer. See “Cab” for details.

6. REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER SWITCH(if installed)

The rear window wiper/washer switch, 6, has twopositions - off and on. Push in on the knob to activatethe washer. See “Cab” for details.

7. CIGAR LIGHTER

Push the lighter, 7, in until it latches.When it popsout,remove from its socket and return after use.

NOTE: A cigar lighter socket power adapter kit (P/N86033740)may be purchased from your local BuhlerVersatile dealer.

28

8. CONTROL CONSOLE ILLUMINATIONLIGHTS (TWO)

The lights, 8, are activated when the master lightswitch is on. The lights illuminate the cab controls.

9. INTERIOR LIGHTS (TWO)

The lights, 9, illuminate the cab interior. Each lightswitch can be set to one of three positions.

See “Lights and Accessory Power” for details.

10. INTERIOR REARVIEW MIRROR

Adjust the mirror, 10, for best rearward view. 29


1-19

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

* Side face of console

2

34

77

8 8

12 13

14

15

16

1918

20

5

6

10

119

9

1 21* 22*

17

21 22

30

Right Side Console Controls

1. Hand throttle control2. Powershift transmission control lever with neutral

latch3. Remote valve electro-hydraulic engagement switch4. Transmission automatic shift switch5. Transmission up/down shift switch6. 3-point hitch fast raise/work switch7. Remote valve electro-hydraulic control switches

(3 or 4)8. Remote valve electro-hydraulic flow control knobs9. Remote valve electro-hydraulic manual/programable

operation switches10. Differential lock switch

11. Four wheel drive (FWD) switch (if equipped)12. PTO status light13. PTO engagement switch14. 3-point hitch operation status lamp15. 3-point hitch rate of drop control knob (if equipped)16. 3-point hitch height limit control knob (if equipped)17. 3-point hitch % slip override control knob and

system response indicator light (if equipped)18. 3-point hitch draft/position control knob (if equipped)19. Right side console position switch20. 3-point hitch lift control and adjustable stop21. “CRUISE/OFF” button22. Cruise setting adjustment switch



1-20

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

1. HAND THROTTLE CONTROL LEVER

The lever, 1, controls engine speed.

Push forward to progressively increase enginespeed. Pull rearward to reduce engine speed.

2. POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLLEVER WITH NEUTRAL LOCK

The powershift transmission control lever, 2, is usedto select forward or reverse travel and to changetransmission speeds. Move the lever forward forforward travel and rearward for reverse travel.

NOTE: A neutral-lock feature is fitted. The controllever may only be moved to the forward or reversepositions if the neutral-lock latch on the control-leverknob is depressed. Neutral may be selected withoutdepressing the neutral-lock latch.

The powershift transmission control lever is alsoused to make instantaneous upward or downwardspeed changes. Move and then release the lever tothe right for upward changes and to the left fordownward changes.

See “Transmission Operation” for details.

1

23

4

5

6

31

3. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULICENGAGEMENT SWITCH

Depressing the center button in switch, 3, andthen pulling the knob upward will engage theelectro-hydraulic controls for the rear remote valves.Pushing the knob down will disengage theelectro-hydraulic controls andall hydrualic flow to therear remote valves. See “Remote-Control Valves” fordetails.

IMPORTANT: The remote valve electro-hydraulicengagement switch is provided as an isolator stopswitch. It can be used to immediately stop operationof the rear remote hydraulics by quickly depressingthe knob. The stop switch only controls the remotevalves and has no effect on the three point hitch linkoperation, thereby isolating operation of the rearremote hydraulics from the three point hitch linkoperation.

4. TRANSMISSION AUTO SHIFT SWITCH

Switch, 4, controls automatic speed shifting throughgears 10-16. Depress to engage auto shift, depressagain to disengage. See “Transmission Operation”for details.

1

23

4

5

6

32


1-21

5. TRANSMISSION UP/DOWN SHIFT SWITCH

Depressing the front of switch, 5, will allow anincrease of 1, 2, or 3 gears depending on how thetransmission is programmed. Pressing the back ofthe switch will reduce speeds by 1, 2, or 3 gears. See“Transmission Operation” for details.

6. 3-POINT HITCH FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCH

Depressing the rear of switch, 6, will fast raise the3-point hitch and implement for quick turns at the endof the field.

Depressing the front of the switch drops theimplement to its original position.

Holding the front of the switch overrides the 3-pointlift control setting, allowing the hitch to drop below thesetting. Releasing the switch returns the hitch to the3-point lift control set point.

The Fast Raise/Work switch is also required torecapture the hitch after using the external fenderswitches. See “3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

1

23

4

5

6

33

7. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULICCONTROL SWITCHES

Each control switch, 7, activates a four positionremote electro-hydraulic valve. From neutral pull theswitch rearward to the stop for raise. Push forwardone position at a time for neutral, lower and float.Each control switch (3 or 4) is color coded foridentification with the remote valve it controls. See“Remote valve electro-hydraulics” for details.

8. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULICFLOW CONTROL KNOBS

Each remote valve has a flow control knob, 8, tometer oil flow. The knob controls flow from 4 to 102L/MIN (1 to 27 GPM). Turn the knob so the highervertical decal stripe is visible to increase the rate ofoil flow. Turn the knob so the lower vertical decalstripe is visible to decrease the rate of oil flow.

9. REMOTE VALVE ELECTRO-HYDRAULICMANUAL/PROGRAMABLE OPERATIONSWITCHES

Each remote valve has a manual/programmableoperation switch, 9. When the top of the switch isactivated the control switches, 7, operate in themanual mode. When the bottom of the switch isactivated the control switches, 7, can be operatedwith a programmed release to neutral. See “Remotevalve electro-hydraulics” for details.

7 7

8

9

10

11

34


1-22

10. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH

Switch, 10, controls the engagement of theelectro-hydraulic, self-holding differential lock. Pressthe front (orange) part of the switch to lock the rearwheels together.

The differential lock will disengage if the back part ofthe switch is depressed, if either foot brake is appliedor when ground speeds exceed 16 KPH (10 MPH).

If the unit is equipped with Traction Control System(TCS) the front four wheel drive differential will alsodisengage and engage in a similar manor along withhard turn angles. See “Differential Lock” for details.

11. FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) SWITCH(if equipped)

Four-wheel drive engagement is controlled by athree-position rocker switch, 11.Press the front of theswitch to the first position to engage AUTO FWD. Inthis position the FWD will turn off when one brake isused to assist turning or at speeds above 24KPH (15MPH). Press to the full forward position to engageONwhich will keep the FWDengaged below 24KPH(15 MPH).

If the unit is equipped with Traction Control System(TCS) the front four wheel drive will also disengageand engage in a similar manor along with hard turnangles. See “Four Wheel Drive Operation” fordetails.

7 7

8

9

10

11

35

12. PTO STATUS LIGHT

The PTO status light, 12, will illuminate when thePTO is activated. See “PTO Operation” for details.

13. PTO ENGAGEMENT SWITCH

Depressing button, 13, in the center of the switchthen pulling upwards on the knob will engage thePTO. To disengage the PTO, push the knob down.See “PTO Operation” for details.

14. 3-POINT HITCH STATUS LIGHT

Lamp, 14, will be illuminated whenever the 3-pointhitch lift control lever and lift arms are not in phase.The hitch must be “captured” to regain control.

If the lamp is flashing, there is a malfunction in theelectronic 3-point hitch control circuit. See “3-PointHitch Controls.”

12

13

14

15

16

17

19

18

20

17a

36


1-23

15. 3-POINT HITCH RATE OF DROP CONTROL(if equipped)

The rate of drop control is provided to limit the rate ofdrop of the 3-point linkage.

Rotate knob, 15, clockwise for faster drop rate andcounterclockwise for slower drop speeds. See“3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

16. 3-POINT HITCH HEIGHT LIMIT CONTROL(if equipped)

The height limit control limits the maximum height towhich the lift arms can be raised to prevent largeimplements from striking the rear of the cab.

Rotate knob, 16, clockwise to increase hitch height.See “3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

17. SLIP CONTROL (if equipped)

This control is only available when the tractor isequipped with the optional radar sensor unit.

When used in conjunction with the 3-point hitch, theslip control limits the amount of rear wheel slip.Rotate knob, 17, to indicate the slip rate abovewhichoverride should occur. The 3-point hitch will raiseuntil the percent of slip drops below the overridesetting, then the hitch will return to its originalposition. See “3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

Whenused in drawbar applications, the knobmaybeset to the maximum allowable slip. If the slip limit isexceeded, the light, 17A will illuminate. A slip alarmmay also be programmed to occur (See EIC tractorperformance monitor (TPM) section).

17a. WHEEL SLIP INDICATOR LIGHT (IFEQUIPPED)

The wheel slip indicator light, 17a will be illuminatedwhenever the wheel slip exceeds the preset value.

This light is present when the tractor is equippedwiththe slip control option.

12

13

14

15

16

17

19

18

20

17a

37


1-24

18. 3-POINTHITCHPOSITION/DRAFTCONTROL(if equipped)

Theposition/draft sensitivity control knob, 18, selectsposition control, maximum draft control, or a mixtureof the two.

Rotate clockwise for full draft control and counter-clockwise for full position control. Varying sensitivitywill be achieved in the mid positions. See “3-PointHitch Controls” for details.

19. RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE POSITION SWITCH

Use switch, 19, to move the console fore and aft tomatch the operator seat position.

Press the front of the switch to move the consoleforward. Push the rear of the switch to move theconsole to the rear. The console can also be movedin conjunction with seat rotation for operator comfort.See “Cab” for details.

20. 3-POINT HITCH LIFT CONTROL (if equipped)

To raise the 3-point hitch, move the lift control lever,20, to the rear. Moving the lever to the front will lowerthe 3-point hitch. A digital readout of hitch heightposition from0 to99will be displayedon theEIC.See“3-Point Hitch Controls” for details.

21. CRUISE CONTROL OPERATION

Cruise control automatically keeps the engine speedat a specified RPM. Two switches control cruisemode operation. The “CRUISE/OFF” button, 1,enters and exits cruisemode. The “+/--(SET)” button,2, adjusts the cruise setting. When cruise mode isactivated, the engine returns to the last cruisesetting, if possible, based on throttle lever position.

The cruise function can be set to any engine RPM,but the operating cruise RPM cannot exceed thenormal RPM for the current throttle position. Forexample, if the cruise setting is 1800 RPM but thehand throttle if at a normal 1700RPMposition, cruisewill not increase the RPM.

Setting - Move the throttle handle higher than thedesired cruise setting and press the “CRUISE”button, 1, to enter cruise operation. The enginespeedwill go the theRPMof thecruise setting.Adjustthe cruise setting with the “+/--(SET)” button, 2. Setthe cruisemodewith the throttle lever at Fulll Throttle(throttle lever fully forward) whenever possible.

12

13

14

15

16

17

19

18

20

17a

38

1

2

39


1-25

PROTECTING THE ELECTRONIC/ELECTRICALSYSTEMS DURING CHARGING OR WELDING

PRECAUTIONSToavoiddamage to theelectronic/electrical systems,always observe the following:

1. Never make or break any of the charging circuitconnections, including the connection at thebatteries, when the engine is running.

2. Never short any of the charging components toground.

3. Do not use a booster battery of higher than 12volts, nominal voltage.

4. Always observe correct polarity when installingthe batteries or using a booster battery to jumpstart the engine. Follow the instructions inSection 2 of this manual when jump starting thetractor. Connect positive to positive and negativeto negative.

5. Always disconnect the ground cable from thebatteries before carrying out arc welding on thetractor or on any implement attached to thetractor.

• Position the welder ground cable clamp asclose to the welding area as possible.

• If welding is to be carried out in closeproximity to a computer module, then themodule should be removed from the tractor.It is recommended that this procedure becarried out by an authorized dealer.

• Never allow welding cables to lay on, near oracross any electrical wiring or electroniccomponent while welding is in progress.


1-26

WARNINGBatteries contain sulfuric acid. In case of contactwith skin, flush the affected area with water forfive minutes. Seek medical attentionimmediately.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.wear eye protection when working nearbatteries.

DISCONNECTING THE NEGATIVEBATTERY CABLE

IMPORTANT: Failure to disconnect the two groundcable connections at the battery prior to welding onthe tractor or attached implement will result indamage to the electronic and electrical systems.

To disconnect the negative battery cableconnections:

1. Remove the three battery cover attachingbolts, 1.

2. Disconnect the electrical connector, 2.

3. Remove the battery cover, 3.

4. Disconnect the two negative ground cableconnections, 1, from the batteries.

After completing the welding, reinstall the negativecable connections and battery cover.

40

41


1-27

TOWING THE TRACTOR

TRACTOR TOWING

IMPORTANT: The tractor should only be towed ashort distance, such as out of a building. Do not towit down roadways or as a method of transport.

IMPORTANT: For transport purposes, haul thetractorwith all fourwheels ona flat bed trailer or truck.

Use a strong chain if towing the tractor is necessary.Tow the tractor from the rear using the drawbar orthree-point hitch only. Tow the tractor from the frontusing both tie down brackets, 1. Have an operatorsteer and brake the tractor.

To avoid damaging the transmission or othercomponents that turn but are not lubricated duringtowing, observe the following:

• Only tow a short distance• Keep speed below 8 KPH (5 MPH)• If possible, run the engine to provide lubrication,

power steering and power brakes.

CAUTIONDo not tow the tractor faster than 8 kph (5 mph).Steering is much slower and the steering wheelturns harder without the engine running.

WARNINGDonot use cables or rope to tow the tractor. If thecable or rope breaks or slips, it may whip withsufficient force to cause serious injury. Whenusing a chain, attach the chain with the hookopen side facing up. If the hook slips, it will dropdown instead of flying up.

NOTE: If equipped, four wheel drive (FWD) will beengaged if the engine is not running, regardless ofthe position of the FWD activation switch.

1

42


1-28

HAULING THE TRACTOR ON A TRANSPORTER

TRACTOR HAULINGHaul the tractor with all four wheels on a flat bedtrailer or truck.

Securely chain the tractor to the transporter.

Tie down brackets, 1, are provided on the front of thetractor.

IMPORTANT: Do not chain around the four wheeldrive shaft, steering cylinders, front wheel drive axleor other components that could be damaged bycontacting the chain or by heavy loading.

Use the drawbar or drawbar cage for a rear tie downpoint.

1

43

PRE-OPERATION CHECKS

Before operating the tractor, be sure you arethoroughly familiar to the location and operation ofthe controls.

Perform all daily lubrication and maintenanceoperations in accordance with Section 3.

After completing the daily maintenance operations,perform a walk around visual inspection of thetractor. Pay particular attention to the following items:

• Fan belt for cracks• Engine area for accumulation of debris• Hoses, lines and fittings for leaks or damage.• Tires for damage• Hardware for looseness• Driveline and hydraulic pump areas for leaks or

debris accumulation

Make any necessary repairs before using the tractor.

2-1

SECTION 2 - OPERATION

BEFORE OPERATINGRead this section thoroughly. It details the locationand operation of the various instruments, switchesand controls on your tractor. Even if you operateother tractors, you should thoroughly read thissection of the manual and be sure that you arefamiliar with the location and function of all thefeatures of the tractor.

Do not start the engine or attempt to drive or operatethe tractor until you are fully accustomed to all thecontrols. It is too late to learn after the tractor is

moving. If in doubt about any aspect of operation ofthe tractor, consult your authorized dealer.

Pay particular attention to the recommendations forbreaking-in to ensure that your tractor will give thelong and dependable service for which it wasdesigned.

See Section 3 for lubrication and maintenancerequirements. Tractor specifications are listed inSection 5.


2-2

CAB

INTRODUCTIONThe cab has been designed for operator comfort andconvenience. Inside, the walls, roof, and floor areinsulated to reduce noise to a minimum.

Standard features include two doors, a fresh airheater/defroster, air-conditioning, tinted glass, interi-or lights, assist rails, cigar lighter, ashtray, storagebox and an air suspension seat.

ENTERING THE CABThe cab may be entered from the right or left side.

To enter the cab, face a door, 1, then open it. Graspthe “A” post assist rail, 2, and the door assist rail, 3.

Place one foot on the lowest step plate, 4. Use theassist rails to climb the steps. Enter the cab, close thedoor, sit in the seat, and fasten the seat belt.

To exit the cab, release the seat belt, open the door,grasp the assist rails, back out of the cab anddescend the steps using the assist rails.

1

DOORSEach door has an external handle, 1, with a pushbutton, 2. The door may be locked from the outsidebyusing thestart/stopswitch key. Insert the key in theslot in the push button. Rotate the key to lock orunlock the door.

Toopenadoor from theoutside, push inon thebuttonand pull out on the handle.

2


2-3

To open a door from the inside, pull rearward on thedoor handle, 1, thenpushout on the assist rail, 2. Thedoors are rear-hinged and are retained in the fullyopen position by gas springs.

NOTE: Do not use door handle, 1, to close the door.The handle can be bent inwards and it will damagethe latch assembly. Close the door by pulling on theassist rail, 2.

70-660-359

3

OPERATOR’S SEATThe seat has an electrically controlled pneumaticsuspension. The seat is equipped with controls topermit adjustment for personal comfort.

NOTE: Before operating the tractor, it is important toadjust the seat, steering wheel and controls to themost comfortable position.

NOTE:Asensor in theseat detectswhenanoperatoris seated. If the operator leaves the seat withoutapplying the parking brake, an audible alarm willsound until the operator returns to the seat, theparking brake is applied, or for a maximum of twominutes. The sensor also actuates the audible alarmfor 5 seconds if the operator leaves the seat with thePTO engaged.


2-4

SEAT ADJUSTMENTSEach numbered control is discussed under thecorresponding heading.

NOTE: All adjustments should be made in thefollowing order while sitting in the seat.

Adjust the seat using the following procedures:

1. Height/Weight Adjustment

Raise or lower the seat as follows with the keyswitch in the on position.Raise - Depress the top of switch, 1. Releasewhen the desired height is obtained.Lower -Depress the bottomof switch, 1.Releasewhen the desired height is achieved.

2. Backrest Angle Adjustment

Lift control, 2, and tilt the backrest to the desiredposition. Release control, 2, to lock the backrestin position.

NOTE: The backrest will tilt backward far enough tocontact the rear window.

3. Fore/Aft Position Adjustment

Pull up on the handle, 3, and move the seatfore/aft through the 178 mm (7″) adjustmentrange to thedesiredposition.Release thehandleto lock the seat into position.

4. Fore/Aft Isolator Engagement

After selecting the desired fore/aft position, theseat can be held stationary or allowed to isolatefore/aft within the 51mm (2″) limit of the isolator’stravel.Adjust to the desired position as follows:Isolate - Pull up on handle, 4.Lock-out - Push down on handle, 4, while slowlymoving the seat fore and aft. The handle willlower in place and the seat will not move whenthe lock-out position is selected.

5. Dampener Adjustment

The firmness of the ride can be adjusted asfollows:Soft - Rotate control, 5, rearward.Firm - Rotate control, 5, forward.

6. Lumbar Adjustment

Adjust as follows:Increase support - Turn knob, 6, clockwiseDecrease support - Turn knob, 6, counterclock-wise

4

7. Armrest Angle Adjustment

Rotate knurled wheel, 7, on each armrest toadjust to the desired angle.

8. Left Armrest Height Adjustment

The left side armrest, 8, can be positioned evenwith the seat cushion or in four raised positions.To adjust the height:• Raise the armrest to the end of travel (past

vertical).• Lower the armrest until it is evenwith the seat

cushion.• Raise the armrest to obtain positions 2

through 4.

9. Swivel Adjustment

The seat can be adjusted to:• Lock in one position to the left of center.• Lock in one of four positions to the right of

center (increments of 7° for a total of 28°rotation).

• Provide a free swing position without lockingin any position.

To adjust the swing:• Move the swivel control handle, 9, partially to

the rear.• Swing the seat to the desired position.• Release the handle to lock the seat into

position.

NOTE: Moving the control handle fully rearward willprovide the free swing position.


2-5

SEAT BELT

WARNINGThis tractor is equipped with a retractable seatbelt. Always use the seat belt.

The seat belt retracts when not in use. The beltautomatically adjusts for the size of the individual inthe seat.

To fasten the belt, pull the belt from the reel and pushthe tongueend, 1, into thebuckle end, 2, until a “click”indicates it is properly engaged.

To release the belt, push the red release button, 3, onthe buckle and remove the tongue from the buckle.

Thebeltmaybespongedwith clean, soapywater.Donot use solvents, bleach or dye on the belt as thesechemicals will weaken thewebbing. Replace the beltwhen it shows signs of fraying, damage or generalwear.

5

STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMNThe steering columnmay be tilted and telescoped toprovide a comfortable operating position.

Steering Wheel Tilt ControlPulling the tilt control lever, 1, allows the steeringwheel, 2, to be tilted to a comfortable operatorposition. The steering wheel can be tilted upward tothe top stop to allow easy entry and exit of the cab.

6


2-6

Steering Wheel Telescopic AdjustmentRotating the center locking knob, 1, counterclock-wise, will unlock the steering column so the steeringwheel, 2, can be moved fore or aft (telescoped) to acomfortable operating position. Tighten in place byrotating the locking knob clockwise.

IMPORTANT: Your tractor is equipped withhydrostatic power steering. Never hold the steeringwheel against either of the steering stops for morethan 10 seconds or for more than a total of 10seconds in any one minute. Failure to observe thisprecaution may result in damage to the steeringsystem components.

7

RIGHT-HAND CONSOLEThe console can be moved full forward, 1, and fullrearward, 2, or stopped anywhere in between toposition the controls on the console in a comfortableoperator position.

NOTE: When the console is moved aft, the front ofthe console also moves away from the seat. Thisprovides additional leg room while maintaining thecontrols in a comfortable position when the seat isswiveled to the right.

Pressandhold the front of the console control switch,3, to move the console forward. Release the switchwhen the desired position is obtained or when theconsole reaches the limit of forward travel.

Press and hold the rear of the switch for aftmovement. Release the switch at the desiredposition or at the end of aft travel.

21

3

8


2-7

AIR CONDITIONING OPERATIONDepress the air conditioning switch, 1, to activate theair conditioner. Depress the switch a second time todeactivate the air conditioner.

NOTE: The air conditioning system uses R134Arefrigerant. DO NOT mix with other refrigerants.

The temperature control switch, 2, is used tomaintain a constant temperature. Rotate thetemperature control switch counterclockwise to-wards the blue index to increase cooling. Adjust thepressurized fan speed switch, 3, to increase ordecrease air flow.

To aid in defrosting the windshield and side windowsthe air conditioner and heatermay be operated at thesame time. The air conditioner will remove moisturefrom the air while the heater warms the air in the cab.

When the windows are clear, deactivate the airconditioner.

IMPORTANT: Always turn the air conditioner offwhen cooled or dehumidified air is not required. Thisis especially important during cold weather asdamage to the compressor could result. For properair conditioner operation, the cab air filter must beserviced regularly.

9

HEATER OPERATIONMake sure the air conditioner is deactivated exceptduring defrosting. The switch, 1, should be in theextended position.

To increase the cab interior temperature for coldweather operation, start the engine and make surethe coolant temperature bar graph indicates two ormore bars. Rotate the temperature control switch, 2,clockwise to the red index for more heat. Adjust thepressurized fan speed switch, 3, to increase ordecrease air flow.

PRESSURIZER OPERATIONThe pressurizer fan has a three-position switch, 3.Lowspeed is full counterclockwise.Rotate theswitchclockwise to position two for medium speed and toposition three for high speed.

NOTE: The pressurizer fan will operate in one of thethree speeds when the key switch is in the ONposition.

10


2-8

PRESSURIZER VENTSThe pressurizer has adjustable and fixed vents todirect air flowas required.Twosidevents, 1, areusedto defrost and clear the doors. Four additional vents,2, face the operator. To adjust, rotate the vents insidetheir housings to direct air as required. The slidelever inside the vent can be moved side to side todirect air flow to the left or right.

The windshield vent, 3, is not adjustable. This ventaids in defrosting and defogging the windshield. Thecab recirculation vent, 4, is equipped with aserviceable filter. See “Section 3” for service details.

WARNINGThe cab air filter is designed to remove dust fromthe air but will not exclude chemical vapor.Follow the chemical manufacturer’s directionsregardingprotection fromdangerouschemicals.

11

REAR WINDOWTo open the window, rotate the locking handle, 1,clockwise.

12

Two gas-filled springs, 1, will swing the window outand retain it in the open position.

NOTE: Watch for interference between the 3-pointhitch-mounted implement and rear windowwhen therear window is open.

To close the window, pull on the handle or side rails,2.Rotate the lockinghandle counterclockwise to lockthe window.

13


2-9

RIGHT SIDE WINDOWThe window can be positioned in the closed/lockposition, 1, the partially open position, 2, or the fullopen position, 3.

To lock the window in the closed position, pull thehandle in and forward in an arc until the mechanismlocks.

To partially open thewindow, pull the handle in an arcto the mid-position.

To fully open the window, push the handle out in anarc until the handle locks.

14

FRONT WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHERThe windshield wiper is controlled by switch, 1. Theswitch has three positions.

Rotate the switch fully counterclockwise for the offposition. Rotate one notch clockwise for the slowposition. Rotate fully clockwise for the fast position.

Push in on the control knob to activate the washer.

REAR WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER(If Equipped)An optional rear wiper/washer can be installed.

The wiper is controlled by switch, 2. The switch hastwo positions.

Rotate the switch fully counterclockwise for the offposition. Rotate fully clockwise for the on position.

Push in on the control knob to activate the washer.

15


2-10

TOOLBOX

Cab ToolboxA storage area is located under the hinged lid, 1, atthe left rear corner of the cab. Lift the lid to access thestoragearea. The lid is retained in the closedpositionby a magnetic latch.

16

Exterior Toolbox (Dealer-Installed Accessory)An optional toolbox, 1, can be mounted on the frontof the tractor or at the L/H side of the tractor.

The toolbox can be locked and is secured to themounting bracket, 2, by an attaching pin locatedinside the toolbox. (Front mount toolbox shown)

To detach the toolbox, open the toolbox lid, removethe attaching pin, and lift the toolbox off themountingbracket.

The tool box is mounted with the hinge forward toclear the hood.

21

17

RADIO (Factory option or dealer-installedaccessory)A choice of radios, 1, is available from yourauthorized dealer. Operating instructions will besupplied with the radio.

WARNINGBe sure the antenna is positioned so it cannottouch overhead power lines.

NOTE: The radio will only operate with the key-startswitch in the On or Accessory position.

18


2-11

CLEANING THE CAB INTERIORWhen the soft trim material inside the cab becomesdirty, it should be wiped clean. Dip a cloth in a warmwater/detergent solution and wring out as much ofthe water as possible. Wipe the interior material withthe damp cloth. Change the water when it becomesdirty.

The rubber floor covering is designed to allow waterto flow out through the open doors. Wash thecovering carefully and allow it to dry naturally. Avoidgetting water under the mat.


2-12

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (EIC)

19

1. Liquid crystal displays (LCD) (3)2. Indicator lamps (18)3. Bar graphs (2)4. Tractor performance monitor (TPM)

5. Touch sensitive programming switches (11)6. Indicator lamps (3)7. Touch sensitive light control switches (5)8. Bar graphs (2)

INTRODUCTIONThe electronic instrument cluster (EIC) is shownabove with a normal operating display.

When the key-start switch is turned on, a self-test ofall the Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) segments isactivated, the audible alarm will sound forapproximately one second and all lamps will beilluminated briefly, to confirm that the bulbs arefunctioning. The LCD background areas areilluminated when the tractor key switch is turned on.They also have dimmer controlled back lighting.

The EIC is divided into the following areas:

1. The central LCD has transmission gearinformation at the top. Engine speed appears inthe middle display and the bottom displaysoperating hours, ground speedorPTOspeed, asselected.

2. Theupper section consists of colored indicator orwarning lamps,whichprovide operating informa-tion or give warning of system malfunctions.

3. Coolant temperature and engine load aredisplayed in the right bar graphs.

4. The Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM) isdisplayed on the right side of the cluster. TheTPM provides information on 3-point hitch andother selected system information. Fault codeinformation is also displayed.

5. Eleven touch-sensitive switches select differentEIC functions for display on the central displayand TPM. The switches are also used forcalibration purposes.

6. The indicator lamps provide operating informa-tion and give warning of system malfunctions.

7. Five touch-sensitive switches are used to controlthe work lights and instrument cluster back-light-ing brightness.

8. Fuel level and engine oil pressure are displayedin the left bar graphs.


2-13

The following information details the operation andprogramming of the electronic instrument cluster(EIC).

AUDIBLE ALARMAn audible alarm will sound when a warning lightilluminates or a bar graph indicates a malfunction.The alarm will alert the operator that a malfunctionhas occurred.

Depending on the severity of the malfunction, thealarm will sound as follows:

Non-Critical Alarm - An audible alarm sounds for onesecond only. The tractor will continue to operate, butthe cause of the alarm should be investigated andcorrected.

Critical Alarm - A continuous pulsating tone willsound until themalfunction is corrected or the engineis switched off. The alarm will sound and the engine“STOP”message, 1,will flash in thecenter display for30 seconds before automatic engine shutdownoccurs. The cause of the malfunction should belocated and corrected immediately to preventdamage to the tractor.

20

The audible alarm has a rotary volume control, 1,located on the left side of the steering column belowthe front controls. Rotate the alarm cover to adjustthe volume.

1

21


2-14

22

1. Left turn signal2. Trailer 2 turn signal3. Trailer 1 turn signal4. Trailer brake5. Air filter6. Cold start7. Coolant level low8. Alternator charge indicator9. Intercooler overheated10. Transmission lubrication11. Transmission, rear axle/hydraulic

oil temperature

12. Hydraulic/transmission filters13. PTO engaged14. Programmable up shift15. Programmable down shift16. Auto differential lock17. FWD Auto18. Right turn signal19. Parking brake20. System status21. Headlight high beam

INDICATOR, WARNING LAMPS, ANDAUDIBLE ALARMThe twenty-one colored status lamps, shown above,provide operating information or give warning ofsystemmalfunction. The malfunction warning lampsare accompanied by an audible alarm.

Each indicator or warning lamp is discussed underthe corresponding heading found on the followingpages.


2-15

The status lamps/audible alarm function as follows:

1. Left Turn Signal

The Turn Signal lamp, 1, will flash in unison withtractor left-hand turn signal. An audible alarm willsound if the turn signals are left on for more than twominutes.

2. Trailer 2 Turn Signal

Not used.

3. Trailer 1 Turn Signal

Not used. 23

4. Trailer Brake

Not used.

5. Air Filter Restriction

The Air Filter lamp, 5, will illuminate accompanied bythe non-critical alarm if the fault has existed for 10seconds. Stop the tractor and service the air filter toprevent engine damage.

6. Cold Start

The Cold Start lamp, 6, will flash when thetemperature conditions will allow use of the cold start(when set in manual mode). The lamp illuminatessteadily when the cold start system is operating. See“Cold Weather Starting” for details.

7. Coolant Level Low

The Coolant Level lamp, 7, will illuminate whencoolant drops below the sender level. A non-criticalalarm will sound. Check for leaks and refill coolingsystem.

24


2-16

8. Alternator Charge Indicator

The Alternator lamp, 8, will illuminate steady ifalternator is not charging the battery. The lamp willflash and the non-critical alarm will sound if anovercharge condition occurs.

9. Intercooler Overheated

The Intercooler lamp, 9, will illuminate and thenon-critical alarm will sound when an overheatcondition occurs. The cause of the alarm should bedeterminedand corrected before further operation orengine damage may occur.

10. Transmission Pressure

The Transmission Pressure lamp, 10, illuminatedaccompanied by the critical alarm, indicates that thetransmission lubrication circuit oil pressure is low.The engine “STOP” message will flash for 30seconds before automatic shutdown occurs if thefeature 11 is enabled.

Stop the engine and investigate the cause.

11. Transmission, Rear Axle/Hydraulic Oil Tem-perature

The Transmission Temperature lamp, 11, willilluminate accompanied by the critical alarmindicates high oil temperature. The engine “STOP”message will flash for 30 seconds before automaticengine shutdown occurs. Stop the engine andinvestigate the cause.

25


2-17

12. Hydraulic/Transmission Filters

The Filter lamp, 12, continually illuminated indicatesthat the HYDRAULIC filter is blocked or partiallyblocked.

A flashing lamp indicates that the TRANSMISSIONfilter is blocked or partially blocked. Both arenon-critical alarms and the filters should be servicedas soon as practical and certainly within 1 hour ofoperation.

13. PTO Engaged

The PTO On lamp, 13, will illuminate whenever theengine is running and PTO is engaged. The lampwillflash and a five second alarm will sound if theoperator leaves the seat while the PTO is engaged.

14. Programmable Up Shift

The Up Shift lamp, 14, will illuminate whenprogrammable up shift is selected.

15. Programmable Down Shift

The Down Shift lamp, 15, will illuminate whenprogrammable down shift is selected.

26


2-18

16. Differential Lock -- Auto/Traction ControlSystem (TCS)

The Differential Lock lamp, 16, and switch willilluminate when Auto differential lock or TCS isengaged.

Auto differential lock will disengage and reengagewhenonebrake is applied then released, orwhen the3-point hitch FASTRAISE/WORKswitch is activatedthen deactivated. If equipped with TCS the front andrear differential locks will also disengage andreengage with hard turning angles.

The indicator light on the instrument panel will go outwhen differential lock has disengaged.

To turn off auto differential lock or TCS, depress therear part of the switch.

NOTE: TCSwill disengage at speeds up to 10 kph (6MPH) at turn angles of 20° or higher and reengageat angles less than 20°. TCS will disengage atspeeds between 10-15 kph (6-9 MPH) at turn anglesof 10° or higher and reengage at angles less than10°.

NOTE: Auto differential lock and TCS willautomatically disengage completely if the unit isoperated above 16 kph (10 MPH).

17. Four Wheel Drive (FWD) -- Auto/TractionControl System (TCS)

The FWD lamp, 17, illuminates when switched toautomatic FWD mode or TCS mode.

NOTE: Lamp, 17, will turn off when one brake isapplied and come on when the brake is released.TCSwill also disengage at speeds of 10 kph (6MPH)or below at turn angles of 30° and higher or between10-20 kph (6-13 MPH) at turn angles of 25° or higherand reengage at angles less than 30° or 25°respectively. As well as competely disengage at anyangle above 24 kph (15 MPH) and reengage under24 kph (15 MPH).

18. Right Turn Signal

The Turn Signal lamp, 18, will flash in unison withtractor right-hand turn signal. An audible alarm willsound if the turn signals are left on for more than twominutes.

27


2-19

19. Parking Brake

With the KEY-START switch on, a continuallyilluminated parking brake lamp, 19, indicates that theparking brake is applied. If the gearshift lever ismoved from neutral to a gear position with theparking brake applied, the alarm will sound, thetransmission will be disabled and a “P” operatorprompt will flash in the gear display. To drive thetractor, move the shift lever to neutral, apply the footbrake, release the parking brake and select atransmission gear.

If the KEY-START switch is turned off, and theparking brake is not applied, a pulsating alarm willsound continuously in unison with the flashingparking brake lamp, 19, for approximately twominutes or until the parking brake is applied,whichever occurs first.

If the operator leaves the seat with the enginerunning and gear shift in neutral, the parking brakepulsating audible alarm will signal in unison with theflashing parking brake lamp for 2 minutes or until thebrake is applied.

WARNINGTo avoid personal injury, always apply theparking brake before leaving the tractor seat.

20. System Status

The System Status lamp, 20, is illuminated when allsystems are normal. It flashes when a malfunction isdetected inasystemmonitoredby thewarning lampsor bar graphs.

21. Headlight High Beam

The High Beam lamp, 21, will illuminate when thetractor lights are switched to high beam.

28


2-20

BAR GRAPH DISPLAYS (LCD)The four bar graphs each consist of twenty LCDsegments.

All bar graph sensors are continuously tested forfaults. If a fault occurs, the bar graph will flash and afault code will be stored.

Fuel LevelThe outside left bar graph, 1, shows fuel level. Eachsegment of the bar graph display representsone-twentieth (approximately 5 percent) of the totalfuel content of the tank.

When the fuel level falls so that only two segments ofthe bar graph are displayed, the bar graph will flashcontinually and the non-critical alarm will sound forone second.

Engine Oil PressureThe inside left bar graph, 2, indicates engine oilpressure. With normal engine oil pressure, up tosixteen segments of the bar graph will be displayed.This is represented by the green area of the adjacentrange display.

Should engine oil pressure fall below a designatedlevel, the bar graph will flash. The critical alarm willsound, the word “STOP” will flash in the centraldisplay for 30 seconds and the engine willautomatically shut down.

Stop the engine immediately and investigate thecause.

NOTE: The bar graph indicates engine oil pressureonly. It is not an indication of oil level. The engine oillevelmust be checked daily bymeans of the dipstick.

29


2-21

Engine Coolant TemperatureThe right inside bar graph, 1, registers coolanttemperature. One segment of the bar graph will bedisplayed if the engine is cold. The number ofsegments displayed will increase as the enginewarms up. With the engine at normal operatingtemperature, up to fifteen segments will bedisplayed. The normal working range is indicated bythe green area of the adjacent range display.

Should the coolant temperature exceed a predeter-mined level, the coolant temperature bar graph willflash. The critical alarm will sound, the word “STOP”will flash in thecentral display for 30seconds, and theengine will automatically shut down.

Stop the engine immediately and investigate thecause.

NOTE: The bar graph indicates engine coolanttemperature only. It is not an indication of coolantlevel. The engine coolant must be checked daily.

Engine LoadThe right outside bar graph, 2, relates to engine load.The number of segments displayed will increase asthe engine load increases.

COOLANT TEMP ENGINE LOAD

30


2-22

AUTOMATIC ENGINE SHUTDOWNAn automatic engine shutdown feature is standardequipment. This feature will automatically shut downthe engine within 30 seconds if engine oil pressurefalls below or engine coolant temperature risesabove predetermined levels. The engine will alsoshut down after 30 seconds if the transmission lowpressure lamp or the transmission high temperaturelamp illuminates. See oil temperature softwaredescribed later in this section. This feature protectsthe engine and drivetrain of an unattended tractorcarrying out stationary PTO work.

WARNINGThe engine shutdown feature is fully automatic.It can be overridden by the operator to drive thetractor to a safe location. The override switch isto the right of the steering column and shouldonly be used to move the tractor far enough toavoid a dangerous situation, such as traffic.

A lamp is illuminated in the switch when override isenabled. See “Shut Down Override Switch Opera-tion” in the “Engine Operation” section later in thissection.

CENTRAL DISPLAYThree liquid crystal displays (LCD) are located in thecenter of the instrument cluster.

At the top of the display is the digital transmissiongear shift position display, 1.

In the center is the digital engine speed display, 2.

The bottom LCD, 3, will display:

• Engine hours accumulated (actual time)• Tractor ground speed (MPH or km/h)• PTO speed (rev/min)• Service alert indicator

31


2-23

TRANSMISSION GEAR SHIFT POSITIONDISPLAYThe upper LCD, 1, provides a display of the gearselected.

The left position, 2, displays a letter as follows:

F - Forward gear selected*

N - Neutral selected

R - Reverse gear selected*

C - Creeper gear speeds selected (if equipped)

A - Automatic shift selected

P - Parking brake applied*

U - Upshift selected*

d - Down shift selected*

The right digit(s), 3, display gear 1-16.

*If the letter is flashing, the display is indicating an“Operator Prompt” where the park brake isinappropriately on or off or out of sequence with thetransmission control lever. To return to normaloperation, release or apply the park brake asappropriate. Return the transmission control lever toneutral, release the park brake, then shift to eitherforward or reverse as desired.

The right position, 3, represents the gear selected.

32

ENGINE SPEED - DIGITAL DISPLAYWith the engine running, the digital value, 1, of theengineRPMwill be displayed, togetherwith theRPMlegend, 2, in the center LCD.

The engine LCD will register in increments of 10RPM.

If a critical engine or driveline fault should occur, theword “STOP” will flash for 30 seconds in the displayarea and the engine will shut down automatically.

33


2-24

SELECTABLE DISPLAYSUsing the key pad, the lower display will allow theoperator to select one of three displays as follows:

Engine Hour MeterWhen the KEY-START switch is turned on, the LCDwill display the hours the engine has operated, 1, andthe hour meter symbol, 2.

The operator may manually select ground speed orPTO speed. Driving the tractor will cause the displayto change automatically to ground speed. The hourmeter display may be recalled at any time bytouching switch, 3, Figure 35.

With the engine running, the hour meter willaccumulate hours in increments of 0.1 hours until1999.9 hours are reached. After that time, the hourmeter will accumulate complete hours only, e.g.2000, 2001 hours, etc.

NOTE: Accumulated hours are stored in thecomputer permanent memory which is not affectedby disconnecting the tractor batteries.

The hour meter may be programmed to remind theoperator when the next scheduled service is due.When a Service Alert is reached, the word“SERVICE”, 3, will flash along with the selecteddisplay. See “Programming the Service AlertIndicators” later in this section.

34


2-25

Ground Speed Display (Speedometer)NOTE: The electronic instrument panel is set at thefactory to display either English (MPH & FT.) orMetric (km/h & METERS.) If required, the displaymaybe reprogrammed to show thedesired valuesbyholding the E/M switch, 4, for three seconds. Thedisplay will change and convert the digits to the newvalues.

Touch switch, 1, to show the ground speed in themain display. TheMPH or km/h legend, 5, Figure 34,as appropriate, will also be displayed.

NOTE: The speedometer senses rotation of the rearaxle and may be subject to errors caused by theeffects of wheel slip, tire pressures/condition, etc. Ifthe optional radar sensor is installed, the tractorsenses true ground speed for greater measurementaccuracy.

NOTE: The lower central display will automaticallyshow ground speed if the tractor is traveling at morethan 20 km/h (12.4 MPH ). If required to display anyother function, the appropriate selector switch mustbe continuously depressed.

Power Take-Off Display

540/1000 RPM PTO-Equipped Units(Model 2145)Touch switch, 2, and the PTO 540 legend, 4, Figure34, will display, together with the PTO speed in theLCD. If the 1000 rev/min PTO shaft is in use, touchthe selector switch again and the PTO 1000 legendwill display together with a digital display of PTOspeed.

The PTO has a non-critical overspeed alert. If 540PTO speed is greater than 630 RPM or 1000 PTOspeed is greater than 1152 RPM, the “PTO ON”status lampwill flash and a second audible alarmwilloccur. The green system status lamp will also flashwhen the PTO status “overspeed” alert occurs.

1000 RPM PTO Equipped Units(Models 2160, 2180, 2210)Touch switch, 2, and the PTO 1000 legend willdisplay, together with the PTO speed.

35


2-26

EIC TRACTOR PERFORMANCE MONITOR (TPM)

INTRODUCTIONThe Tractor Performance Monitor (TPM), 1, islocated in the lower right-hand panel and includes:

Automatic Display Information• Hitch enabled (with 3-point only)• Hitch position digital value (with 3-point only)• Hitch disabled (with 3-point only)• Fault code indicator

Selectable Display Information• Area per hour forecaster (acres or hectares)• Area accumulated (acres or hectares)• Wheel slip percentage with adjustable alarm

point (optional feature)• Battery voltage• 540 PTO speed in RPM’s (if equipped)• 1000 PTO speed in RPM’s scale• Distance measurement in feet or meters

36


2-27

AUTOMATIC DISPLAY INFORMATIONThe following information is automatically displayed:

Hitch Disabled Symbol (with 3-point Hitch only)The hitch disabled symbol, 1, is displayed when the3-point linkage is out of phase with the 3-point hitchcontrol lever. See “3-Point Hitch Control” later in thissection.

NOTE: If the Hitch Disabled Symbol is flashing, afault has occurred. The3-point hitchwarning lightwillalso be flashing on the right-hand console whichrequires attention before proper operation of thetractor hitch can occur. See “Fault Code Indicator”later on this page.

Hitch Position Display (with 3-point Hitch only)This display, 2, advises the operator of the relativeposition of the lower links (and implement) bymeansof numbers ranging from “0” (fully lowered position)to “99” (maximumheight position.) See “3-pointHitchControl” later in this section.

Hitch Enabled Symbol (with 3-point Hitch only)The hitch enabled symbol, 3, is displayed to advisethe operator when the 3-point linkage is in phasewiththe 3-point hitch control lever. See “3-Point HitchControl” later in this section.

Fault Code IndicatorIn the event that a fault occurs within the tractor’selectrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol“READ YOUR MANUAL,” 4, will flash on and off.

Fault codes can be reviewed using the proceduredetailed in the “EIC-Programming” section later inthis section.

If the fault code indicator or fault codes aredisplayed,refer to the “EIC Programming” section forinformation on retrieving and clearing the display.

37


2-28

SELECTABLE DISPLAY INFORMATIONThe following information may be selected fordisplay:

Area Per Hour ForecasterTouch the AREA/HR switch, 4. The “AREA/HOUR”legend, 1, will display, together with a forecast of thearea that will be worked in one hour, 2, if the currentrate of work is continued.

This forecast is based on the last 5 seconds runningaverage. The forecast may be in acres (FT), 3, orhectares (METERS).

The unit ofmeasure, FT/METER, can be changed byholding the E/M English/metric switch for 3 seconds.

“0” will be displayed whenever the tractor is stopped.

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, area perhour calculations are based on axle speed and aresubject to inaccuracies caused by the wheel slip thatmay be present.

Area AccumulatorAccumulated area (total area worked), 1, can bedisplayed by depressing the AREA switch, 2. Area isdisplayed in acres or hectares. “AREA” and “ON”, 6,will be displayed. Touch the START/STOP switch, 3,and theword “OFF”, 5,will display indicating the areacounter is shut off. If the 3-point hitch is raised, theword “OFF” should appear to stop area accumula-tion. Lower the 3-point hitch to again display “ON”and begin accumulating area.

NOTE: A remote implement status switch can alsobe added to the tractor by use of the purple wire(CM40) locatedbehind theoperator’s seat, under thefloormat. By adding a contact switch to a trailingimplement, the area counter can be turned on and offby lowering and raising the implement.

IMPORTANT: 3 Point Hitch area counter point mustbe set to 99 for the remote implement status switchsystem to operate. See Three Point Hitch Position --Area Counter found later in this section.

English display (acres), designated by “FT” legend,4, starts to accumulate in increments of 0.1 acres.When 1000 acres are reached, area accumulationcontinues in whole acres. When 9999 acres arereached, the display will reset to zero.

Metric display (hectares), designated by METERSlegend starts to accumulate in increments of.01hectares. When 100.0 hectares are reached, areaaccumulation continues in increments of 0.1hectares until 1000 is reached. The display will thenaccumulate whole hectares. When 9999 hectaresare reached, the display will reset to zero.

38

39


2-29

WithAREAselected, areaaccumulation canbe resetto zero by holding down the START/STOP switch, 3,for three seconds until a “beep” is heard from theaudible alarm.

NOTE: If the radar option is not installed, areacalculations arebasedonaxle speedandare subjectto inaccuracies caused by wheel slip that may bepresent.

Wheel Slip (with Radar Option)Touch the %SLIP selector switch, 4. The “%SLIP”legend, 1, will display together with a two-digit slipvalue, 2, in the main TPM display. The slip value isdetected by the comparison of theoretical groundspeed (axle rotation sensor) with true ground speed(radar sensor).

Slip zero calibration occurs automatically. However,when widely differing soil conditions are encoun-tered, it may be necessary to manually zero thewheel slip ratio, as follows:

Drive the tractor in the soil conditions to be worked,with implement raised, at a constant speed of lessthan 16 km/h (10 MPH). This will determine theminimum wheel slip under light operating conditionsto be used as a 0% reference point. With % SLIPfunction selected, hold down the START/STOPswitch, 5, for at least three seconds.

A “beep” from the alarm and “0” in the displayindicates that the module has been calibrated to aminimum slip condition.

WARNINGThe radar ground speed sensor emits a lowintensity microwave signal which will not causeany ill effects in normal use. Although the signalintensity is low, do not look directly into the faceof the sensor while in operation so as to avoideye damage.

IMPORTANT:Before carrying out arc welding on thetractor or on any equipment attached to the tractor,disconnect all power and ground leads from thebatteries in order to avoid possible damage toelectronic components.

Slip Alarm (with Radar Option)A slip alarm point may be entered - see “EICProgramming.” When wheel slip exceeds the valueentered, the alarmwill sound for one second. Ifwheelslip is selected, the “% SLIP”, 1, legend will bedisplayed. In addition, the “ALARM”, 3, legend willflash and continue to flash until wheel slip is reducedbelow the present level.

40


2-30

Battery VoltageTouch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 3. The “VOLTS”legend, 1, will display, together with a digital displayof battery voltage, 2, to the nearest tenth volt.

41

PTO Speed 540 RPM Scale (If Equipped)Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, again and the“540 PTO” legend, 1, will be displayed, together witha digital display of PTO speed, 2. This feature allowsthe operator to view both PTO speed and groundspeed while operating.

PTO Speed 1000 RPM ScaleTouch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, again and the“1000 PTO” legend, 3, will be displayed, togetherwith a digital display of PTO speed, 2. This featureallows the operator to view both PTO speed andground speed while operating.

42

Distance MeasurementTouch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 6 again and the“DIST FT”, 1, or “DIST METERS” legend will bedisplayed. The tractor will now measure distance infeet or meters. Operate the tractor normally andpress the START/STOP switch, 5, at the point wheredistance measuring is to begin. The “ON” legend, 2,will be displayed along with a digital display ofdistance traveled, 3. At the end of the distance, againpress the START/STOP switch, 5. A digital display ofdistance traveled in feet or meters will be displayedwith the “OFF” legend, 4. If the START/STOP switchis again pressed, additional feet or meters will beadded to the existing measurement. Pressing theSTART/STOPswitch, 5, formore than three secondswill zero the display.

43


2-31

EIC PROGRAMMING

OPERATOR CALIBRATIONIn order that themodulesmay correctly calculate anddisplaywork done (area per hour, area accumulated,etc.) various factors must be entered into themodules. To enter the set upmode, turn the key-startswitch on and hold down the SET UP/SELECTswitch, 2, for three seconds until a “beep” is heard.

44

The TPM display will indicate __ __ __ 1, whichmeans the EIC is in the first of 12 programming anddiagnostic modes. Touching the DIGIT SET switch,4, Figure 44, will cycle through modes 1 - 12. Mode,1, is for operator calibrations. Modes 2 - 12, arediscussed in the Service Manual.

To enter Mode 1, hold the SET UP/SELECT switch,1, for three seconds. The TPM display will show IMP.WIDTH CAL and a flashing left-hand digit.

When in the set up mode, repeatedly touching theSET UP/SELECT switch, 1, will cause the modulesto run through the various set up functions in thefollowing order:

1. Implement width

2. Slip alarm point (option)

3. Service Alert Indicator I

4. Service Alert Indicator II

5. Ground speed calibration

6. Area Preset

7. Fault code display - ON/OFF

8. Three Point Hitch position -- Area Counter

45


2-32

Setting Implement WidthIn order that the modules may calculate the workdone, theworkingwidth of the implement in usemustbe entered into the memory.

Implement width is a four-digit display and willappear as “000.0” feet, 2, or “00.00” meters with theleft-hand digit, 1, flashing. “IMPWIDTHCAL,” 7, andeither “FT,” 6, or “METERS” will also be displayed.

Touch the digit select switch, 4, to move the flashingdigit to the right. Touch the digit set switch, 5, toincrease the numerical value of the flashing digit.

For example: To set an implement working width of12.5 feet, a display of “012.5” is required. Touch theDIGIT SELECT switch, 4, to cause the second digitfrom the left to flash. Touch the DIGIT SET switch, 5,to change the flashing digit from “O” to “1.”

Use the DIGIT SELECT, 4, and DIGIT SET, 5,switches to change the remaining digits until “012.5”is displayed.

NOTE: The area measured will only be accurate ifthere is no implement overlap when the tractor turnsaround at the end of a run to make another pass.Alternatively, the implement width entered intomemorymay be reduced by the estimated amount ofoverlap.

With the required implement width displayed, touchthe SET UP/SELECT switch, 3, to enter theimplement width into memory and change thedisplay to the % SLIP alarm point.

46

Setting The Slip Alarm Point (Option)NOTE: If the optional radar unit is not installed, theslip alarm functionwill be omitted from the sequence.

The slip alarmpoint will appear as a two-digit display,1, with the left-hand digit flashing. “% SLIP,” 2, and“ALARM,” 3, will also be displayed with the wordCAL, 4.

Use the DIGIT SET, 7, and DIGIT SELECT, 6,switches to change the value to the required setting.If the slip alarm is not required, set the display, 1, to“00.”

With the required slip alarm point displayed, touchthe SET UP/SELECT switch, 5, to change the lowerdisplay to show the first Service Alert Indicator “I.”

NOTE: Slip limit control will not operate below 0.8km/h (0.5 MPH). Slip limit control will disengagewhen the 3-point linkage is raised and re-engagewhen the implement is lowered into the ground.

47


2-33

Programming the “Service Alert Indicators”During normal tractor operation, the hour meter willreach preprogrammed service intervals.

This causes the word “SERVICE,” 1, to flashwhenever the key is on if service is due. The symbolwill flash for thenext 10hoursof operation, or until thespecific service is completed and the display is reset.

The operator can program 1, 2 or no Service AlertIndicators into the lower selectable LCD.

Example: The operator wants the hour meter tosignal for minor service every 50 hours and majorservice to be performed every 300 hours. 48

The letter “I,” 1, and the 3-digit number, 2, in thedisplay corresponds to the “next service due” intervalpreviously entered into the memory. If “I_ 025” isdisplayed, the hour meter will signal the operatorevery 25 hours that service is due. A “I_000”programmed into the displaywill disable the “ServiceAlert Indicator.”

The left-hand digit of the displaywill be flashing. If thedigit is already reading “0,” there is noneed tochangeit. Touch the DIGIT SELECT switch, 3, to select thenext digit to the right, which will flash.

49

Each touch of the DIGIT SET switch, 6, will increasethe value of the flashing digit, 1, by one. When thedigit reaches “5”, touch the DIGIT SELECT switch, 5,which will cause the next digit, 2, in the display toflash. Change the value of this digit, if necessary,using the DIGIT SET switch, 6, as previouslydescribed until it reaches “0.”

With “1-050” displayed, touch the SET UP/SELECTswitch, 4. The Service Alert Indicator II can now beprogrammed for the 300- hour service interval.

Every 50 hours of tractor operation the word“SERVICE” will flash when the key is on. The displaywill continue to flash until the START/STOP, RESETswitch, 3, is used to cancel the flashing display afterreentering the Service Alert programming mode.

50


2-34

To program the Service Alert Indicator II, the processis the same as for Service Alert I, but when the SETUP/SELECT switch, 3, is touched, the left digits, 1,will be “II.” The next digit, 2, will be flashing indicatingthat the operator can now program the 300-hourService Alert Interval II.

51

CANCEL FLASHING SERVICE INDICATORTo identifywhich service is dueand to cancel thealertafter the service has been completed, reenter theservice alert programming menu. If the word“SERVICE,” 1, is flashing and a single I is displayed,complete the 50-hour service as described in the“Lubrication and Maintenance” section and cancelthe alert by holding the START/STOP, RESETswitch, 3, for three seconds.

The left digit will begin flashing indicating that theservice hour interval can now be changed. If nochange is desired, touch the SET UP/SELECTswitch, 4, to select the service alert II indicator. If theword “SERVICE”, 1, is flashing and II, 5, is displayed,the 300-hour service, 2, is required. To cancel thealert after the service has been completed, hold theSTART/STOP, RESET switch, 3, for three seconds.

NOTE: If the START/STOP,RESET switch, 3, is heldfor anadditional three seconds, thepreviously storedservice alert interval will be reset to 0. To reprograma new interval, review the previous programmingsteps.

After the service intervals have been entered, touchthe SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, to view and changethe Ground Speed Calibration constant.

52


2-35

Ground Speed Calibration (Non-Radar TractorsOnly)The ground speed in the display is calibrated in thefactory to suit the static radius of the rear tires.However, should tires of a different size be installed,weights or equipment permanently installed on thetractor that would alter the static radius of the tires bymore than 6 mm (0.25″), the EIC should berecalibrated to display a more accurate groundspeed using the following method:

Ensure that the tire pressures are correct for the loadbeing carried. See “Tire Load/Inflation Tables” inSection 5.

Park the tractor on a firm level surface and carefullymeasure the distance from the center of the rear hubto the ground, Figure 54. This is the static loadedradius.

While in the programming mode, ensure that theword “CAL,” 4, the “FT, 3, or METERS” legend andthe previously entered calibration number, 2, isdisplayed with the left-hand digit, 1, flashing.

If required, change the value of the flashing digitusing the DIGIT SET switch, 7, as describedpreviously in “Programming the Service AlertIndicator.”

Enter the actual static loaded radius of the tire ininches to the closest 0.1″or to the closestmm if usingmetric units.

NOTE: The minimum allowable number is 641 mm(26″).

To select the next digit to the right, use the DIGITSELECTswitch, 6, andwhen that digit is flashing usetheDIGITSETswitch, 7, to change thevalue.Repeatfor the remaining digits.

When the required calibration number is displayed,enter it into the memory by holding the SETUP/SELECT switch, 5, for three seconds. Touch theswitch again to cycle to the next calibration stepwhich is “Area Preset.”

Ground Speed Calibration (Radar-EquippedTractors)Tractors fitted with the optional radar gun automati-cally recalculate and change the loaded radius. Thesteps described in the previous paragraphs are notnecessary. This automatic recalculation occurs overa 15-minute time period when tractor speed is above16 Kph (10 mph).

The operator can manually reset the loaded radiusby zeroing the wheel slip as described earlier in thissection.

NOTE: The loaded radius numbers are onlydisplayed in the EIC. The values are stored in the(CCM) Chassis Control Module.

53

54


2-36

Area PresetNormally, area would be reset to zero by holding theSTART/STOP switch, 3, down until a “beep” is heardfrom the alarm (approximately three seconds) whenin the AREA PRESET calibration mode. However, itis possible to enter a value other than zero andmeasure additional area worked. Area measuredduring a previous operation can be entered.

The area preset will appear as a four-digit display, 1,with the left-hand digit flashing. “AREA,” 8, will alsobe displayed in the LCD along with the CAL legend,2, and FT, 7, or METERS. Use the DIGIT SET, 6, andDIGIT SELECT, 5, switches, as previously de-scribed, to change the value to the desired setting orto zero.

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 4, and thedisplay will cycle to fault codes, ON/OFF.

55

FAULT CODES ON/OFFFault codes can be displayed during tractoroperation or not displayed to allow full operation ofthe TPM.

In the event that a fault occurs within the tractorelectrical circuits, a malfunction warning symbol“READ YOURMANUAL,” 1, will flash on and off andthe code will be stored.

The tractor is factory set to display normal TPMfunctions and to store fault codes. The “OFF” legend,3, will be displayed.

To view fault codes as they occur, press theSTART/STOP switch, 4. The display will show the“READ YOUR MANUAL” symbol, 1, and the “ON”legend, 2. Press the START/STOP switch again andthe “READ YOUR MANUAL” legend, 1, and the“OFF” legend, 3, will be displayed.

When “ON” is displayed, fault codes will appear asthey occur and also be stored in memory. When“OFF” is displayed, the fault code will be stored inmemory and the “READYOURMANUAL” symbol, 1,will be displayed.

56


2-37

Fault codes, 1, will be flashing three-digit numberspreceded by the letter “F.”

The fault code indicates the tractor circuit or sensorin which the fault lies and the type of fault, e.g., shortcircuit, open circuit, sensor failure, etc. If these codesshould occur, contact your authorized dealer andquote the fault code number.

The modules and fault code ranges are as follows:

FAULTCODE

NUMBER SYSTEM MODULE

F000-F099 Electronic Draft Control

F100-F199 Right-hand Controls

F200-F299 Electronic Instrument Cluster

F300-F399 Electronic Transmission Control

F400-F499 Engine

A complete detailed list of fault codes may beseen at your Buhler Versatile dealer.

CLEARING FAULT CODESDuring normal operation, when fault code “ON” isselected, all fault codes will be displayed as theyoccur and continue flashing until the fault iscorrected.

The code(s) can be temporarily cleared to return tonormal operation by holding the START/STOPswitch, 2, for three seconds. When the key switch isturned to off and the tractor is restarted, the faultcode(s) will be redisplayed. Use the START/STOPswitch to again cancel the display of the fault codes.

Touch the SET UP/SELECT switch, 3, and thedisplay will cycle back to the first programming stepfor review or further programming.

THREE POINT HITCH POSITION -- AREACOUNTERUsed for setting the position of the 3-Point Hitch atwhich the area counter stops accumulating. Thisfeature is used with a Three Point Hitch implementwhere you wish to stop accumulating area with theimplement raised above a certain level. If used, setthe value of the flashing digit using the DIGIT SETswitch as described previously in this section. Thevalue may be set to any value from 00 (Three PointHitch at lowest point) to 99 (Three Point Hitch athighest position). The setting must be 99 for theremote implement status switch system to operate.See area accumulator section found earlier in thissection.

57

58


2-38

EIC LIGHTING DISPLAY

EXITING THE SET UP MODETo exit the operator calibration mode, touch the E/Mswitch, 2. The display, 1, will show “ _ _ _1.” Touchingthe switch again will return the display to normaloperation. Alternatively, to exit the set up mode, turnthe key-start switch off.

The EIC and Tractor Performance Monitor are nowprogrammed for use.

LIGHTING DISPLAYThe lightingdisplay, 1, is used to activate andmonitorthe dash and work light circuits.

The operation of the lighting display is covered underthe “Lighting and Accessory Power” heading.

59

60


2-39

LIGHTS AND ACCESSORY POWER POINTS

MASTER LIGHT SWITCHLights are controlled by the four position MASTERLIGHT switch, 1, as follows:

A Full counterclockwise is off

*B Parking lights on

*C Headlights and parking lights on

*D Work lights, headlights and parking lights on.The work lights are selected by using thetouch-sensitive switches, 2, on the electronicinstrument cluster (EIC).

* Monitor lamp, 7, will be on in these positions.

The MASTER LIGHT switch will turn all work lightsoff. When the master switch is again turned to thework lights position, the same work lights will beilluminated.

If the light switch is in any position other than offwhenthe key is turned off, a five second audible alert willbe activated. Turn the light switch off to cancel thealert.

WORK LIGHTSReference the work light selector switches, 2, andmonitor, 3:

To operate the lower front and side work lights, 2,Figure 64, touch selector switch, 1. The indicatorlights will illuminate at lower position 1 on themonitorto indicate the lights are activated.

To operate the lower rear work lights, 3, Figure 65,touch selector switch, 2. The indicator light willilluminate at position 2 on the monitor to indicate thelights are activated.

NOTE: A remote work lamp can also be activatedwith switch, 2, using the seven pin auxiliary trailerconnector pin 7, Figure 67.

To operate the upper rear work lights, 4, Figure 65,touch selector switch, 3. The indicator light willilluminate at position 3 on the monitor to indicate thelights are activated.

NOTE: If the hazard lights are on, the rear work lightswill automatically be turned off.

To operate the optional upper front work lights, 4,Figure64, touch selector switch, 4.The indicator lightwill illuminate at position 4 on the monitor to indicatethe lights are activated.

Touchany switcha second time to turn the respectivelights off.

61

PANEL DIM CONTROLDimmer control, 4, can be activated with the masterlights on or off. Touch the DIMMER switch, 4, and theinstrument console back lights will go from bright todim. Hold the switch and the lights will dim towhatever level the operator requires.

Touch the switch again to select bright.

ROTARY BEACONAvailable from Buhler Versatile PartsPush the top of the switch, 5, to actuate the rotarybeacon. The top of the switch is illuminated when on.Push the bottom of the switch to turn the beacon off.

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTSThe switch, 6, is internally illuminated and, whenactuated by pushing the top of the switch, will flashin unison with all the tractor and trailer turn signalsand the green indicator lamps in the EIC.

Push the bottom of the switch to turn off the hazardlights.

NOTE:When a turn signal is activated, the activatedlights will flash, indicating a turn, while the lights onthe other side of the tractor will be lightedcontinuously. For your protection, use the hazardwarning lights when traveling on public roads unlessprohibited by law.


2-40

INTERIOR LIGHTSTwo lights, 1, are provided to illuminate the cabinterior. Each light switch can be set to one of threepositions:

A On

B Off

C On when a door is opened

62

MULTI-FUNCTION SWITCHThe stalk-type multi-function switch operates thehorn, turn signals, headlight flash and is used toselect HI or LOW beam.

TURN SIGNALSMove the stalk to position 1 to indicate a right-handturn. Move the stalk to position 4 to indicate aleft-hand turn.

The turn signal warning light (and trailer lights, ifconnected) will also flash when the signals areoperated.

HEADLIGHTS HIGH/LOW BEAMSWith the headlights switched on, pull the stalk toposition 3, to change from one beam to the otherbeam.

HEADLIGHT FLASHWith lowbeamheadlights on, pull the stalk toposition2, to flash the high beams.Release the stalk to returnto low beams.

When the headlights are not on, pull the stalk toposition 2 to flash the high beamheadlights, and thenrelease to turn off the high beams.

HORNPress in the end of the stalk, 5, to actuate the horn.

63


2-41

FRONT LIGHTSTheheadlights, 1, are illuminatedwhen theMASTERLIGHTswitch is in theheadlight orwork light position.All four lights are illuminated when high beam isselected. The outer headlights are illuminated whenlow beam is selected.The side and lower work lights, 2, are illuminated bytouching the work light selector switch, 1, with themaster switch in the work light position.The directional signals/hazard lights, 3, are selectedwith the hazard warning light switch or themulti-function switch.The optional upper front work lights, 4, areilluminatedby touching thework light selector switch,4, with the master switch in the work light position.

64

REAR LIGHTSThe parking lights, 1, are illuminated with the lightswitch in the park, headlight, or work light positions.The brake lights, 1, are illuminated when both brakepedals are depressed.The rear directional/hazard lamps, 2, flash in unisonwith the front directional/hazard lights.The lower rear work lights, 3, are illuminated whenthe master switch is in the work light position andwork light selector switch, 2, is selected. The centerwork light may be turned off while leaving the outerlamps illuminated. Use the toggle switch located onthe rear of the center lamp’s housing to turn off thelight.The upper rear work lights, 4, are illuminated whenthe master switch is in the work light position andselector switch, 3, is selected.

65

SEVEN PIN AUXILIARY CONNECTORA standard SAE seven pin connector, 1, is providedto operate the electrical system on implements andtrailers. Pin information is as follows:

PIN

NUMBER CIRCUIT

WIRE

NUMBER

TAPE

COLOR

MAX

AMPS

1 Ground RM4 White N/A

2 Work Lamp RM141 Black 10A

3 Flasher L/H RM287Y Yellow 10A

4 Stop Lamp RM55 Red 10A

5 Flasher R/H RM287Z Green 10A

6 Tail Lamps RM162 Brown 10A

7 Aux Power RM131 Blue 20A

ThematingSAEsevenpin connectorP/N59624maybe purchased from your Buhler Versatile dealer.

1

66


2-42

SINGLE PIN AUXILIARY CONNECTORA 12-volt single pin power connector, 1, is located atthe right rear of the cab. The connector has an 8-amprating to power electrical monitoring equipment. Theconnector is activated by the KEY-START switch.The mating single pin connector P/N 86508819 maybe purchased from your Buhler Versatile dealer.

THREE PIN AUXILIARY MATINGCONNECTORA 12-volt, three pin connector, 2, is installed to allowthe attachment and operation of electronic controlboxes.

Terminal, 3, is controlled by the key switch. Thisterminal has a 30-amp rating.

Terminal, 4, is powered continually. This terminal hasan 8-amp rating.

Terminal, 5, is ground.

The mating male three pin connector P/N 86032122may be obtained from your Buhler Versatile Dealer.

67

MONITOR MOUNT -- AUXILIARY POWERBAR KIT (P/N 86030509)This kit provides additional power sources for cabmounted monitors.

Terminal, 3, is controlled by the key switch. Thisterminal has a 15-amp rating.

Terminal, 4, is powered continually. This terminal hasan 15-amp rating.

Terminal, 5, is ground.

68


2-43

AUXILIARY CONTROL MOUNTINGLOCATIONSTwo 10 mm cap screws, 2, are located in the rightrear panel for attaching an equipment monitor orcontrol box.

An alternate mounting position is provided on theinner face of the right front “A” post, 1.

NOTE: When installing two-way communicationradios:

1. Install the radio on the left side of the cab.

2. Route the co-axial cable out the left side of thecab.

3. Mount theantennaonagroundplaneon the roof.

4. Make sure the antenna is grounded.

21

69

AUXILIARY CONTROL CABLE ROUTINGTwo locations are provided for routing the operatingcables from the control box to the attachment.

Rear Window GrommetA rubber grommet, 1, is provided to allow equipmentcontrol cables, 2, to pass through the rear windowframe, 3.

Pull the grommet plug, 1, up to remove. Slit thegrommet plug from the bottom into the hollow center,4. Route implement controls through the grommetplug, then reinstall the grommet plug.

1

2 3

4

70

Removable PanelA removable panel, 1, is located below the rearwindow. Remove the panel to access the opening inthe rear cab wall. Route the controls through theopening. Store the panel and attaching hardware forfuture use.

1

71


2-44

BRAKES

FOOT BRAKESAll tractors are equipped with hydraulic assistedself-adjusting power brakes. The hydraulic assistonly functions with the engine running. With theengine off, the brakeswill still function but with higherpedal effort. Use both parking brake and foot brakesto stop with the engine not running.

CAUTIONUse caution when towing loads at transportspeeds. Reduce speed if towed load weighsmore than the tractor and is not equipped withbrakes. Avoid hard braking applications. (Con-sult the implement operator’s manual forrecommended transport speeds.)

The foot brakes may be operated independently toaid turning or together for normal stopping. Whenoperating in the field it is advised that the brakepedals be unlocked.

WARNINGAlways lock the brakes together when travelingon the highway. Never use the brakes to aidturning at high speed.

To lock the brake pedals together, swing the lockplate, 1, into the slot on the right foot brake pedal, 2.

To unlock the brake, position the plate, 1, into the sloton the left pedal, 3.

The rear fender brake lights will be illuminated whenboth brakes are applied.

Periodically test brake pedals with the enginestopped to make sure manual brake system isfunctioning.

Never ride the brakes by resting a foot on the pedals.This causes unnecessary wear on the brakes.

Tractors equipped with FWD will automaticallyengage the four wheel drive for improved brakingwhen both pedals are depressed.

72


2-45

EMERGENCY STOPPING AND PARKINGBRAKETo apply the parking brake, pull the lever, 1, up. Torelease, raise the lever up slightly, then depressbutton, 2, and lower the lever.

CAUTIONThe parking brake must be engaged before theoperator leaves the seat.

NOTE: A two-minute pulsating audible alarm willsound with a flashing parking brake lamp to remindthe operator to apply the parking brake if the tractorengine is stopped without the parking brake applied.

Theparking brake indicator lampwill illuminatewhenthe parking brake is applied.

IMPORTANT: To prevent the tractor from beingdriven with the parking brake applied or partiallyapplied, the transmission gear shift lever can bemoved but the transmission will not engage if theparking brake is applied. Flashing “P” will bedisplayed in the transmission LCD of the EIC and theparking brake warning lamp will flash along with aone-second audible alarm.

To operate the transmission, return the shift controllever to neutral. Apply the foot brakes, then releasethe parking brake and reselect a forward or reversegear.

73


2-46

TRANSMISSION

POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSIONThoroughly read the following information beforeoperating the transmission.

The Powershift transmission is operated by a singlecontrol lever, 1. Because the transmission has onlyone control lever, it is extremely easy to use.

NOTE: The control lever is equipped with a neutrallock button, 2. The control lever may only be movedto the forward or reverse positions if the neutral lockbutton on the control lever knob is depressed.Neutral may be selected without depressing theneutral lock button.

In place of the usual clutch pedal is an inching pedal.

The powershift transmission control lever is used toselect forward or reverse travel and to changetransmission speeds. Move the lever forward forforward travel and rearward for reverse travel.

The powershift transmission control lever is alsoused to make instantaneous upward or downwardgear changes.Moveand then release the lever to theright for upward changes and to the left for downwardchanges.

Consecutive gear changes may be made, either bymoving and releasing the lever several times or byholding the lever to the left or right and allowing thetransmission to shift through the gears automatically.

WARNINGAlwaysengage thehandbrakebefore leaving thetractor. The transmission will not prevent thetractor from rollingwhen the engine is runningorshut off.

IMPORTANT: The Powershift transmission shouldnot be towed other than to remove it from the field oronto a transporter. Do not attempt to tow-start thetractor. See “Starting The Tractor With JumperLeads” in this section of the manual.

12

74


2-47

DIGITAL DISPLAYThe function of the LCD display, 1, indicates whichgear is selected and whether the transmission is inforward (F), neutral (N), or reverse (R).

NOTE: Transmission directional clutches requirecalibration after the first 50 hours of use and every300 hours thereafter. If harsh 9/10 shifts are noticed,the transmissionmay require recalibration. See yourdealer or refer to Section 3.

75


2-48

INCHING PEDALThe inching pedal, 1, is installed in place of the clutchpedal found on tractors with a conventionaltransmission. The inching pedal operates like aclutch, for safe, accurate positioning of the tractorwhen hitching up implements or operating inconfined spaces.

76

Optimum inching control, particularly with heavyloads, is achieved in the lowest gears (F1 and R3).The degree of inching control gradually diminishesas higher gears are selected up to 10th speed. Atgears higher than 10th, the electronic managementsystem takes over to protect the system from abuse.

IMPORTANT:To ensuremaximum transmission life,avoid using the inching pedal as a footrest or “riding”the pedal. Use of the inching pedal is only necessaryif the low gears are not slow enough atmoderate/lowengine speeds to give precise control for operationssuch as implement attachment, etc.

When using the inching pedal, particularly at highengine speeds, avoid stalling the engine. Lubricationof the transmission ceasesunder stall conditions andis detrimental to the transmission.

The inching pedal may also be used to automaticallyselect a gear to match load, engine speed and roadconditions. See “Speed Matching” later in thissection.

To stop the tractor in an emergency, depress theinching pedal and apply both foot brakes together.

The inching pedal is not required for normal gearchanges.

77


2-49

STARTING THE ENGINE AND MOVINGFORWARDThere are two methods:

1. Preselect A Forward Gear Before Moving

Start the engine with the speed control lever inneutral (the digital display will show “N5”).

Move and release or hold the control lever to the rightand allow the transmission to select any gearbetween 5th and 10th as shown in the display. (10thgear is the highest available gear for moving from astandstill).

To start in a gear below5th,move and release or holdthe control lever to the left and allow the display tochange sequentially from 5th down to 1st.

78

After the desired gear is selected, increase enginespeed, as required, bymeans of the throttle.Depressthe neutral lock button and move the control leverforward. To increase tractor speed, open the throttlefurther and/or continue to move and release or holdthe control lever to the right to select a higher gear.To decrease speed, close the throttle and/or movethe control lever to the left to select a lower gear.

79


2-50

2. Powershift Forward Gear While Moving

With the engine running, depress the neutral lockbutton andmove the control lever forward (the digitaldisplay will show “F5” and the tractor will start tomove forward).

Increase engine speed and/ormove the control leverto the right and allow the transmission to run throughthe gears until the desired operating speed isachieved.

To further increase tractor speed, open the throttlemore and/or continue to hold the control lever to theright to select a higher gear. To decrease speed,close the throttle and/or hold the control lever to theleft to select a lower gear.

WARNINGNever move the control lever to neutral whentraveling at high speeds. This could allow thetransmission to speed match and it may not bepossible to reselect theoriginal gear, particularlyif traveling down a steep grade. In any event,actions such as coasting should never bepracticed for safety reasons.

80


2-51

STARTING THE ENGINE AND MOVING INREVERSEAs with forward travel, there are two methods:

1. Preselect a Reverse Gear Before Moving

Start the engine with the control lever in neutral (thedigital display will show “N5”).

Move and release or hold the control lever to the rightand allow the transmission to select any gearbetween 5th and 10th as shown in the display. Moveand release the lever to the left to select 4th, and 3rd.

NOTE: There are nine reverse gears, the lowestshown as R2 in the digital display, the highest shownas R10. They are numbered R2 to R10 since theground speeds correspond to the forward speeds F2to F10.

After the desired gear is selected, depress theneutral lock button and move the control leverrearward. To increase speed, open the throttlefurther and/or hold the control lever to the right toselect a higher gear. To decrease speed, close thethrottle and/or hold the control lever to the left toselect a lower gear.

NOTE: If the transmission has beenpreprogrammedto select a different reverse from forward gear, theneutral gear selected may change when reversegear is selected - see “Programming Reverse Gear”later in this section.

81

2. Powershift Reverse Gear While Moving

With the engine running, depress the neutral lockbutton and move the control lever rearward. Thedigital display will show “R5”, provided thetransmission has not been preprogrammed (see“Programming Reverse Gear” later in this section).Move and release or hold the lever to the right andallow the transmission to run through the gears untilthe desired operating speed is achieved.

To further increase tractor speed, open the throttlemore and/or hold the control lever to the right toselect a higher gear. To decrease speed, close thethrottle and/or move the control lever to the left toselect a lower gear.

82


2-52

SHUTTLE OPERATIONSTo change from forward to reverse travel, simplydepress the neutral lock button andmove the controllever fully rearward. This may be done at any enginespeed and with any gear selected.

WARNINGGears 1 and 11--18 inclusive are not available inreverse. If traveling forward in, for example, 1stgear, the lowest reverse gear (2nd) will beautomatically selected when the control lever ismoved to the reverse position. The operatorshould be aware of this feature as there will be acorresponding increase in tractor speed.Conversely, if traveling forward in, for example,18th gear, the highest reverse gear (10th) will beautomatically selected when the control lever ismoved to the reversepositionwith acorrespond-ing reduction in tractor speed.

SPEED MATCHINGWhen traveling on the road in 10th gear or higher, thetransmissionwill automatically select agear tomatchthe engine speed to the road speed if the following isperformed:

Up Shift

Momentarily depress the inching pedal, thendecrease engine speed with the foot throttle. Releasethe inching pedal, then increase engine speed. Thetransmission will automatically select a higher gear(provided18th speed is not already selected) tomatchthe lower engine speed and so maintainapproximately the same road speed.

NOTE: It is recommended that the hand throttle isset to maintain a minimum engine speed of 1000rev/min and the foot throttle is used when higherengine speeds are required.

83


2-53

Down ShiftDecrease engine speed, then depress the inchingpedal, simultaneously increasing engine speed bypressing the foot throttle further down, then releasethe inching pedal. The transmission will automatical-ly select a lower gear (provided 10th gear is notalready selected) to match the higher engine speed.

NOTE: Speed matching only operates after 10thgear or higher has first been manualy selected. Upshiftingor downshiftingwill not occurwhenoperatingin gears 1-9. Speed matching will not select a gearbelow 10th gear.

AUTO SHIFTAuto shift controls automatic speed shifting throughforward gears 10 - 18.

Auto shift can be engaged by depressing, thenreleasing, the AUTO switch, 1, on the right-handconsole while traveling in forward gear ratios of 10thand above at engine speeds of 1450 RPM or more.

WhenAUTOshift is engaged, the LCDdigital displaywill display an “A”, for AUTO, 2, and show the gearselected, 3.

84

1

2 3

85


2-54

When in AUTO shift, the tractor will automaticallyselect higher gears whenever the engine speedexceeds a predetermined speed. It will select lowergears when the engine speed drops below apredetermined speed as shown in Section 5“Specifications.”

To disengage AUTO shift and return to normalshifting, depress the AUTO switch, upshift, ordownshift with the shift control lever.

Depressing the inching pedal or selecting neutral inany gear other than 10th will also disengage AUTOshift.

When in AUTO shift, the tractor will automaticallyselect higher gears whenever the engine speedexceeds a predetermined speed. It will select lowergears when the engine speed drops below apredetermined speed as shown.

The chart at the right illustrates typical auto shiftcharacteristics.


2-55

CREEPER GEARS (Optional)Tractors can be equipped with a 10.1:1 creeper gearfor extra low ground speeds. Creeper gear providesan additional 18 forward and 9 reverse gears.

When in creeper gear, the transmission display willshow “C” for creep, 1, and the gear selected, 2.

To engage creeper gears, place the transmission inneutral, stop the tractor and depress the inchingpedal. Depress the top of the creeper switch, 3,engage a gear and release the inching pedal andoperate normally.

To disengage the creeper gear, stop the tractor,depress the inching pedal, return the shift lever toneutral, and depress the bottom of the creeperswitch.

IMPORTANT: The creeper gear offers very lowground speeds. Do not use the low gearing to applyexcessive draft loads to the tractor.

NOTE:Todeterminecreepergroundspeedsmultiplythe ground speed for each gear listed in the groundspeed chart, located in Section 5, by 0.10.

Example 0.10 x 1.23 MPH = 0.123 MPH

86


2-56

PROGRAMMABLE UP SHIFT - DOWNSHIFTFor field use, the transmission can be programmedto up shift 1, 2, or 3 gears or down shift 1, 2, or 3 gearswhen switch, 1, is activated. This feature allows theoperator to up shift or down shift a predeterminednumber of gears on row ends then return to theoriginal gear when returning to work.

The programmable down shift should be used toreduce speeds in the field for crossing rough terrainor climbing steep inclines.

The UP SHIFT, DOWN SHIFT rocker switch, 1, islocated beside the 3-point hitch FASTRAISE/WORKswitch, 2. See “3-Point Hitch Hydraulic Controls”.The use of these features together allows quick turnaround at the end of the field.

2

1

87

Up ShiftUp shift is activated by depressing then releasing thefront of the switch, 1, Figure 86. The transmissionwillautomatically up shift the preprogrammed number ofgears. The EIC dash Up Shift lamp, 1, will illuminateand the new gear will be displayed as shifts arecompleted.

To return to the original gear, depress then releasethe rear of the switch. The Up Shift lamp will go outand the tractor will down shift to the original gear.

Down ShiftDown shift is activated by depressing then releasingthe rear of the switch, 1, Figure 86. The transmissionwill automatically down shift the predeterminednumber of gears and the EICDown Shift lamp, 2, willilluminate and the new gear ratio will be displayed asshifts are completed.

To return to the original gear, depress then releasethe front of the switch. The Down Shift lamp will goout and the transmission will up shift to the originalgear.

NOTE: The programmable up shift, down shiftfeature only functions in forward gears.

The programmed change in gears will occurwhenever the front or the rear of the rocker switch isdepressed.

88


2-57

TRANSMISSION PROGRAMMING

PROGRAMMING THE PROGRAMMABLEUP SHIFT, DOWN SHIFTTo change the number of gears increased ordecreased when selecting the programmable upshift or down shift, proceed as follows:

• Turn the KEY-START switch off.• Move the control lever to the reverse speed

position, then hold the lever to the left.• While holding the lever to the left, turn on the

KEY-START switch (but do not start the engine.)After three seconds, the digital display shouldshow “U-d” indicating the up/down shift program-ming mode is engaged.

• Return the control lever to the reverse position.89

To program the up shift:

• With the shift lever still in reverse,move the leverto the right andhold for three seconds. Thedigitaldisplay will show an up arrow and the up shiftnumber currently stored in memory.

• Move and release the lever to the right one, twoor three times, as required. The display will show“1”, “2” or “3.” This indicates that when the UPSHIFT switch is depressed, the transmission willup shift one, two or three gears higher than thegear currently being used. To cancel the Up Shiftprogram, move and release the lever to the leftuntil “0” appears.

• Return the lever to neutral after selecting thedesired up shift to store the program.

To program the down shift:

• To change the number of gears that will be downshifted when Down Shift is selected, position theshift lever in neutral. The display should show“U-d.” Move the shift lever to reverse positionthen to the left and hold for three seconds. Thedisplaywill showadownarrowand thedownshiftnumber currently stored in memory.

• Move and release the lever to the right one, twoor three times and the display will show “1”, “2” or“3”. This indicates the number of gears that willbe down shifted from the current gear when theDOWN SHIFT switch is activated. To cancel thedown shift program, move and release the leverto the left until “0” appears.

• Return the lever to neutral after selecting thedesired down shift to store the program.

To exit the program:

• Turn the key-switch to the off position to exit theup shift and down shift program mode.

90


2-58

PROGRAMMING REVERSE GEARSWhen changing from forward to reverse, thetransmission will normally select the same gear inreverse as was selected for forward travel (whenoperating in gears between 2nd and 10th). Forspecial shuttle shift applications, the Powershiftoffers the advantage of automatically changing thereverse gear up to three gears higher or lower thanthe engaged forward gear. The transmission mayalso be programmed to always select the lowestreverse gear R2.

To program an alternative reverse gear, proceed asfollows:

• Turn the KEY-START switch off.• Move the control lever to the reverse position,

then hold the lever to the right.• While holding the lever to the right, turn on the

KEY-START switch (but do not start the engine).Release the control lever after 5 seconds. Thedigital display should show “0” (unless thetransmission has previously been programmedto select a higher or lower reverse gear.)

To program a higher gear:• From the reverse position, move and release the

lever to the right one, two or three times, asrequired. Thedisplaywill show “1”, “2” or “3”. Thisindicates that when reverse is selected the gearwill be one, two or three gears higher than theforward gear.

To program a lower gear:• From the reverse position, move and release the

lever to the left one, two or three times, thedisplay will show “-1”, “-2” or “-3”. This indicatesthat when reverse is selected the gear will beone, two or three gears lower than the forwardgear.

To program the lowest gear:• Move and release the lever to the left a fourth

time, an “L” will be displayed. This means thatwhichever forward gear is engaged, when thelever is moved rearward the lowest reverse gear(2nd) will always be selected regardless offorward gear.

To cancel the program:• From the reverse position, move and release the

lever to the right until “0” is displayed.NOTE: Remember that only reverse gears between3rd and 11th are available.To exit the program:• Turn the KEY-START switch off. The transmis-

sion is now programmed.

91

92


2-59

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)

INTRODUCTIONThe four wheel drive (FWD) axle comes in eitherlimited slip differential with Automatic TractionManagement or fully locking differential with TractionControl System (TCS) Traction Management. UseFWD Automatic or TCS when operating to obtainmaximum efficiency and traction under any fieldconditions.

ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING FOURWHEEL DRIVEFour wheel drive can be engaged and disengaged inall gears (forward and reverse) during operation andunder full load.Switch, 1, has three operating positions: Off,Automatic or TCS and Full-time On.Fully depress the rear of switch, 1, to disengageFWD, 2.Depress the front of the switch one notch to theAutomatic or TCS position, 3. The AUTO FWDindicator lamp on the instrument console willilluminate to indicate engagement of either Automat-ic or TCS.When the tractor is in Automatic or TCSmode, FWDwill automatically disengagewheneither brakepedalis used to assist in turning or at transport speedsabove 24.2 km/h (15 MPH) which reduces tire wear.The FWD will automatically reengage whentransport speed drops below 24.2 KPH (15 MPH)and when the applied foot brake is released.If the tractor is equipped with TCS, the FWDwill alsodisengage and reengage under the followingconditions:

At speeds of 0-10 kph ( 0-6 MPH) disengage atturn angles of 30 degrees or higher andreengage at angles less than 30 degrees.Or between 10–20 kph ( 6–13 MPH) disengageat turn angles of 25 degrees or higher andreengage at angles less than 25 degrees.

Fully depress the front of the switch to the ONposition, 4, to engage full-time FWD. The indicatorlamp in the switch will illuminate to indicate that theFWD is engaged.In this mode FWD automatically disengages whentransport speed is above 24.2 KPH (15 MPH) whichwill reduce tire wear. FWD will automaticallyreengage when speeds drop below 24.2 KPH (15MPH).

NOTE: FWD will automatically engage to improvebraking any time that both brake pedals aredepressed.

1

23

4

93

FWD OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

CAUTIONFourwheeldrivegreatly increases traction.Extracaution is needed on slopes. Compared totwo-wheel drive, a fwd tractor maintains tractionon steeper slopes, increasing the possibility ofoverturning.When driving on icy, wet, or graveled surfaces,reduce speed and make sure the tractor iscorrectly ballasted to avoid skidding and loss ofsteering control. For best control, engage fourwheel drive by using full-time on mode, ratherthan auto mode for four wheel braking.

IMPORTANT: To increase front tire life, disengagefour wheel drive when transporting the tractor.Disengagement is automatic at transport speedsabove 24.2 KPH (15MPH). Always use front/rear tirecombinations specified to ensure acceptable tirewear.

IMPORTANT: Disengage FWD when makingextremely tight turns. This action will increase fronttire life, decrease stress on the FWD axle and allowtractor to achieve minimum turn diameters.


2-60

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

INTRODUCTIONA self-holding differential lock is installed in the rearaxle to lock the rear wheels together in conditionswhere wheel slip is encountered.

Units equipped with Traction Control System (TCS)traction management four wheel drive, also comewith a fully locking electro-hydraulicly engaged frontaxle differential lock.

ENGAGING AND DISENGAGINGDIFFERENTIAL LOCKTo engage the differential lock depress and releasethe front part of the switch,1. The switch will return tothe center position, but the differential lock will beactivated.

NOTE: The FAST RAISE/WORK switch must be inthe “WORK” position.

The switch indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate thedifferential lock is engaged.

NOTE:Diff-lockwill disengage if onebrake is appliedorwhen the 3-point hitchFASTRAISE/WORKswitchis in the fast raise position or if the unit is operatedabove 16 kph (10 MPH ). TCS will disengage at 10kph (6MPH) or below at turn angles of 20 degrees orhigher or between 10-15 kph (6-9 MPH) at turnangles of 10 degrees or higher. In manual operationmode as described above, the differential lock orTCS will not reengage automatically and must bereengaged manually.

To turn off the differential lock, depress then releasethe rear part of the switch or apply either of the footbrakes.

ENGAGING AND DISENGAGING THEDIFFERENTIAL LOCK IN EITHER THEAUTOMATIC MODE OR TRACTIONCONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) MODEToengage the differential lock in either theAutomaticmode or TCSmodepress and release the front of thelock switch twice within one second.

The green differential lock lamp in the instrumentpanel will illuminate to indicate the differential lock ison in either Automatic mode or TCS mode.

Auto differential lock will disengage when one brakeis applied or when the 3-point hitch FASTRAISE/WORK switch is in the fast raise position.

1

94

Auto differential lock will reengage when the brake isreleased or when the FAST RAISE/WORK switch isreturned to the work position.

If equipped with TCS, the front and rear differentiallocks will disengage and reengage the same as inAUTO mode as well as with turn angles. TCS willdisengage at 10 kph (6MPH) or below at turn anglesof 20 degrees or higher and reengage at angles lessthan 20 degrees, or between 10-15 kph (6-9MPH) atturn angles of 10 degrees or higher and reengage atangles less than 10 degrees.

The indicator light on the instrument panel will go outwhen auto differential lock or TCS has disengaged.

To turn off auto differential lock or TCS, depress therear part of the switch.

NOTE:Auto differential lock or TCSwill automatical-ly disengage if the unit is operated above 16 kph (10MPH ).

WARNINGNever use the differential lock at speeds above 8kph (5 mph) or when turning the tractor. Whenengaged, the differential lock will prevent thetractor from turning.

IMPORTANT: If a rear wheel spins at high speed,reduceenginespeedbeforeengaging thedifferentiallock to avoid shock loads to the driveline.


2-61

OPERATING THE ENGINE

PREPARING TO START THE TRACTOR

WARNINGNever idle the engine in a closed area. Exhaustgases, particularly carbon monoxide, may buildup. These gases are harmful and potentiallylethal.

IMPORTANT: Never push or tow the tractor to startthe engine. Doing so may damage the drive train.

NOTE: A safety device prevents the starting motorfrom operating unless the powershift transmissioncontrol lever is in neutral. The LCDwill flash “F” or “R”if the transmission is not in neutral.

CAUTIONBe sure everyone is clear of the tractor beforestarting the engine.

Prior to starting the engine, carry out the followingprocedure:

1. Sit in the driver’s seat.

2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Make sure the powershift control lever is in the“NEUTRAL” position.

WARNINGCheck the area beneath the equipment to makesure that no injury or damage will be causedwhen equipment is lowered.

IMPORTANT: Turbocharged engines - The highoperating speed of the turbocharger makes itessential that adequate lubrication is available whenthe engine is started. Therefore, idle the engine at1000 rev/min for approximately one minute beforedriving the tractor.


2-62

STARTING THE ENGINE IN WARMWEATHER OR WHEN ENGINE IS HOT

1. Open the throttle halfway.

2. Depress the inching pedal.

3. Turn the key-start fully clockwise to position 4and operate the starting motor for a maximum of30 seconds or until the engine starts, whicheveroccurs first. Then allow the key to return toposition 3.

4. When the engine starts, release the key andreturn the throttle to the idle position. Check thatall warning lights extinguish and gauge readingsare normal.

IMPORTANT: After operating the starter for 30seconds, allow the starter to cool for two minutes.

95

STARTING THE ENGINE IN COLDWEATHER

IMPORTANT:The tractor is equippedwith anair inletheater designed to pre-heat engine intake air toimprove cold starting. Read the detailed informationon the use of the cold starting system beforeattempting to start the engine.

NOTE: The cold start system does not eliminate theneed for standard cold starting aid recommenda-tions. Block heaters, transmission heaters, #1 dieselfuel, and 10W-30 oil should still be used inaccordance with documented service recommenda-tions.

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

2. Make sure the powershift control lever is in the“NEUTRAL” position.

3. Depress the inching pedal.

4. Turn the key switch to the “RUN” position.

5. MANUAL MODE (Factory Default Setting)If temperature is low enough for using the coldstart, the cold start light, 2, will flash. Press thecold start aid button, 1, to activate the air inletheater. The heater will preheat for 25 seconds.The cold start light, 2, will stop flashing andremain on as long as the heater is active.

AUTOMATIC MODEThe cold start aid button, 1, will have no effect.The cold start light, 2, will remain on as long asthe heater is active and if conditionswarrant. The25 second preheat cycle will begin shortly afterstep 4, as long as both the coolant andintercooler temperature are below 15°C (59° F).

NOTE: The cold start system is set to manual orautomatic mode by the Buhler Versatile Dealer.Contact your BVI Dealer to change this setting.

1

96


2-63

NOTE: The cold start button, 1, does not need to beheld in during operation.

NOTE:Amonitoring device prevents the heater fromworking unless both the engine coolant and theintercooler temperature are below 15° C (59° F).

NOTE: The preheat cycle will be deactivated if thebattery voltage drops below 9 Volts.

6. When the cold start light, 2, turns off, turn the keyswitch to the “START” position.

7. If the engine does not start after 20 seconds ofcranking, turn the key switch to the ”OFF”position, allow the starter to cool for twominutes,then repeat the procedure starting at step 4.

8. When the engine starts (approximately 800RPM) release the key switch. Check that allwarning lights extinguish and gauge readingsare normal.

NOTE:During cranking, the air inlet heater is off untilthe engine achieves 400 RPM. At 400 RPM, the airinlet heater will heat again in automatic or manualmode, and remain on until the coolant and theintercooler temperature are above 15°C (59°F). Theheater may automatically turn on and off for up to 20minutes after the engine has started.

NOTE: During the post heat cycle, the heater will bedeactivated if the battery voltage drops below 10.5Volts.

2

97


2-64

ENGINE BLOCK HEATERThe engine block heater, 1, warms the enginecoolant to aid starting by reducing engine drag.When used with the cold start system, the heater isan effective starting aid in temperatures down to -29°C (-20° F).

To operate the heater, plug the heater cord, 2, into asuitable 115-volt circuit for at least four hours beforestarting the tractor.

You can leave the heater in operation for periodslonger than four hours without damage, butmaximum starting ability is usually attained after thecoolant has been heated for four hours.

WARNINGTo avoid shocks or other injuries, never use anungrounded or inadequate extension cord.Always use a grounded 3-wire extension cordwith a 3-wire plug which is rated for at least a15-ampere load, and protected by a suitable fuseor circuit breaker.

98

OPTIONAL HYDRAULIC OIL SUMPHEATERThe sump heater will help to keep thehydraulic oil at a warm temperature which aidscold weather starting. The heater is installedin the left side of the rear axle assembly. Tooperate the heater, plug the heater cord, 1,into a suitable 115-volt circuit.

WARNINGTo avoid shocks or other injuries, never use anungrounded or inadequate extension cord.Always use a grounded 3-wire extension cordwith a 3-wire plug which is rated for at least a15-ampere load, and protected by a suitable fuseor circuit breaker.

99


2-65

STARTING THE TRACTOR WITH JUMPERCABLESIf it is necessary to use jumper cables to start thetractor, proceed as follows:

WARNINGOperate the starting motor only from theoperator’s seat.Wear eye protection when charging the batteryor starting the tractor engine with an auxiliarybattery.

1. Connect one end of one jumper cable (red) to thetractor starter positive (+) post, 1, and the otherend (red) to the auxiliary battery positive (+)terminal, 2.

2. Connect one end of the other jumper cable(black) to the auxiliary battery negative (-)terminal, 3, and the other end (black) to thetractor frame ground post, 4. Follow the startingprocedure previously described.

3. When the engine starts, allow it to run at idlespeed, turn on all electrical equipment (lights,etc.) This will help protect the alternator fromdamage due to extreme load changes.

4. Disconnect the jumper leads in reverse order tothe connecting procedure.

NOTE: When using an auxiliary battery to start theengine, make sure the polarity is correct. Reversedbattery polarity may damage the electrical system.

100


2-66

STOPPING THE ENGINE

NOTE: Before stopping, idle the engine at 1000 rpmfor approximately one minute. This will allow theturbocharger and manifold to cool and preventpossible distortion of components.

WARNINGCheck the area beneath the equipment to makesure that no injury or damage will be causedwhen equipment is lowered. Do not exit thetractor until pto driven equipment has stopped.

To stop the engine, carry out the following procedure:

1. Sit in the driver’s seat.

2. Move thepowershift control lever to “NEUTRAL.”

3. Disengage the PTO, if engaged.

4. Lower all hydraulic equipment to the ground.

5. Position all remote control valve levers in theneutral position.

6. Return the throttle to idle speed.

7. Apply the parking brake.

8. Turn the KEY-START switch to “OFF,” (position 1).

101


2-67

ENGINE SHUTDOWN OVERRIDEAn automatic engine shutdown feature will shutdown the engine within 30 seconds if engine oilpressure falls below or engine coolant temperaturerises above predetermined levels. The engine willalso shut down after 30 seconds if the transmissionlow pressure lamp or the transmission hightemperature lamp illuminates, as shown on page2-16.

Before shutdown occurs, the word “STOP” will flashin the instrument control center display and apulsating tone will sound.

The override switch, 1, is provided to allow theoperator to override the automatic shutdown.

The switch should only be used to move the tractorto a safe area for investigation and repair.

Push the top of the switch to override the shutdownsystem. The top of the switch will illuminate when theswitch is activated.

Push the bottom to return to normal automaticshutdown operation.

IMPORTANT: Determine and correct the cause ofthe shutdown before resuming operation.

WARNINGThe engine shutdown feature is fully automatic.It can be overridden by the operator to drive thetractor to a safe location. The override switchshould only be used to move the tractor farenough to avoid a dangerous situation, such astraffic.

102


2-68

BREAKING-IN PROCEDUREYour new tractor will provide long and dependableservice if given proper care during the 50-hourbreaking-inperiodandservicedat the recommendedintervals.

Avoid prolonged operation at either high or lowengine speeds without a load on the engine.

Avoid overloading the engine. Operating in too higha gear under heavy load may cause excessiveoverloading. Overloading occurs when the enginewill not respond to a throttle increase.

Use the lower gears when pulling heavy loads, andavoid continuous operation at constant enginespeeds. Operating the tractor in too low a gear witha light loadandhighenginespeedwillwaste fuel.Youwill save fuel and minimize engine wear by selectingthe correct gear for each particular operation.

Check the instruments frequently and keep theradiator and oil reservoirs filled to the recommendedlevels.


2-69

DRIVING THE TRACTOR

WARNINGObserve the following precautions when drivingthe tractor:• Watchwhere youaregoing -especially at row

ends, on roads, and around trees.• Use caution when operating on slopes.• Keep the tractor in gearwhengoingdownhill.

Use a low gear to maintain control withminimum braking.

• If the tractor is stuck, back the tractor out toprevent overturning.

• Always use the drawbar for pull-type work.Do not pull from any other part of the tractorsince it may tip backward.

• Dim the tractor headlights when meeting avehicle on the highway at night. Keep thelights adjusted so they do not blind theoperator of an oncoming vehicle.

• Engage the inching pedal slowly whendriving out of a ditch, gully, or up a steephillside. Disengage the inching pedalpromptly should the front wheels rise off theground.

• Reduce speed before turning or applyingbrakes. lock the brake pedals together whentraveling at high speeds or on the highway.Brakewith bothwheels simultaneouslywhenmaking an emergency stop.

• Never apply the differential lock whenturning.

• Use extreme caution and avoid hard applica-tions of the tractor brakes when pullingheavy towed loads at road speeds.

• Towed loads that weighmore than theweightof the tractor should have brakes for safeoperation. Ensure compliance with localregulations.

• Always sit in the driver’s seat while startingor driving the tractor.

• Always use a slow-moving vehicle (SMV)emblem when traveling on public roads.


2-70

POWER TAKE-OFF (PTO) - INDEPENDENT

INTRODUCTIONThe independent power take-off (PTO) transfersengine power directly to mounted or trailedequipment. “Independent” means that the PTO maybe engaged, operated and disengaged with thetractor stopped or while moving.

The PTO is electrically activated and has automaticPTO clutch feathering for smooth engagement andbraking.

NOTE: The PTO will automatically disengage whenthe engine is stopped.

Model 2145 tractors have two speed PTO capability.For 540 RPMoperation, a 6-spline 34.9mm (1.375″)shaft is supplied. A 21-spline 34.9 mm (1.375″) shaftis supplied for 1000 RPM operation.

The 6-spline shaft is used to operate equipmenthaving a power requirement up to 65 HP. Equipmenthaving a higher power requirement should becoupled to the 21-spline shaft.

Model 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors have a 1000RPM PTO. A 21-spline shaft is supplied with themodel 2160 tractor and a 20-spline shaft is suppliedwith the 2180 and 2210 tractors. The 21-spline shafthas a diameter of 34.9 mm (1.375″) while the20-spline shaft is 44.5 mm (1.75″) in diameter.Alternative 20 or 21-spline shafts may be purchasedfrom your dealer. See Option Equipment Sectionfound at the rear of this manual.

PTO MASTER SHIELDThe PTO master shield, 1, is adjustable to threepositions by placing the prop rod, 2, in positions A, Bor C.

Position A - Shield is level. Use this position duringnormal PTO operation.

Position B - Shield is tilted upward. Only use thisposition while attaching implement PTO shaft to thetractor. Lower the shield to position A after the shaftis attached.

Position C - Shield is tilted downward. Use thisposition to provide clearance for the top link whennon-PTO implements are attached.

WARNINGNever stand on the PTO master shield duringPTO operation or anytime. A PTO shaft cover, 3,is providedandshould be installedwhenever thetractor PTO is not is use. The PTO shaft cover isscrew on, screw off.

103


2-71

CHANGING THE MODEL 2145 PTOOUTPUT SHAFTChange the PTO shaft as required for use with 540or 1000 PTO RPM implements.

WARNINGBefore changing the PTO shaft:• Park the tractor so the rear end is

approximately 10 cm (4″) higher than thefront end. This will reduce oil loss whenremoving the shaft.

• Apply the parking brake.• Move the gearshift lever to “NEUTRAL.”• Disengage the PTO by pushing the PTO

selector knob down.• Stop the engine.• Makesure thePTOshaft hasstopped turning.

To change thePTOshaft, remove the “C” clip, 1, fromthe outer sleeve, 2, and pull the shaft, 3, from thehousing. Protect the removed shaft from damage bywrapping it in a cloth.

Clean the replacement shaft. Be sure that thelubrication hole in the side of the shaft is not blocked.

Install the replacement shaft and reinstall the “C” clip.Rotate the shaft while it is being inserted to align thedrive splines which will ease installation.

NOTE: When installing the PTO shaft for 540operation the shaft will usually slide into the innerspline easily until the outer sleeve spine is reached.To install the shaft the remaining distance, rotate theshaft while holding the sleeve, 2, with the pin, 4,which will align the splines and allow the shaft to goin the remaining distance.

IMPORTANT:Neveroperate the tractorwith thePTOshaft removed. The shaft acts as a support forinternal gearing. Operation with the shaft removedmay result in severe damage.

4

104


2-72

CHANGING THE MODEL 2160 TO 2210OUTPUT SHAFT

WARNINGBefore changing the PTO shaft:• Park the tractor so the rear end is

approximately 10 cm (4″) higher than thefront end. This will reduce oil loss whenremoving the shaft.

• Apply the parking brake.• Move the gearshift lever to “NEUTRAL.”• Disengage the PTO by pushing the PTO

selector knob down.• Stop the engine.• Makesure thePTOshaft hasstopped turning.

Change the 34.9 mm (1.375″) or 44.5 mm (1.75″)1000 RPM PTO shaft as required to attach to theimplement to be used.

1. Remove the PTO master shield.

2. Remove the original M20 X 60 bolts, 1.

3. Install longer M20 X 120 bolts at 1. Bolts can bemade with a locally-purchased threaded metricrod.

NOTE: These bolts will contact the PTO driven gearto prevent the gear from falling into the centerhousing when the PTO shaft and retainer areremoved.

Turn the bolts in by hand until they just contactthe gear. Do not tighten bolts because they’ll tiltthe gear and make removal of the shaft difficult.

CAUTIONMake sure the rear axle oil level is at or below thefull mark. Any oil above the full mark will be lostwhen the retainer is removed.

4. Remove the four retaining bolts, 2.

105


2-73

5. Remove the retainer and seal, 1, using a slidepuller, 3, with a fabricated end, 2. Install a boltthrough the PTO cover and fabricated puller.

NOTE: The fabricated end, 2, consists of a nut thatfits the puller, 3, with a second nut welded to the firstnut.

6. Pull the shaft and bearing assembly.

106

7. Remove thesnap ring, 1, andbearing, 2, from theshaft, 3.

8. Switch the shaft and reassemble in the reverseorder.

9. Apply a bead of gasket eliminator to the shaftretainer and reinstall it. Torque the four retainingbolts to 108 N·m (80 ft.-lbs.).

10. Remove the two long M20 x 120 bolts. Addthread sealer to the original M20 x 60 bolts andtorque them to 641 N·m (475 ft.-lbs.).

107


2-74

ATTACHING EQUIPMENT TO THE PTOSHAFTMount or hitch the equipment to the tractor asoutlined in either “3-Point Hitch Linkage” or “Drawbar- Towing Attachments” sections.

1. With the engine stopped, all equipment lowered,and the PTO stopped, unscrew the PTO shaftcover, 3, Figure 102.

2. Attach the equipment drive shaft to the tractorPTO shaft. Be certain that the equipment driveshaft coupler lock pin, 1, engages the PTO shaftlock groove. If the coupler does not have a lock,pin the coupler to the shaft.

3. MOUNTED EQUIPMENT ONLY: Raise andlower the linkage and check for interference.Make sure thePTOshaft is not binding in the fullyraised position. If necessary, set the height limitcontrol knob on the right-hand console to limitraising height. Also study the instructions in“3-Point Hitch Controls.”

4. TRAILING EQUIPMENT ONLY: Be certain thatthedrawbar is fixed in thecenter position and thatthe drawbar is set at the correct length for thePTO speed selected. See “Drawbar - TowingAttachments.”

5. Position the PTOmaster shield, 1, Figure 102, inthe proper position before operating the PTO.

108

6. Check that the PTO driveline is not overex-tended, bottomed out, or at an excessive angleand the driveline shield does not contact thePTOguard or drawbar.

IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven equip-ment, check tomakesure thedrivelinewill not bottomout or become disengaged. Use the following todetermine PTO shaft engagement.

Pull drive halves until fullyextended, just before theycome completely apart. Thisis dimension A.

From dimension A, subtract150 mm (6”) establishingdimension B.

IMPORTANT:Never operateequipment with drivelineextended past dimension B.

IMPORTANT:Never operateequipment with drivelinecollapsed past dimension D.

Push drive halves togetheras far as possible. This isdimensionC.Add25mm(1”)to dimension C to establishdimension D.

150 mm

DIM “D” EQUALS

DIM “C” + 25 mm (1”)

(6”)

109


2-75

PTO OPERATION

WARNINGWhenever operatingPTOequipment observe thefollowing safety precautions:• Follow the equipment operator’s manual

instructions.• Do not wear loose clothing when operating

PTO equipment.• When operating PTO driven equipment, stop

the engine and wait until the PTO shaft andequipment stops before getting off thetractor and working on the equipment.

• Do not clean or adjust PTO driven equipmentwhile the tractor engine is running.

• Be sure that the PTO master shield isinstalled.

• Always apply the tractor parking brake andblock the rear wheels front and back whenoperating stationary PTO equipment.

• Do not work under any equipment which issupported only by the hydraulic lift or remotecylinder. Always use suitable blocking orsupports.

• Always replace the PTO shaft cover when thePTO is not being used.

NOTE: If the operator leaves the seat while the PTOis operating, the PTO warning alarm will sound forfive seconds and the PTO lamp will flash.

The PTO brake will remain applied as long as theengine is running and the PTO is off. When theengine is shut off, the brake will release so the PTOshaft can be turned by hand when attachingequipment.

Adjusting PTO SpeedOperate equipment at the correct PTO speed. PTOspeed is directly related to engine speed. Adjustengine speed as follows:

PTO RPM Engine RPM540 18801000 1900

IMPORTANT: Do not operate equipment above therecommended PTO speed.

NOTE: The PTO has a non-critical overspeed alert.If 540 PTO speed is greater than 630 RPM or 1000PTO speed is greater than 1152 RPM, the “PTOON”status lamp will flash and a 1-second audible alarmwill occur. The green system status lamp will alsoflash when the PTO status “overspeed” alert occurs.


2-76

Engaging the PTO1. Attach the equipment as outlined in “Attaching

Equipment to the PTO Shaft.”

2. With the PTO disengaged, start the engine.

3. With the engine speed at idle, engage the PTOby depressing the center button, 1, on the PTOknob, 2. Pull the knob upwards to the stop, thenrelease the knob.

The PTO status lamp, 3, will be illuminated alongwith the PTO indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster when the PTO is activated.

WARNINGDo not approach or work on the PTO shaft orequipment with the PTO in motion. Shut off thetractor engineand thePTObeforeworkingon thepto or equipment. If the operator leaves the seatwhile the PTO is engaged, the PTO lamp in theEICwill flash and the audible alarmwill sound for5 seconds.

4. Operate the PTO at lower RPM tomake sure theequipment is free of obstructions.

5. Gradually bring the engine up to operatingspeed.Operate theengineat 1900RPM for 1000RPM PTO equipment and 1880 RPM for 540RPM PTO equipment. Make sure the equipmentis operating properly.

6. Select the appropriate gear and enter the workarea.

3

1

2

110

Disengaging the PTOTo disengage thePTO, reduce engine speed to 1000RPM then depress the PTO knob, 1.

NOTE: The independent PTO is controlled only bythe PTO control knob. The operation of the clutchpedal does not affect the PTO operation.

IMPORTANT: Always disengage the PTO beforemaking sharp turns and before raising mountedequipment to its fully raised position.

IMPORTANT: If PTO equipment becomes plugged,stop the tractor and wait for the equipment to clearitself. If the equipment does not clear itself or if thePTO clutch slips, immediately disengage the PTObydepressing the PTO knob, 1, then stop the engine.Wait until the PTO stops before exiting the tractor orworking on the equipment.

WARNINGTo avoid inadvertent movement of PTO imple-ment, always disengage the PTO after use.

1

111


2-77

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS INTRODUCTIONTwo different types of hydraulic remote control valvesystems are used.

Standard Flow SystemThe standard flow system consists of a single axialpiston pump, 1, which supplies fluid to a hydraulicsteering flow divider and remote control valveassembly. The pump is rated at 117 L/min (31GPM).

112

HydraFlow Plus SystemThe HydraFlow Plus system consists of two axialpiston pumps which supply fluid to the high pressurehydraulic system. The system has a total flow ratingof 208 L/min (55 GPM). The remote control valveassembly is divided internally into two separatesystems.

The upper pump, 1, is the same pump used on thestandardhydraulic system. It is ratedat 117L/min (31GPM)andsupplies fluid to thehydraulic steering flowdivider and to remote valve sections I and II.

The lower axial piston pump, 2, is rated at 91 L/min(24 GPM) and supplies fluid to the three-point hitchvalve and remote valve sections III and IV.

The HydraFlow Plus system offers increased flowand dual system capability which will allow for moreefficient operation of large individual hydraulic loadssuch as dual orbit motors and remote cylinders.

One side of the system can be used for the operationof a high flow/low pressure requirement, and theother side of the system can be used for a lowflow/high pressure requirement such as found oncertain hydraulic driven air seeders.

113

WARNINGHydraulic oil escaping under pressure canpenetrate the skin causing serious injury.• Use a piece of cardboard or paper, instead of

your hand, to search for leaks.• Stop the engine and relieve pressure before

connecting or disconnecting lines.• Tighten all connections before starting the

engine or pressurizing lines.

If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtainmedical attention immediately or gangrene mayresult.


2-78

REMOTE CONTROL VALVESRemote control valves are available to operateexternal hydraulic cylinders, motors, etc. Up to fourremote control valves may be installed. The valvesare located at the rear of the tractor.

Tractors with a standard hydraulic system can beequipped with three or four remote valves.HydraFlow Plus tractors will be equipped with fourremote valves.

Thebottomcontrol valve, 1, hasabsolute flowpriorityover the remaining valves, 2, 3 and 4.

STANDARD FLOW TRACTORSAfter the number I valve has been satisfied, prioritygoes to the valve with the lowest resistance.

HYDRAFLOW PLUS TRACTORAfter the number I valve has been satisfied, prioritygoes to valve II. The HydraFlow Plus pump suppliesoil to the 3-point hitch valve, valve IV and III, with thevalve having the lowest resistance having priority.

Priority is greatly effected by the setting of the flowcontrol valves. Make sure the flow controls areproperly adjusted. See “Flow Control Adjustment”later in this section for more information.

Load checks are installed in the “extend” port of thelower two control valves I and II.

NOTE: The total system flow is not available tooperate any one single hydraulic circuit. Themaximum available flow from any one remote valveis 102 ± 8 L/min (27 GPM ± 2 GPM)

4

1

2

3

1141. Remote valve I (green) with load check2. Remote valve II (blue) with load check3. Remote valve III (brown) (if equipped)4. Remote valve IV (gray) (if equipped)

CONTROL SWITCHESThe electro-hydraulic remote valves are operated byfinger controlled switches in the right-hand console.Each control switch is colored to correspond to thecolor on the remote valve. The numbers in Figure(113) and (114) match up the control switches,remote valves and color coding.

1. Control switch I Green2. Control switch II Blue3. Control switch III Brown4. Control switch IV Gray

1 2 43

115


2-79

The remote valve control switches have fourpositions: neutral, extend, retract, and float.

Pull the switch back from the neutral position, 1, tothe “extend” (raise) position, 2. From neutral, pushforward to the “retract” (lower) position, 3. Push theswitch fully forward to the float position, 4. Float willpermit the cylinder to extend or retract allowingequipment such as scraper blades to “float” or followthe ground contour.

The “float” position is also used for retracting asingle-acting cylinder and for the OFF position forhydraulic motors.

1

2

3

4

116

The extend, 1, neutral, 2, retract, 3, and float, 4,positions are identified by symbols on the decalbehind each control switch.

NOTE:Do not hold or fasten the switch in the extendor retract position after a remote cylinder hasreached the end of its stroke. This will overheat theoil and may lead to failure of hydraulic and drivelinecomponents.

117

ENGAGEMENT SWITCHThe control switches and remote valves will notoperate until the system is activated by theelectro-hydraulic engagement switch.Toactivate theremote hydraulic system, depress the center button,1, in the engagement knob, 2. Pull the knob up untilit stops, then release the center button and let go ofthe knob. The electro-hydraulic system is nowoperational when ever the engine running.

1

2

118


2-80

To turn off the remote electro-hydraulics, depress theengagement switch knob as shown.

IMPORTANT: The remote valve electro-hydraulicengagement switch is provided as an isolator stopswitch. It can be used to immediately stop operationof the rear remote hydraulics by quickly depressingthe knob. The stop switch only controls the remotevalves and has no effect on the three point hitch linkoperation, thereby isolating operation of the rearremote hydraulics from the three point hitch linkoperation.

1 2

119

MANUAL-PROGRAMABLE OPERATIONSWITCHESRocker switch, 1, is used to select either the manualor programmed operation for each of the remotecontrol switches.

Manual OperationManual operation is provided primarily for theoperation of continuous flow applications, such ashydraulic motors. To operate the remote electro-hy-dualic valves in manual mode, depress the top ofrocker switch, 1, as shown. In the manual mode, thecontrol switch, 2, can be operated in the fourpositions, neutral, extend, retract and float.When thecontrol switch is left in either the extend, retract orfloat positions the control switch WILL NOTautomatically return to the neutral position and shutthe flow of oil off to the rear remotes regardless if thesystem reaches maximum pressure. The controlswitch must MANUALLY be returned to neutral.There is no automatic return to neutral. This allowsfor efficient operation of motors without nuisanceshut downs when the remote valve in advertantlyreturns to neutral. When operating hydraulic motorsit is important to always use the RETRACT positionto activate the motor and the FLOAT position to stopthe motor. Using the float position to stop the motorallows the motor to come to a gradual stoppreventing any damage to the motor itself.

IMPORTANT: Never use the neutral position fromthe extend or retract position to stop a hydraulicmotor. Sudden hydraulic lock up of the system cancause extensive damage to the motor.

IMPORTANT:Do not operate the control switches inthe manual mode when operating remote cylinders.When the cylinder has reached the end of its strokethe control switch will not return to neutral and thehydraulic system relief valve will be activated. Thiswill overheat the oil and may lead to failure of thehydraulic and driveline components.

1

2

120


2-81

Programmable OperationProgrammable operation is provided primarily foroperation of hydraulic cylinders. This feature allowsthe operator to program a time delay between whenthe control switches are activated and when they willautomatically return toneutral. Tooperate the remoteelectro-hydualic valves in programmed mode,depress the bottom of rocker switch, 1, as shown.When the bottom of the switch is depressed, light, 2,in the switch will begin to flash. This is an indicationto the operator that a timed sequence must beprogrammed into theelectro-hydraulic controler. Thelight will continue to flash for ten second to allow theoperator time to begin the programming sequence.If a program is not started within this ten secondperiod, the controller will not accept any sequenceand the remote control switch, 3, will not remainlatched in either the extend or retract positions.

1

3

2

121

To program the electro-hydraulic’s, first insure thatthe cylinder hydraulic hoses are properly connectedto the appropriate rear remote valve. Start the tractorengine and insure the electro-hydraulic engagementswitch is up/on. Set the tractor engine RPM’s at thenormal operating speed in which the cylinder is to beoperated. This is important as the programming ofthe control switches is based on a time interval tocorrespond to the time it takes the cylinder ram toextend as well as retract. Any change in engine rpmwill have and effect on hydraulic flow (GPM) andtherefore the time it takes the cylinder to extend andretract. The control switch timed program alwaysremains the same regardless of oil flow (GPM) untilreprogrammed. Therefore consistent operation isrequired for the system to operate correctly. Usingthe corresponding color coded programming switch,1, depress the bottomof the switch so light, 2, beginsto flash. While the light is flashing use control switch,3, to extend the cylinder. As soon as the controlswitch is activated the programming light will go onsolid. Hold the switch until the cylinder is extended tothe desired position and then return the switch to theneutral position. When the switch is returned to theneutral position the programming light will onceagain begin to flash indicating that the retract phaseof the cycle needs to be programmed. Next usecontrol switch, 3, to retract the cylinder. As soon asthe control switch is activated the programming lightwill go on solid. Hold the switch until the cylinder isretracted to the desired position and then return theswitch to the neutral position. After the second phasehas been completed the programming light will goout indicating that the programming has beenmemorized. The control switch timed operation isnow programmed for the extend and retractoperation of the cylinder.

Repeat the above sequence to program theremaining control switches.

Programming of the control switch can be preformedin either sequence, extend/retract, retract/extend orone sequence only, extend or retract. The programfor the individual control switch, 3, will remain thesame even when the engine is stopped and theignition switch is in the off position, as long as theprogramming switch, 1, remains in the programpositionas shown.Themaximumallowable time limitfor any programmed timed operation is two minutes.Programming the control switches with the engineand hydraulic flow off is possible however accuracyof actual operation will be marginal. Whenever ahydraulic application is changed, the controlswitches should be reprogrammed to suit the newoperation.

When operating in the timed programmed mode,feathering of the hydraulic flow is possible bymovingthe control switch variably any where between theneutral position and the fully opened position. Thetimed operation sequence only beings once thecontrol switch has been locked in the fully openedposition.

Should the control switch be moved to the floatposition no timed program is possible and the controlswitch must be returned back to neutral manually.


2-82

FLOW CONTROL ADJUSTMENTEach remote valve has a flow control knob, 1, tometer oil flow. The knob controls flow from 4 to 102L/MIN (1 to 27 GPM). Turn the knob so the highervertical decal stripe, 2, is visible to increase the rateof oil flow. Turn the knob so the lower vertical decalstripe, 3, is visible to decrease the rate of oil flow.

1

2 3

1

122

WARNINGBefore connecting or disconnecting hydraulichoses at the remote cylinders, relieve thepressure in the circuit by first starting the engineand thenmove the control switches fully forwardto the “float” position. Then stop the engine.Make sure no one will be injured by movingequipment when relieving pressure in thesystem. Before disconnecting cylinders orequipment, make sure the equipment or imple-ment is supported securely.Never work under equipment supported by ahydraulic device because it may drop if thecontrol is actuated (even with the enginestopped) or in the event of hose failure, etc.always use a secure support for equipmentwhich must be serviced while in the raisedposition. Make sure that oil contained within theremote cylinders is clean and is of the correctgrade.


2-83

LOW PRESSURE RETURN CIRCUITA low pressure return circuit is available by removingthe (1-1/16) - 12ORB threaded plug, 1, and installinga low pressure return kit, 2, P/N 86031849. The lowpressure return circuit will reduce back pressure inthe remote hydraulic return line which will result inmore efficient hydraulic motor operation. The returncircuit can also be used in applications where lowreturn oil pressure is desired to improve implementoperation such as orbit motor case drain lines.

Connect the return line from the hydraulic motor orimplement to the coupler.

NOTE: Connectors and couplers are available fromyour authorized dealer.

2

1

123

QUICK COUPLERSEach control valve has a pair of self-sealing,leverless quick couplers to facilitate remote cylinderconnection. These couplers also permit remotecylinder hoses to be pulled from the coupler if animplement should become disconnected from thetractor. The left couplers, 1, are identified by anextended cylinder symbol containing an arrowpointing in the direction of cylinder travel molded onthe cover. The right couplers, 2, are identified by aretracted cylinder symbol containing an arrowpointing in the direction of cylinder travel molded onthe cover. The covers pivot open by pressing on tab3, to expose the quick coupler.

The covers are color coded (top) gray, brown, blue,green (bottom) to correspond to the control switchesin the cab console.

The couplers will accept standard (1/2″ )SAE or ISOtips. The couplers canbe connected or disconnectedunder pressure. Disconnect pressure is proportionalto system pressure. Increased system pressure willrequire increased force to disconnect the couplers.

To connect a remote cylinder hose, open the couplerdust cover. Clean, then insert the male couplermaking sure the coupler is correctly seated.

Actuate the remote valve to supply hydraulicpressure which will complete the hydraulic couplingof the tractor and implement.

To ease removal and installation of the couplers,relieve the pressure in the system. Securely supportthe implement. Make sure no one will be injured bymoving equipment when relieving pressure in thesystem. Move the control switch to the float positionwith the engine running. This will relieve thepressure. Turn the engine off with the control switchstill in float. After the engine is shut down return thecontrol switch to the neutral position. The couplerscan now be connected or disconnected with minimalpressure and effort.

2

3

1

124


2-84

CONNECTING SINGLE-ACTINGCYLINDERSConnect the hose from a single-acting cylinder to theleft extend/raise coupler on the remote control valve,as previously described.

To extend a single-acting cylinder, pull the controlswitch back to the “extend” position.

Manually return the switch to the neutral position tostop the cylinder before it is fully extended or allowthe valve to return to neutral automatically when thecylinder reaches the end of its stroke and timedoperation.

To retract a single-acting cylinder, move the switchfully forward to the “float” position.

IMPORTANT:Alwaysuse the “float” position to lowera single-acting cylinder. The “retract” position is fordouble-acting cylinders only.

CONNECTING DOUBLE-ACTINGCYLINDERSConnect the feed hose from a double-acting cylinderto the left extend/raise coupler on the remote controlvalve and the return hose to the right retract/lowercoupler, as previously described. To extend adouble-acting cylinder, pull the control switch back tothe “extend” position.

To retract a double-acting cylinder, push the controlswitch forward past neutral to the “retract” position.Further forward movement of the switch will select“float” whichwill allow the cylinder to extendor retractfreely. This feature is very helpful when carrying outwork with equipment such as scraper blades andloaders.

OPERATING CONTINUOUS FLOWHYDRAULIC EQUIPMENTContinuous flowhydraulic equipment (e.g., hydraulicmotors) should be connected to the 1st (lowest)remote control valve couplerswith the pressure hoseconnected to the right retract coupler and the returnhose connected to the low pressure return circuit asdescribed previously in this section.

NOTE: For very low flow hydraulic motors, it may benecessary to use thenon-load check couplers (3rdor4th couplers up.)

The first valve has priority over the remaining valves.This will ensure a constant flow of oil to the motors.

Use the flow control to regulate themotor speed.The #1 flow control should be adjusted toregulate the orbit motor speed. If the flow controlis open too far, the 3-point hitch andother remotevalves will slow down or stop. This will ensurethat the hydraulic system will only supply the oilrequired by the motor. Extra pump capacity willnot be used except when other remote valvesections are operated.With the remote control valve switch fully forward inthe “float” position, the motor will be stationary. Thehydraulic motor will operate if the switch is pulledback to the “retract” position. To stop themotor,movethe switch from the retract position to the floatposition. In the float position the motor will be able tostop slowly, which will not damage the motor.

IMPORTANT: When operating continuous flowequipment, the remote control valve switch must notbe moved rearward to the neutral or raise positionsas damage to the equipment may result.

Observe the following to further protect the tractorand equipment.

• Do not open any bypass valve in the equipmentor motor. Use the flow control to regulate the rateof flow or speed of the motor.

• Do not hold the remote control valve switch tooperate the equipment.

• To ensure optimum hydraulic oil cooling, operatecontinuous flow equipment at the highest flowsetting (by use of the flow control) and lowestengine speed that will give the required machineperformance and speed.

• Do not use the #1 valve circuit to operatecontinuous flow equipment that requires morethan 137.90 bar (2,000 PSI). The #1 flow controlmay shut the rest of the system down if thecontinuous pressure is too high. Connect theseloads to any other valve section.


2-85

HYDRAULIC MOTOR APPLICATION

1. Use hydraulic motors designed for Open Centeror Pressure/Flow Load Compensating hydraulicsystems only. Do Not use a hydraulic motordesigned for closed center hydraulic systemsunless it is adapted for use by removing the inletrestrictor.

2. Rating: Hydraulic motors up to 1.26 L/SEC (20.0GPMUS)@15.50MPa (2250 PSI) can be used.

3. Be sure the hydraulic motor does not haverestrictors in the ports or fittings.

4. Hydraulic motors less than 0.63 L/SEC (10 GPMUS) may be equipped with 12.7 mm (1/2″) IDhoses and standard (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers.

5. Hydraulic motors greater than 0.63 L/SEC (10GPMUS)shouldbeconnectedwith (3/4″ ) hosesand (ASAE/SAE/ISO) couplers to preventexcessive restriction and heat generation.

6. It is recommended that the low pressure returnline kit (described earlier in this section) beinstalled. The use of the low-pressure returncircuit will reduce back pressure in the remotehydraulic return line which will result in moreefficient hydraulic motor operation. The low-pressure return circuit can also be used inapplications where low return oil pressure isdesired to improve implement operation such aswith orbit motor case drain lines, or implementmounted hydraulic control valves.

OPERATING REMOTE EQUIPMENTSIMULTANEOUSLY OR REMOTEEQUIPMENT AND HYDRAULIC LIFTSIMULTANEOUSLY

NOTE: Hydraulic pump output varies with enginespeed. Oil flow will be relatively constant in theremote control valve circuits if the flow control is usedto provide reduced oil flow, thus providing constantoperating speed for hydraulic motors, etc. even ifengine speed varies. Maintain the engine speedabove the minimum required for simultaneousoperation of all required circuits and vary groundspeed by selection of the appropriate gear.

If operating two or more remote control valvessimultaneously or remote valves and hydraulic lift, allthe flow control knobs should be adjusted to provideapartial flow.Otherwise, all the available flowmaybedirected to the full flow circuit when the pressure inthat circuit is less than that of the other circuits in use.

BLEEDING REMOTE CYLINDERSWhen connecting a cylinder with trapped air, i.e., anew cylinder, one that has been out of service or onethat has had the hoses disconnected, it will benecessary to bleed the cylinder to remove the air.

With thehoses connected to the remote control valvecouplers at the rear of the tractor, position thecylinder with the hose end uppermost and extendand retract the cylinder sevenor eight timesusing theremote control switch. Check the rear axle oil levelbefore and after operating the remote cylinder.

POWER BEYOND APPLICATIONSAll BVI Genesis tractors are “Power Beyond” readyin that another closed center load sensing valvemaybe incorporated with the Genesis closed center loadsensing hydraulic system.

The pressure for the Power Beyond is obtained fromthe (1”) ORB port, 1, (1 5/16--12 thread) on the topcover of the valve. If the tractor is equipped withHydraFlow Plus, replace the elbow fitting located atport 1 with a tee fitting to access the supply pressure.

The sense line is attached to the (1/4”) ORB port, 2,(7/16 -- 20 thread) located on the rear face of thevalve end cover.

The return line from theexternal valvewouldgo to thelow pressure return port on the HPL cover. This isexplained earlier in this section.

125


2-86

THREE-POINT HITCH CONTROLS

INTRODUCTIONThe electro-hydraulic three-point hitch controlsystem employs electronic switches and a micro-computer to control the hydraulic system, whichraises and lowers the 3-point linkage.

MODES OF OPERATIONThe electro-hydraulic three-point hitch system offersthree modes of operation, position, draft, and float.

Position Control provides accurate and sensitivecontrol of implements that operate at a fixed position.Once set, position control will maintain the selectedimplement height.When operating in position controlthe tractor and implement become, in effect, a rigidunit. Irregularities in the soil surface will cause theimplement to rise and fall according to movement ofthe tractor.

Draft Control provides for a uniform load to bemaintained on the tractor by automatically adjustingthe working height/depth of soil engagingimplements.

Thechanges indraft loadingare sensedelectronical-ly through special load sensing pins used to connect

the lower links to the rear axle housing. These pinssend and electronic signal to the computer which, inturn, signals the hydraulic system to respond byraising or lowering the implement to maintain therequested draft load.

Float Control provides a means of operatingimplements that operate with the contour of the soilsurface, including implements that operate withgauge wheels or other devices that limit operatingdepth. Float control also allows for lateral movementof the implement on uneven surfaces.

The set-up and operation of each mode of operationis described later in this section.

NOTE: The electro-hydraulic three point hitch is aseparate system from the electro-hydraulic remotevalves. The engagement switch for the electro-hydraulic remote valves that can be used as aisolator switch has no operational control over theelectro-hydraulic three point hitch. Depressing theengagement switch will have no effect on stoppingthe three point hitch in an emergency situation.


2-87

CONTROLSThe electro-hydraulic three-point hitch controlsystem is operated from a console to the right of theoperator’s seat. The console houses:

1. Lift control lever2. Position/draft sensitivity control knob (if equipped)3. Drop rate control knob4. Height limit control knob5. Slip limit control knob (if equipped)

2

1

43

5

126

LIFT CONTROL LEVERThe lift control lever, 1, controls implement height orworking depth in position control and draft loading indraft control. Pull the lever rearward to raise the3-point lift, and push forward to lower in positioncontrol. In draft control moving the lever forwardincreases the load demanded from the hitch andmoving the lever rearward decreases the loaddemanded.

Anadjustable lift control lever stop, 2, is located to theright of the lift lever. The stop sets the lower or uppertravel of the lift lever. To adjust, loosen the stop knoband slide the stop forward or rearwards to contact thelift lever in the desired position. Tighten the stopknob.

The stop should be placed in front of the lever whentransporting implements.

127


2-88

POSITION/DRAFT SENSITIVITYCONTROL KNOB(ELECTRONIC DRAFT CONTROL ONLY)The position/draft sensitivity knob, 1, (if equipped), isused to select position control or draft control. A decalencircling the knob has six numbered positions, toindicate the degree of response selected. Turn theposition/draft sensitivity knob towards the full positioncontrol setting (position 1) to decrease the system’sresponse to a change in draft loading. The knob isdetented at the position control setting (position 1 – knobfully counterclockwise).

IMPORTANT: Always set the position/draft sensitiv-ity knob to the full position control setting (position 1)at any time when not actually operating in draftcontrol, such as when attaching equipment,transporting equipment or when no equipment isattached.

If precise depth control is required, the position/draftsensitivity knob must be in the full position controlsetting.

Whenever the draft control feature is selected, theimplement operating depth will automatically vary asrequired to maintain a fixed load, as determined by thelift control lever, on the tractor engine.

IMPORTANT: Draft control will work with a variety ofdraft implements, however, hitch response to lowdraft/shallow implements will be difficult to obtain ifsufficient draft load is not detected on the load sensepins. Using draft control with implements that do notcreate a sufficient draft load will result in the implementgoing to a lower position seeking more draft. SeeDETERMINING 3-POINT HITCH MODE OF OPERA-TION in this section to verify if draft control operation issuited for your implement.

1

23

128

DROP RATE CONTROL KNOBThe drop rate control knob, 2, controls the speed atwhich the lower links and implement drop during alowering cycle. This knob has a decal encircling itwith six numbered positions. Position 1 is the slowestrate and is denoted by a “tortoise” symbol. Position6 is the fastest setting, denoted by a “hare” symbol.

HEIGHT LIMIT CONTROL KNOBThe height limit control knob, 3, limits the height thatthe linkage may be raised. Adjust this knob to avoidthe possibility of a large implement damaging thetractor cab when fully raised.

Turning the knob fully counterclockwise prevents the3-point hitch from raising above mid height. Turningthe knob fully clockwise will allow the 3-point hitch toraise to full height.


2-89

3-POINT HITCH STATUS LIGHTThe status light, 1, serves two purposes:

-- Steady light signifies “hitch disabled”. The “hitchdisabled” warning is also duplicated on theinstrument panel as an LCD symbol, 1, Figure128.

-- Flashing light means that there is a malfunctionin the 3-point hitch system circuits. Should amalfunction occur, consult your authorizeddealer.

1

129

The “hitch disabled” LCD symbol, 1, and warninglight signifies that the lift control lever position doesnot correspond to the position of the lower links. Thelower link cannot move until the hitch is “captured”.

The “hitch Disabled” warning will display if:

-- The lift control lever was inadvertently movedwith the engine stopped.

-- The external fender switches have been used toraise or lower the hitch.

-- The 3-point hitch arm position changed with theengine stopped.

NOTE: To “capture the hitch” and put the lift controllever back in phase with the lower links:

1. Cycle the fast raise/work switch, Figure 129, tothe raise then lower position.

2. Slowly move the position control lever fullyrearward then forward until the status light goesout, and the hitch enable symbol, 3, appears.

The hitch enabled symbol, 3, is displayed to advisethe operator when the three-point linkage is in phasewith the lift control lever. When the three-pointlinkageand lift control leverbecomeoutof phasewithone another, this display will disappear and the hitchdisabled symbol, 1, will display.

The digital hitch position display, 2, on the instrumentpanel indicates the position of the lower links over ascale of “0” to “99”. A display of “0” indicates that thelinks are fully lowered, and a display of “99” indicatesthey are fully raised.

130


2-90

FAST RAISE/WORK SWITCHThe FAST RAISE/WORK switch, 1, allows theoperator to rapidly raise the implement to thepositionset by the height limit control and to lower theimplement back down to the position set by the liftcontrol lever, without disturbing these settings.

This feature allows the operator to raise theimplement at the headland and return the implementto the same operating conditions.

To raise the implement, press the rear of the switch,2. Press the front of the switch, 3, to lower theimplement to the work position.

To lower the hitch below the position set by the liftcontrol lever, without disturbing the settings, pressand hold the front of the switch, 4. When the switchis released the hitch will return to the position set bythe lift control lever.

NOTE: The FAST RAISE/WORK switch should beswitched to the raise position when transportingequipment.

The FAST RAISE/WORK switch is also used torecapture the hitch after using the external fenderswitches.

3

2

4

131

SLIP LIMIT CONTROL KNOB (If Equipped)The slip limit control knob, 1, (if equipped) is inaddition to the optional radar sensor unit. It allows theoperator to select a wheel slip limit that whenexceeded overrides the electronic draft controlsystem. When the selected percent slip thresholdhas been exceeded the hitchwill raise until thewheelslip is below the preset level. When the percent slipis reduced below the threshold the hitch will return tothe preset operation. The slip override lamp, 2, isilluminated whenever the slip exceeds the presetthreshold and remains on until the slip is reduced.The knob is detented at the “Off” position (knob fullyclockwise). A digital display of wheel slip, and a slipalarm may be programmed into the electronicinstrument cluster. See “Electronic InstrumentCluster Programming”.

Slip limit control will alsowork in position control if thetractor is equipped with load sensing pins.

NOTE:Slip limit control will not operate below 0.8 km(0.5 mph) ground speed.

NOTE: Slip limit control will disengage when the3-point hitch is raised with the fast raise switch or theposition control lever. The Slip limit control willreengage after the 3-point hitch is lowered. Theimplement must enter the ground and provide asignificant draft load to reengage the slip limit controloption.

1

2

132


2-91

FIELD OPERATIONAfter attaching an implement to the three-point hitch,adjust theheight limit control knob, 2, to prevent largeimplements from damaging the tractor cab, andadjust the drop rate control knob, 3, to set the desiredrate at which the implement will drop when the hitchis lowered.

To set the height limit control, proceed as follows:

• Turn the height limit control knob, 2, fullycounterclockwise which will allow the hitch toraise to one-half its full height.

• Pull the lift lever, 1, fully to the rear.• Slowly turn the height limit control knob, 2,

clockwise to raise the implement until no lessthan 100 mm (4″) clearance is remainingbetween the tractor and implement or maximumhitch is reached.

Adjust the rate or implement drop by rotating thedroprate knob, 3. Turn the knob clockwise to speed up thedrop rate or counterclockwise to slow down the droprate.

IMPORTANT:When first setting the implement up forwork, keep the drop rate control knob in the slowdropposition (“tortoise” symbol).

NOTE: The drop rate control only affects the lowerlink/implement drop rate when the implement is notengaging the ground.

POSITION CONTROL OPERATIONNOTE:SeeDETERMINING3-POINTHITCHMODEOF OPERATION in this section for procedures toverify if position control operation is needed for theimplement being used.

To operate in position control:

1. Turn the position/draft sensitivity control knob, 4,fully counterclockwise (position 1) into thedetented position.

NOTE: Failure to turn the position/draft sensitivityknob into the detented position will cause the hitch tomake automatic hitch corrections as it searches fora draft load.

2. Use the 3-point hitch lift control lever, 1, to controlmovement of the hitch. Pull the lever rearward toraise the 3-point hitch and push the lever forwardto lower the hitch. The EIC hitch position display,2, Figure128,will show the current hitch position.

1

23

45

133


2-92

3. Once the required implement working height hasbeen established, adjust the lift control lever stop, 5,to set the implement height. To adjust, loosen theknob on the stop andmove it so that it is against thefront edge of the lift control lever. Retighten theknob. Whenever the lift control lever is pulledrearwards to raise the implement, the implementwillalways return to the same working height when thelever is pushed forward to contact the stop.

NOTE: If required, the lift control lever may be easedsideways (to the left) to bypass the adjustable stop.

4. Upon reaching the headland, use the raise/workswitch to raise and lower the implement.

IMPORTANT: Once the correct working depth isestablished, the stop set, and the height limit is set,it is recommended that the FAST RAISE/WORKswitch be used. Repeated movements of the controllever against the stop will eventually move the stopand change the depth setting.

WARNINGWhen transporting equipment on the three-pointlinkage, select position control, raise the imple-ment and set the adjustable stop, 5, against thefront edge of the lift control lever to preventaccidental forward movement of the lever whichcould result in attached equipment lowering andbecoming damaged, damaging the road surface orcausing personal injury. Set the raise/work switchto the raise position as an additional transportlock.

DRAFT CONTROL OPERATION(If Equipped)

NOTE:SeeDETERMINING3-POINTHITCHMODEOF OPERATION in this section for procedures toverify if draft control operation is needed for theimplement being used.

To operate in draft control, adjustment of thedraft/position sensitivity knob, 4, is required. Thefollowing table may be used as a guide to adjust thesettings to suit the implement and field conditions:

Implement Soil Position/Draft Knob

Fully mounted - clay soil 3-4- sandy soil 2-3

Semi-mounted - clay soil 5-6- sandy soil 4-5

Position 6 on the position/draft sensitivity knob (fullyclockwise, decal indicating plowengagedwith soil) isthe most reactive draft setting and variations in soildensity will cause the hydraulic system to respondwith large movements of the linkage and attachedimplement.

Turning the position/draft sensitivity knob counter-clockwise (towards position 1) will progressivelydecrease the amount and rate of linkage movementrelative to variations in soil density.

Moving the lever forward increases the loaddemanded from the hitch and moving the leverrearward decreases the load demanded.

To set the draft control system perform the followingprocedures:

1. Adjust the position/draft sensitivity knob to thedesired setting, using the table listed as a guide.

2. Drive the tractor into the field and lower theimplement by pushing the lift control lever, 1,forward until the implement load causes thetractor wheel slip to increase.

3. Pull back on the lift control lever until theimplement starts to run more shallow and thewheel slip is acceptable.

4. Make slight adjustments to both the lift controllever and the position/draft sensitivity knob toachieve the desired performance.

NOTE: Changing the position/draft sensitivity knobsetting may require slight changes in the lift controllever position to maintain the desired implementworking depth.

NOTE: For optimum draft control performance boththe lift control lever and the position/draft sensitivityknob need to be set properly.

5. Once the required implement draft operation hasbeen established, adjust the lift control leverstop, 5. To adjust, loosen the knob on the stopand move it so that it is against the front edge ofthe lift control lever. Retighten the knob.Whenever the lift control lever is pulledrearwards to raise the implement, the implementwill always return to the same draft operationwhen the lever is pushed forward to contact thestop.

NOTE: If required, the lift control lever may be easedsideways (to the left) to bypass the adjustable stop.


2-93

6. Observe the implement as it pulls through theground. If the hydraulic system reaction is toogreat, reduce system reaction by turning thedraft/sensitivity knob, 4, counterclockwise by afew degrees. If implement movement is still toogreat, progressively rotate the knob counterclock-wise (toward the position control setting) to furtherreduce the hitch reaction to a level suited to thesoil conditions. When the draft control is adjustedproperly the digital hitch position display willincrease and decrease in value at a uniform rate.

7. Once set, the tractor hydraulic system willautomatically adjust implement depth to main-tain an even pull (draft load) on the tractor toreduce wheel slip to a minimum.

8. Upon reaching the headland, use the raise/workswitch to raise and lower the implement.

IMPORTANT: Once the correct working depth isestablished, the stop set, and the height limit is set,it is recommended that the FAST RAISE/WORKswitch be used. Repeated movements of the controllever against the stop will eventually move the stopand change the depth setting.

Depending on the position of the lift control leverrelative to the lower links, the speed of lift willautomatically adjust. This means that if a largemovement of the lift control lever is made then thelower linkswill respond rapidly. As the links approachthe position set by the lift control lever,movementwillslow.

NOTE: The drop rate control only affects the lowerlink/implement drop rate when the implement is notengaging the ground.

IMPORTANT: As tractor and implement useincreases performance will vary. Badly worn orimproperly adjusted implements will cause poorelectronic draft control response.


2-94

3-POINT HITCH FLOAT

When To Use FloatFloat should be used when the attachments depthposition is controlled by gauge wheels or some otherdevice that controls implement depth while followingground contour. Your GENESIS tractor has 3-pointhitch float capability. Float is obtained by manuallypositioning the 3-point arm attaching pins in the floatposition, 3. (Lockplate vertical)

1. Clevis2. Lock pin3. Lock plate4. Lower links

Setting the 3-Point Hitch For The Float PositionTo conserve engine power, reduce hydraulic load,minimize heat in the hydraulic system and getmaximum implement performance, follow thesesimple steps when using 3-point float.

1. Manually position the 3-point arm pins in the floatposition, 3.

1

2

34

134

2. Rotate the position/draft control knob, 3, ifequipped, to full position control by rotating theknob fully counter-clockwise into the detentposition.

NOTE:Only use full position control when operatingin float position.

3. Place the 3-point control lever, 1, fully forwardand operate the implement in the field until thegauge wheels control the implement’s depth,then stop the tractor.

4. Slowlymove the3-point lift control lever rearwarduntil the 3-point arms are in themiddle of the floatslot.

5. With the arms set in the middle of the float slot,adjust the 3-point lever stop, 2, against the lever,1. Always position the lever against the stopwhenoperatingwith the implement in theground.

1

32

135

6. After setting the 3-point control lever position andstop, use the 3-point fast raise/lower rockerswitch, 1, to raise and lower the hitch at the endof the field or for transport.

136


2-95

DETERMINING 3-POINT HITCH MODE OFOPERATION

Position/Float Control TestIf the implement is equipped with gauge wheels orsome other depth control device, the use of floatposition is needed. To determine if position or floatcontrol is needed for an application without gaugewheels or other depth control device, perform thefollowing test.

1. Attach and adjust the implement as described inthe implement operator’s manual.

2. Turn the position/draft sensitivity control knob, 1,to position control (counterclockwise).

1

137

3. Set the lower link lock plate into the float position,3, (vertical).

4. During normal field operation, lower the 3-pointhitch to the full down position engaging theimplement fully into the ground. Pull theimplement until it reaches its operating depth,stopping the tractor with the implement still in theground.

1

2

34

138

5. Check the position of the lower link lock plate andpin.

-- If the lower link lock plate and pin are at thetop of the float slot, float position is needed.

-- If the lower link lock plate and pin are at thebottom of the float slot or the implementdrops to a depth causing the tractor to loosetraction, position or draft control is needed.(See Position/Draft Control Test)

139


2-96

Position/Draft Control TestTo determine if position control or draft control isneeded for an application, perform the following test.

1. Attach and adjust the implement as described inthe implement operator’s manual.

2. Turn the position/draft sensitivity control knob, 1,to position. Control (counterclockwise). 1

140

3. Set the lower link lock plate in the positionconfiguration, 2, (horizontal).

4. During normal field operation, use the lift controllever to engage the implement into the grounduntil, the desired depth is obtained, the tractorstalls, or looses traction and spins out.

If the desired depth is obtained and maintainedwithout the tractor stalling or loosing traction thenposition control should be used.If the tractor stalls or spins out while trying toobtain the desired operating depth then draftcontrol should be used.

NOTE: The use of this test is only a guide fordetermining if position or draft control on groundengaging implements should be used.

1

2

34

141


2-97

EXTERNAL 3-POINT HITCH CONTROLS

WARNINGDo not stand on or near the implement orbetween the implement and tractor whenoperating the external 3-point hitch lift controls.

An external, push button switch, 1, is provided oneach rear fender. The switches are spring-loaded toreturn to the off position.

CAUTIONOperatormust stand in one of the hatched areas,2, when activating an external switch.

Before leaving the tractor to operate the externalswitches:

1. Apply the parking brake.

NOTE: The external switches only function with theparking brake applied.

2. Move the powershift control lever to neutral.

3. Disengage the PTO.

4. Move the hand throttle lever to the low idleposition (fully rearwards).

22

142

5. Exit the cab and push the raise end, 1, or lowerend, 2, of the external switch. This will transfercontrol of the hydraulic power lift to the rearfenders switches. The lift disabled symbol will bedisplayed and the hitch status light will beilluminated continually.

Only activate the external switches whilestanding to the side of the tractor as shown at 2,Figure 140.Pressing the upper part of the switch, 1, causesthe lift linkage to raise. Pressing the lower part,2, causes the linkage to lower. When the lowerlinks align with the implement, release the switchand attach the implement to the three-pointlinkage in the normal manner.

NOTE: Operation of the fender switches causes thehitch to move at a slower controlled rate.

70-540-87

143


2-98

WARNINGBefore using the external 3-point hitch controlswitches, ensure that no person or object is inthe area of the implement or three-point linkage.Never operate the external switches whilestanding:• Directly behind the tractor• Between the lower links• On or near the implement.Only operate switches while standing in thehatched areas, 2, as shown in Figure 140.Never extend arms, legs, any part of the body orany object into the area near the three-pointlinkage or implement while operating theexternal switch.Neverhaveanassistantworking theopposite setof controls. When moving to the opposite set ofcontrols, move around the tractor or implement.Do not cross between the implement and tractor.

To transfer control of the 3-point hitch back to the liftcontrol lever:

1. Cycle the FAST RAISE/WORK switch, 1, to thefast raiseposition (rear), then to theworkposition(forward).

2. Push the lift control lever fully forward then pullthe lever slowly rearwards to capture the hitch.

3. The hitch enabled symbol, 3, Figure 127, willdisplay, indicating that the three-point linkage isin phase with the lift control lever.

144


2-99

3-POINT HITCH LINKAGE

INTRODUCTIONThe tractor will accept category II, III, and III Nimplements that conform to SAE-ASAE standarddimensions.

The 3-point hitch linkage consists of the followingcomponents:

1. Left lift rod2. Top link3. Top link transport hanger4. Right lift rod5. Right lift rod adjusting block6. Right lower link7. Sway blocks8. Left lower link9. Left lift rod adjusting block

NOTE:Before attaching equipment read this sectioncarefully.

When attaching mounted equipment to the three-point linkage, the following adjustments may bemade to ensure satisfactory operation:

12 3 4

5

6

7

8

9

145

LIFT RODS

WARNINGBefore disconnecting a lift rod from the lowerlink, lower attachedequipment to the groundandmake sure the hydraulic control lever is fullydown. Stop the engine. Make sure attachedequipment is correctly supported before remov-ing the lift rod securing pin.

To adjust either lift rod, 1, raise the adjusting block,2, and rotate it to lengthen or shorten the lift rodassembly. To prevent rotation of the adjusting block,slip it down to engage on the locking boss, 3, on thelift rod end. For most implements adjust both lift rodsso the centers of the lower link balls are 254mm(10″)above the ground when the hitch is fully lowered.Adjust the lift rods to level the equipment in theoperating position.

146


2-100

LOWER LINK FLOAT

Rigid PositionBoth lift rods have a lock plate, 3, installed in theclevis, 1. If the lock plate is installed horizontally, the3-point hitch will not have vertical float.

1

2

34

147

Float PositionIf the lock plates are rotated to the vertical position,3, the lower links, 4, will be allowed to float up anddownby 40mm (1-1/2″). Thiswill allow an implementvertical movement independent of the tractor.

1

2

34

148

TOP LINKThe top link, 1, is adjusted by turning the sleeve, 2,after raising the handle/locking latch, 3. To preventfurther rotation of the sleeve, push the handle/latchdown to engage in either of the two slots in the endof the top link assembly.

Most equipment will operate at the proper heightwhen the link is adjusted to 724 mm (28.5″)measured between the center of the attachingpoints. Readjust to level the equipment as required.

When not in use, the top link can be removed andstored, or left in a vertical position and retained by thetransport hanger, 3, Figure 143. 149


2-101

FLEXIBLE LINK ENDS

Attaching PositionPull the lock pin, 1, to release the link end, 2, from thelower link, 3.Extend the linkends tomakeconnectingto the implement easier.

NOTE: Illustrations show two renditions of the lowerlink assembly.

Operating PositionSecure the link ends to the equipment, then carefullyinch the tractor rearwards until the flex link ends, 1,lock in the closed position and the lock pins, 2, lockin place.

Attach the top link after flex ends are locked in thelower links.

NOTE: Illustrations show two renditions of the lowerlink assembly.

IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operating theequipment, make sure the flexible link ends arelocked in the operating position. Remove thedrawbar if it interferes with close-mounted equip-ment.

150

1

2

3

151

152

2

1

153


2-102

SWAY BLOCKSTheswayblocks, 1, control lower link sidemovementin both the transport and operating position toprevent the equipment swaying from side to side.This is especially important when operating onslopes near fences, walls or ditches.

The sway blocks can be mounted in a rigid or swayposition.

Rigid PositionTo prevent side movement of the equipment in boththe operating and transport positions, rotate thesway blocks, 1, to the forward position and secure inthe forward (rigid position) hole. Install the pins, 2,and the clips, 3.

NOTE: The pin must be installed so the clip is on theinside of the drawbar support.

154

Swing PositionWhen it is desirable to have side movement of theequipment in the operating position, but remain rigidin the transport position, rotate the sway blocks, 1,rearward and secure them. Install pins, 2, and clips,3, in the rear (swing position) hole.

NOTE: The pin must be installed so the clip is on theinside of the drawbar support.

IMPORTANT: When setting the sway blocks toprovide side-to-side movement, be sure that there isno possibility of the rear tires contacting the swayblocks, lower links, or implement.

155

GUIDE BLOCKS, SPACERS AND SHIMSThe guide blocks and spacers can be positioned sothe 3-point hitch will accept category II, category IIIN or category III implements.

Category II or Category III N PositionInstall the guide blocks, 1, on the inside of the lowerlinks. Add shims, 2, if required.

156


2-103

Category III PositionPosition the guide blocks, 1, and spacer, 2, on theinside of the lower links. Add shims, 3, if required.

Shim PositionShims are available to adjust the amount of lateralmovement between the sway blocks and the lowerlinks when the hitch is in the raised (transport)position or when the sway blocks are in the rigidposition. See Figure 152 and Figure 153 for shimlocations.

The adjustment must be made with the sway blocksin the rigid position. Adjust by placing an equalamount of shims on each lower link. Shim so thelinkage can be fully raised and lowered withoutbinding when an implement is attached.

157


2-104

LINKAGE CATEGORY CONVERSIONTractors are equipped with Category III linkage.

To convert from Category III to Category II, bushingsmay be inserted into the top link and lower linkimplement connections. The guide blocks andspacers must be repositioned, as previouslydescribed.

QUICK HITCHThe quick hitch allows fast, easy hitching andunhitching of implements. The hitch fits implementswith ASAE category III hitches. Do not use the hitchwith implementswhich have offset cross-shafts suchas may be found on mounted moldboard plows within-furrow hitches.

Installation and Removal1. Place the quick hitch, 1, at rear of the tractor and

install on the lower links using the lower link pins,2, and retaining bolts.

Torque the retaining bolts to 115N·m (85 ft.-lbs.).2. Tilt the hitch upright and secure the upper link

with the top link pin, 3, and retaining bolt.

Torque the bolt to 115 N·m (85 ft.-lbs.).3. Reverse theprocedure to remove thequickhitch.

Hitching1. Position the latch handles, 4, down as shown.

The latch handles must be down for the hitch tolatch.

2. Back the tractor to the implement making surethat the lower hooks are below the implementpins.

3. Raise the quick hitch until the pins engage thehooks.

WARNINGBe certain that both latches fully engage theimplement hitch pins before transporting oroperating the implement.

4. Perform all checks listed under the “Attaching3-Point Equipment” heading.

5. To unhitch equipment, position the equipment sothat it will not fall when unhitched and pull thelatch handles, 4, up to open the lift pin latches.Lower the quick hitch until it disengages from theimplement. Remove any control connectionsand slowly drive the tractor away.

2

4

3

2

1

158


2-105

ATTACHING 3-POINT EQUIPMENTBefore attaching equipment to your tractor:

• Besure theguideblocks arepositioned to “fit” theequipment as outlined under the “Sway Blocks”and “Guide Blocks, Spacers and Shims”headings.

• Remove the swinging drawbar, if close-mountedequipment is being attached.

IMPORTANT: Always set the position/draft sensitiv-ity control knob in position control when attachingequipment, transporting equipment, when noequipment is attached or at any time when notoperating in draft control.

NOTE:See also “External 3-Point HitchControls” formore details.

Most equipment can be attached to your tractor asfollows:

1. Position the tractor so that the lower link hitchpoints are level with and slightly ahead of theimplement hitch pins.

2. Stop the engine and engage the parking brake.

3. Release the flexible link ends, and slip the endson the implementhitchpins.Securewith the linchpins. Start the engine and slowly back the tractorup until the flexible link ends lock in the operatingposition.Stop theengineandengage theparkingbrake.

IMPORTANT: Before transporting or operatingequipment, be sure that the link ends are locked inthe operating position.

4. Lengthen or shorten the top link, until theimplement mast pin can be inserted through themast and top link. Adjust the top link to the initial724 mm (28.5″) setting.

5. Attach any remote equipment.

6. After attaching implement and before actualoperation check that:

• No interference occurs with tractor compo-nents.

• Top link does not contact the PTO guard withimplement at its lowest position.

• PTO driveline (if equipped) is not overex-tended, bottomed out or at an excessiveangle and driveline shield does not contactPTO guard or drawbar.

IMPORTANT: Before operating PTO driven equip-ment, check tomakesure thedrivelinewill not bottomout or become disengaged. See “Attaching Equip-ment to the PTO Shaft” heading in the “IndependentPTO” section for details.

IMPORTANT: When attaching mounted or semi-mounted equipment to the 3-point linkage or whenattaching trailed equipment to the drawbar or hitch,besure that there is adequate clearancebetween theimplement and the tractor.

Check theclearances in the raisedpositionby raisingthe implement carefully using the lift control lever,Figure 125, in position control. Check the swingclearance by performing a series of left- andright-hand turns with the tractor and implementcombination.

IMPLEMENT TO CAB CLEARANCE

CAUTIONSome mounted and semi-mounted equipmentmay interfere with and damage the cab.

WARNINGYou may be injured by broken glass or the cabROPS may be damaged if equipment interfereswith the cab.

To prevent cab damage, proceed as follows:

1. Attach the equipment as outlined previously.

2. Check for adequate clearance by slowly raisingthe equipment with the lift control lever inPOSITION CONTROL. If the equipment clearsthe cabby100mm(4″) ormorewhen fully raised,proceed to operate the equipment. If any part ofthe equipment comes closer than 100mm (4″) tothe cab, do the following:

Adjust the 3-point hitch height limit control knob,Figure 126, to limit upwardmovement so there isa minimum of 100 mm (4″) clearance betweenthe cab and the implement.

IMPORTANT: The height limit must be adjusted tolimit hitch height when the RAISE/WORK switch isactivated.

REMOVING EQUIPMENTWhen removing equipment, the procedure is thereverseof attaching. The information listed belowwillmake disconnecting easier and safer.

• Always park the equipment on a level, firmsurface.

• Support equipment so that it will not tip or fallwhen detached from the tractor.

• Always relieve all hydraulic pressure in remotecylinders by selecting the float position beforedisconnecting.


2-106

DRAWBAR - TOWING ATTACHMENTS

SWINGING DRAWBARThe swinging drawbarmay be fixed in any one of fivepositions or allowed to swing the full width of thehanger.

Fasten the drawbar, 1, in position using the swinglimiter pins, 2, when pulling equipment whichrequires accurate positioning and when transportingequipment.

Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling groundengaging equipment which does not requireaccurate positioning. This will make steering andturning easier.

159

AUTOMATIC HITCH PINThe drawbar is equipped with a hitch pin that willautomaticly drop in place when hitching up toimplements.

To operate, place the hitch pin, 1, in the raisedposition. Retaining ring, 2, fits in the upper notch, 3,of the clevis to hold the hitch pin in the raise position.Release strap, 4, must be positioned in front of theretaining ring as shown. The drawbar is nowprepared to hitch to the implement.

When backing the tractor to attach the implement,the implement hitch will contact the release strap, 4,when aligning the drawbar. As the release strap ispushed forward it dislodges the retaining ring, 2.Hitch pin, 1 will drop as the retaining ring, 2, slidesdown the incline, 5, on the front of the clevis. Theimplement is now attached to the tractor withoutrequiring the operator to leave the cab of the tractoror a second operator.

WARNINGNever allow anyone to stand between the tractorand implement while backing the tractor to theimplement. Always bring the tractor to acomplete stop and engage the parking brakebefore allowing anyone behind the tractor tohitch the implement.

1

2

5

3

4

160


2-107

After hitch pin, 1, drops into place, retaining ring, 2,locks into the lower notch, 3, of the clevis. Notch, 3,holds the retaining ring in the lower positionpreventing the hitch pin from inadvertentlyunhitching.

IMPORTANT! Always install a safety retaining pin inthe hitch pin at, 4, to secure the hitch pin and preventany accidental unhitching of the implement.

To manually unhitch the implement, first pivot theretaining ring, 2, up away from notch, 3, then pull thehitch pin from the clevis.

WARNINGAlways secure the drawbar to prevent swingingwhen transporting equipment or when operatingany equipment except ground engaging equip-ment.

1

4

2

3

161


2-108

DRAWBAR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT -MODEL 2145This model has a straight drawbar, 1. The drawbar isnot height adjustable but has three lengthadjustments.

Distance fromHitch Point to

Maximum StaticDownward Load

HoleHitch Point toPTO Shaft kg lbs

1 355 mm (14″) 2449 5400

2 406 mm (16″) 2086 4600

3 508 mm (20″) 1587 3500

1

1621. Model 2145 straight drawbar

DRAWBAR HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT -MODELS 2160, 2180, 2210These models have a drawbar adjustable for bothheight and length. Invert the drawbar to vary theheight of the hitch point above the ground.

IMPORTANT: The clevis and hitch pin retainer mustbe moved to the top when the drawbar is inverted.

Distance fromHitch Point to


HoleHitch Point toPTO Shaft kg lbs

1 406 mm (16″) 2750 6000

2 508 mm (20″) 2131 4700

3 609 mm (24″) 1770 3900

1

2

1631. Drawbar, low position2. Drawbar, high position

DRAWBAR LENGTHThree holes, 1, 2, and 3, are provided at the front ofthe drawbar for adjusting length. The front locatingpin may be inserted in any of the three holes to varythe PTO shaft to hitch point distance.

Always use the close-coupled position, 1, forequipment exerting high downward forces, such astwo-wheeled trailers, etc. The maximum staticdownward loads for these models are shown in thefollowing table. Use the 355 mm (14″) position for540 PTO equipment, the 406 mm (16″) position for1000 PTO operation with the 21-spline 35 mm(1-3/8″) shaft, and the508mm(20″) position for 1000operation with the 20-spline 45 mm (1-3/4″) shaft.

12

3

164


2-109

ADJUSTING DRAWBAR LENGTH

NOTE: The drawbar is shipped in the shortestposition. Reposition as required by the attachment.

To change the drawbar length, remove the two bolts,1, that retain the front pin, 2. Adjust the drawbarlength as required and reinstall pin and bolts. Torquebolts to 60 N·m (45 ft.-lbs.).

165

WIDE SWINGING ROLLER DRAWBAR(TRACTORS WITHOUT 3-POINT HITCH)When using ground engaging equipment, the wideswinging roller drawbar offersadditional turningeaseas compared to the swinging drawbar.

Secure the drawbar, 1, with the swing limiter pins, 2,when using equipment which requires accuratepositioning and when transporting equipment.

Allow the drawbar to swing when pulling groundengaging equipment that does not require accuratepositioning. This will make steering and turning easier.


Wide Swinging kg lbsWide SwingingRoller Drawbar 1837 4050

NOTE: When the tractor is equipped with the wideswinging drawbar, the hydraulic 3-point lift linkagecannot be installed.

WARNINGAlways secure the drawbar to prevent swingingwhen transporting equipment or when operatingany equipment except ground engaging equip-ment.

NOTE:When supporting equipment on the drawbar,make sure that the total weight on the rear axle doesnot exceed themaximumrear axle loadingor the reartire load capacity, whichever is the lower. See“Ballasting Limitations” in this section of the manualand “Rear Tire Pressures andPermissable Loads” inthe Specifications section.

WARNINGAlways use the drawbar or lower links in thelowered position for pull-type work.

1

22

166


2-110

Safety ChainWhen towing implements, 1, on the highway, use asafety chain, 2, with tensile strength equal to orgreater than the gross weight of the implement to betowed by the tractor. This will control the implementin the event the drawbar, 3, and implementdisconnect.

A chain guide, 4, is provided to support the chain.

After attaching the safety chain, make a trial run bydriving the tractor to the right and to the left for a shortdistance to check the safety chain adjustment. Ifnecessary, readjust to eliminate a tight or loosechain.

Check the implement operator’s manual forimplement weight and attaching hardware specifica-tions.

Safety chains, attaching hardware and chain guideare available from your authorized dealer.

1

2

34

167


2-111

ATTACHING AND DETACHING TRAILEDEQUIPMENT

IMPORTANT: Regulations in some areas requirebrakes on towed equipment when operating on thepublic highway. Before traveling on public highways,make sure you comply with legal requirements.

To attach the tractor to trailed equipment andimplements:

1. Be sure implement is at the draw bar height.

2. Slowly inch rearwards to allow the drawbar andimplement hitch to intersect (steering sharply leftand right will aid in hitch alignment).

3. Set parking brake and stop engine.

4. Insert hitch pin and be sure the retainer is in thelatched position.

NOTE: For implements that require hitch extensionsor interfere with the tractor clevis, remove and storethe clevis and hitch pin.

Always use a safety chain installed between thetractor and implement hitch when transportingequipment on the highway.

North American standards recommend that youobserve the following precautions for towingequipment not equipped with brakes:

DO NOT TOW equipment weighing more than twicethe tractor weight.

DO NOT exceed 16 km/h (10 MPH) if towedequipment weighs more than the tractor.

DO NOT exceed 32 km/h (20 MPH) while towingequipment that weighs less than the tractor.


2-112

FRONT WHEEL TRACK SPACING

168

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: Read this section completely beforeadjusting track width.

NOTE: The track width dimensions (width fromcenter to center) shown may vary from your actualmeasurements depending on specific wheel and tirecombination and tire manufacturer.

WARNINGNever operate the tractor with a loose wheel rimor disc. Always tighten hardware to the specifiedtorque and at the recommended intervals.Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with careand ensure, when stored, that they cannot falland cause injury.

Spacing dimensions indicate the distance betweenthe center point of the tire tread.

Tractors can be equipped with two wheel drive (2WD) or four wheel drive (FWD). (Note: 2WD notavailable on the model 2210 tractor) Refer to theappropriate heading for adjustment information.

WARNINGYour tractor is produced with lights that meetlighting regulations when operating or travelingon the public highway. If the wheel track settingis adjusted beyond the initial factory position,then youmay be required to reposition the lightsor fit auxiliary lighting to comply with legalrequirements. Additionally, before traveling onthe highway, ensure that the overall tractor widthdoes not exceed the maximum permitted in yourlocality.


2-113

2WD FRONT AXLE TRACK SPACING

2WD FRONT WHEEL TRACK SPACINGThe front axle consists of a hollow center beam witha telescopic section on each end.

The track spacing is adjustable in 102 mm (4″)increments to six positions. See Figure 163.

NOTE: Both telescopic sections of the axle must beextended so the same number of adjustment holesare showing.

Track adjustment can also be adjusted by installingthe front wheels with the offset disc facing in, 1, orout, 2.

NOTE: 16.5L - 16.1 tires and wheels must beinstalled with the offset facing out.

169

POSSIBLE TRACK ADJUSTMENTS

AXLEPOSITION

1 2 3 4 5 6

RIM DISC In Out In Out In Out In Out In Out In OutPOSITION mm

(in)mm(in)

mm(in)

mm(in)

mm(in)

mm(in)

Tire Size

11.00 - 16.0 1550(61″)

1753(69″)

1651(65″)

1854(73″)

1753(69″

1956(77″)

1854(73″)

2057(81″)

1956(77″)

2159(85″)

2057(81″)

2261(89″)

16.5L - 16.1 N/A 1727(68″)

N/A 1829(72″)

N/A 1930(76″)

N/A 2032(80″)

N/A 2134(84″)

N/A 2235(88″)

14L - 16.1 1575(62″)

1702(67″)

1676(66″)

1803(71″)

1778(70″)

1905(75″)

1880(74″)

2007(79″)

1981(78″)

2108(83″)

2083(82″)

2210(87″)

N/A = Not available


2-114

2WD AXLE ADJUSTMENTUse the following procedure to adjust the front axle:

1. Position the front wheels straight ahead.

2. Apply the park brake andplace blocks at the frontand rear of the rear wheels.

3. Jack up the front axle and place jack standsunder the center section of the axle.

4. Remove the axle extension bolts, 1, from bothaxle extensions.

5. Remove the tie rod clamp bolts, 2, and clamps,3, from both of the tie rods.

6. Slide the axle extensions to the desired position.

NOTE: Both axle extensions must be extended sothe same number of holes are exposed on eachextension.

7. Install the axle extension bolts, 1, and torque to576 N·m (425 ft.-lbs.).

8. Position each tie rod end, 4, so the same numberof holes are exposed as are exposed in the axleextension.

9. Install the tie rod clamps, bolts and nuts. Torquethe nuts to 68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.).

10. Check and, if required, adjust toe-in.

170

FRONT WHEEL POSITION (2WD)Use the following procedure to change trackadjustment by reversing the front wheel offset, 1.


2. Apply the park brake and block both the front andrear of the rear wheels.

3. Jack up the front axle and place on jack stands.

4. Remove the wheels.

5. Reverse the wheel offset and reinstall.

6. Torque the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern to atorque of 204 N·m (150 ft.-lbs.).

NOTE: Torque wheel bolts as specified. Operate for200 m (200 yards) and retorque. Repeat torquecheck after one hour, then at 10 hours or dailyintervals until bolt torque remains constant. Checktorque at 50-hour intervals thereafter.

171


2-115

2WD FRONT WHEEL TOE-INThe correct toe-in is 6 - 13 mm (1/4″ - 1/2″).

Use the following procedure to check toe-in:

1. Raise the front axle so that both wheels are offthegroundand the steering is free to turn througha full right and left turn. Support the axle with jackstands and block both the front and back of therear wheels.

2. Place a mark on the inside front of the front rimswhere the tire and rim meet. Place the marks athub height.

3. Measure the distance, 1, between the marks.

4. Rotate both front tires 180 degrees so the marksare at the rear.

5. Measure the distance, 2, between the marks.

6. Subtract the front measurement, 1, from the rearmeasurement, 2.

7. If the toe-in is 6 mm - 13 mm (1/4″ - 1/2″) and theright tire does not contact the end of the cylinderrod in a full right-hand turn, the toe-in is correctand no adjustment is needed.

NOTE: If toe-in is not as specified, proceed to step 8.

172

Use the following procedure to adjust toe-in:

NOTE: Before adjusting the toe-in, measure thedistance, 1, between the inner, 2, and outer, 4, tie rodends on both tie rods. Adjust the tie rods to achieveequal measurements before proceeding. This willensure that both tires track evenly.

8. Loosen jam nut, 3, on each tie rod.

9. Remove the outer tie rod ends, 4, from eachspindle, 5.

10. Adjust each tie rod equally to achieve 6 mm - 13mm (1/4″ - 1/2″) total toe-in.

11. Install each outer tie rod end, 4, and torque theretaining nut, 6, to 136 N·m (100 ft.-lbs.). Installa new cotter pin on each tie rod end.

12. Tighten the jam nut, 3, on each tie rod.

13. Check toe-in measurement.

14. Perform a full right-hand turn and check that thetire does not contact the steering cylinder rod.

WARNINGOwners should ensure that all steering compo-nents are maintained in a reliable and satisfacto-ry condition toensure safeoperationandcomplywith legal requirements.

173


2-116

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FRONT AXLE TRACK SPACING

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TRACKADJUSTMENTFour wheel drive (FWD) tractors have fixed axleassemblies.However, the trackwidth is adjustable toeight different settings by changing the wheel rimrelative to the center disc, the rim and/or disc relativeto the axle hub or by interchanging both front wheels.

Figure 170 shows the track spacings available bychanging the wheel rim and disc positions relative tothe hub.

Each drawing represents either a left-hand wheelviewed from the rear or a right-hand wheel viewedfrom the front.

IMPORTANT: When the track adjustment ischanged, the steering stops must be adjusted tomaintain turning diameter and to provide clearancebetween the tractor and the tires and, when installed,fenders.

Track Setting Disc/Rim Position

1525 mm(60″)

1625 mm(64″)

1727 mm(68″)

1829 mm(72″)

1930 mm(76″)

2032 mm(80″)

2134 mm(84″)

2235 mm(88″)

174


2-117

FRONT WHEEL POSITIONSUse the following procedure to position the frontwheels to obtain the desired track adjustment:


2. Apply the park brake andplace blocks at the frontand rear of the rear wheels.

3. Jack up the front axle and place on jack stands.

WARNINGWith a front wheel on a four wheel drive tractorsupported on a stand, never attempt to rotate thewheelor start theengine. Thismaycause the rearwheels to move, resulting in the tractor fallingfrom the stand. Wheels should always besupported such that the tires are only just clearof the ground.

4. Remove the front wheel.

5. Position the wheel disc and rim as required toachieve the desired track adjustment.

6. Reinstall the wheel and torque the hardware in adiagonal pattern to the following:

Disc to hub, 1. -- 700 N·m (515 ft.-lbs.)Disc to rim, 2. -- 345 N·m (255 ft.-lbs.)

NOTE: Torque all rim, disk and wheel bolts asspecified. Operate for 200 m (200 yards) andretorque. Repeat torque check after one hour, thenat 10 hours or daily intervals until bolt torque remainsconstant. Check torque at 50-hour intervalsthereafter.

NOTE: When interchanging left- and right-handwheel assemblies, ensure the “V” of the tire treadremains pointing in the direction of forward travel.

7. Check the front wheel toe-in and steering stopsfor correct adjustment.

NOTE: During a full turn, check for possibleinterference between the UltraSteer front tires andthe tie-down brackets shown on page 1-28.

175


2-118

WHEEL TOE-IN (FWD)

Checking Toe-in On Standard andUltraSteer AxlesUse the following procedure to check and adjusttoe-in:

The correct toe-in is 0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).


2. Mark the inside front of each rim at hub height.Mark the rim where the tire and rim meet.

3. Measure thedistance, 1, between the twomarks.

4. Drive the tractor forward until the tires rotate 180degrees and the marks are at hub height at therear of the wheels.

5. Measure thedistance, 2, between the twomarks.

6. Subtract the front measurement from the rearmeasurement to get the toe-in.

7. The toe-in should be 0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

If adjustment is required, proceed to the procedurefor the style FWD axle installed.

176

Adjusting Toe-in - Standard steer FWDTo adjust the toe-in:

1. Loosen the jam nuts, 1, on each side of the tierod.

2. Turn the tie rod tube, 2, to adjust the toe-in to0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

3. Tighten the jam nuts, 1, on each side of the tierod.

4. Check the adjustment of the steering stops. 1 12

177


2-119

Adjusting Toe-in - UltraSteer FWD AxleTo adjust the toe-in:

1. Park the tractor on level ground with front axlesteering straight ahead.

NOTE: Check that the center of the axle is alignedwith the center of the tractor before adjusting toe-in.Turn angle will be affected if the axle is not centered.

NOTE: Before adjusting toe-in, measure thedistance, 1, between the outer, 2, and inner, 5, tie rodends on both tie rods. Adjust the tie rods to achieveequal measurements before proceeding.

2. Loosen the two jam nuts, 3, on each tie rod.

3. Turn each tie rod tube, 4, evenly to adjust thetoe-in to 0 mm - 6 mm (0″ - 1/4″).

4. Tighten the two jam nuts, 3, on each tie rod.

5. Check the adjustment of the steering stops.

NOTE: Inspect the inner, 5, and outer, 2, tie rod endsto make sure they are tight. If the tie rods appearloose, contact your authorized dealer for assistance.

1

23 4

53

178


2-120

FWD STEERING STOPSA steering stop is incorporated at each end of theaxle. The stops are adjustable and must be set toprovide a minimum clearance of 38 mm (1-1/2″)between the tires or, if installed, fenders, andanypartof the tractor with the wheels turned full left and rightwith the axle fully oscillated.

NOTE: If your tractor is equipped with optional frontfenders, ensure there is adequate clearance underall operating conditions. Adjust the steering stops, asnecessary. Fenders will have to be removed for1524 mm (60″ ) track spacing.

Adjust the steering stops at both ends of the axle tothe same turn angle.

To adjust the steering stop loosen jam nut, 1. Use awrench on the end of the threaded stop at, 2, andthread the stop in or out so it will contact the fixed axlestop, 3, when there is at least 38 mm (1-1/2”)clearence between the tire and tractor as previouslydescribed. Lock the jam nut, 1, to maintain theadjustment.

Adjust the steering stop on the opposite side to thesame turn angle. Check that both stops are adjustedto provide the specified clearence.

WARNINGMaintain all steering components in a reliableand satisfactory condition to ensure safeoperation and comply with legal requirements.

3

12

179


2-121

REAR WHEEL TRACK SPACING

INTRODUCTION

NOTE: Read this section completely beforeadjusting track width.

NOTE: The track width dimensions (width from tirecenter to center) shown may vary from your actualmeasurements depending on specific wheel and tirecombination and tire manufacturer.

WARNINGNever operate the tractor with a loose wheel rim,disc, or hub. Always tighten hardware to thespecified torque and at the recommendedintervals.Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with careandmake sure,when stored, that they cannot falland cause injury.Your tractor is produced with lights that meetlighting regulations when operating or travelingon the public highway. If the wheel track settingis adjusted beyond the initial factory position,youmay be required to reposition the lights or fitauxiliary lighting.To comply with legal requirements. Additionally,before traveling on the highway, make sure thatthe overall tractor width does not exceed themaximum permitted in your locality.

Tractors are factory equipped with either 2438 mm(96″) or optional 2844 mm (112″) rear axles. 3048mm (120″) axles are available on the 2160, 2180,and 2210 tractors.

Two different diameter axle shaft and wheel stylesare used as indicated in the following table:

Model Axle Diameter Style Wheel

2145 92 mm(3-5/8″)

Pressed steel(one piece)

2160/2180/2210

105 mm(4-1/8″)

Cast center(two piece)

Model 2145 tractors are equipped with one piecepressed steel wheels, 1. All other models equippedwith 710/70 tires use pressed steel wheels.

180


2-122

Models 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors are equippedwith steel disc wheels, 2, with a cast center, 1.

Refer to the track spacing chart that corresponds toyour model and tire size.

181

REAR WHEEL TRACK SPACINGFigure 178 and Figure 179

The rear wheel track spacings are shown in thefollowing charts. Each drawing represents either aleft-hand wheel viewed from the rear or a right-handwheel viewed from the front.

At each disc to rim position, a range of track settingsare available bymoving thewheel assembly in or outon the axle shaft.

Spacing dimensions indicate the distance betweenthe center points of the tire tread.


2-123

MODEL 2145 TRACTORS

Track SettingHub and Wheel Placement

18.4 1524 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm(60″) (73″) (89″)

20.8 1601 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm(63″) (73″) (89″)

420/80 1524 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm(60″) (73″) (89″)

14.9 1524 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm(60″) (73″) (89″)

710/70 1727 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm(68″) (73″) (89″)

30.5 1829 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm(72″) (73″) (89″)

All tires 1880 mm 2134 mm 2540 mm(74″) (84″) (100″)

All tires 2133 mm 2463 mm 2870 mm(84″) (97″) (113″)

All tires 2490 mm 2718 mm 3150 mm(98″) (108″) (124″)

MinimumTrackSettingAll

MaximumTrackSetting96″ Axle(2438 mm)


TireSize

182


2-124

MODELS 2160, 2180, 2210 TRACTORS

Track SettingHub and Wheel Placement

18.4 1524 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm 2464 mm(60″) (73″) (89″) (97″)

20.8 1601 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm 2464 mm(63″) (73″) (89″) (97″)

420/80 1524 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm 2464 mm(60″) (73″) (89″) (97″)

14.9 1524 mm 1854 mm 2260 mm 2464 mm(60″) (73″) (89″) (97″)

*710/70

All tires 1829 mm 2134 mm 2540 mm 2743 mm(72″) (84″) (100″) (108″)



MinimumTrackSettingAll



TireSize


183* Refer to Figure 178 for spacing. This tire is mounted on a pressed steel wheel.


2-125

REAR WHEEL TRACK ADJUSTMENTAdjustmentof trackspacing isachievedbysliding thecompletewheel assembly on the axle shaft and/or bychanging the rim and disc position.

To reposition the wheel on the axle shaft or tocompletely remove thewheel, block the frontwheels,front and rear, jack up the rear of the tractor until bothrearwheels areoff theground.Support the rear of thetractor with blocking or stands. Position wheels withhole in the rim at the top.

Loosen the two center wedge bolts, 1, about 12 mm(1/2″). Remove the four outer wedge bolts, 2.

184

Clean the bolts and threaded holes in the wedgesbefore lubricating and installing the outer wedgebolts at 1, for pushing the wedges. Tighten the outerwedge bolts evenly until the wedges loosen on theaxle shaft. The wheel assembly will now be free toslide in or out on the axle shaft.

IMPORTANT: Do not use a torque greater than 407N·m (300 ft.-lbs.) on the pusher bolts. The use ofpenetrating oil between thewedge and axle shaft willbe of benefit. If difficulty is experienced, place a shaftprotector over the endof theaxle shaft and strikewitha hammer to “shock” the wedge free.

WARNINGTake suitable precautions, including the use ofsafety glasses, against the possibility of flyingmetal particles.

185


2-126

An optional wheel adjustment tool, P/N 9824982, isavailable to move the loosened wheel in or out asrequired. To use the tool, slide the stepped end, 1,into the notch, 2, between the wedges. Attach theblock, 3, to the axle with one of the removed wedgebolts, 4. Turn the adjusting bolt, 5, in or out to movethe wheel assembly.

NOTE: The tool is available through your authorizeddealer.

Set the wheel to the desired position on the shaft.Remove the pusher bolts and replace them in theouter holes, 2, Figure 180.

Tighten the sixwedge retaining bolts in increments of68N·m (50 ft.-lbs.) until a final torqueof 391N·m (290ft.-lbs.) is achieved.

IMPORTANT: The wedges must be pulled tightevenly.

Repeat the procedure on the other wheel, makingsure that both rear wheels are the same distancefrom the ends of the axle shafts.

NOTE: Check the torque of all six wedge retainingbolts on each wheel after driving the tractor for 200m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours operationand thereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

186

ADJUSTING REAR WHEELS

WARNINGTractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with careandmake sure,when stored, that they cannot falland cause injury.

NOTE:When changing from one track width settingto another, it may be necessary to interchange theleft- and right-hand wheel assemblies. If so, be surethat the “V” of the tire tread remains pointing in thedirection of forward travel.

Rear wheel track adjustment is effected by changingthe position of the disc, and/or wheel rim, relative tothe rear axle as shown in Figures 178 and 179.

In each position, a range of track settings may beachieved by moving the wheel assemblies in or outon the axle shafts.

To change wheel position, follow all steps outlined in“Rear Wheel Track Adjustment.”


2-127

Adjusting Pressed Steel WheelAfter the rear axle is jacked up and blocked, removethe disc to hub bolts, 1. Using a suitable lifting device,remove thewheel and store thewheel and tire whereit won’t fall over. Repeat the procedure on theopposite wheel and install where the first wheel wasremoved.

Torque the disc to hub bolts to 800 N·m (590 ft.-lbs.)in 68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.) increments using a diagonalpattern.

NOTE: Check bolt torque after driving the tractor for200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours ofoperation and thereafter at the 50-hour serviceintervals.

187

Adjusting Cast Center WheelAfter the rear axle is jacked up and blocked, removethe disc to rim attaching hardware, 1. Remove thewheel using a suitable lifting device and store whereit won’t fall. Repeat this procedure on the oppositerim and install on the first disc. If the discs, 2, are tobe switched, remove wheel weights first, thenposition discs as required.

Reinstall the rimandweights and tighten all bolts andnuts.

Repeat the procedure on the other wheel.

Tighten the rim to disc retaining nuts uniformly in analternate pattern, 68 N·m (50 ft.-lbs.) at a time, untila torque of 596 N·m (440 ft.-lbs.) for Grade 8 bolts isobtained, is obtained.

NOTE: Check hardware torque after driving thetractor for 200 m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10hours operation and thereafter at the 50-hour serviceintervals.

WARNINGNever operate the tractor with a loose wheel orrim. Always tighten the bolts to the specifiedtorque and check them frequently.

188


2-128

DUAL REAR WHEELS

WARNINGTractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with careandmake sure,when stored, that they cannot falland cause injury.

NOTE: Dual rear wheels may only be installed ontractors with 2845mm (112″) or 3048mm (120″) rearaxles.

The outer wheel track spacing can be adjusted to amaximum of 3251 mm (128″) and the inner wheel toaminimumof 1524mm (60″). Position the wheels onthe axle to achieve the desired track spacing. See“Outer Wheels” and “Inner Wheels” in this section.

Dual rear wheels may be installed on tractorsequipped with the 2845 mm (112″) or 3048 mm(120″) axle.

Figure 185 shows dual wheel configuration for theModel 2145 tractor and models 2180 and 2210tractors with 710/70 duals.

Figure 186 shows dual wheel configuration forModels 2160, 2180, and 2210 tractors.

1891. Wheel disc2. Hub3. Wedges4. Six wedge to hub bolt position (option 1)5. Four wedge to hub bolt position (option 2)

Outer WheelsThe outer wheels, 1, are pressed steel wheels. Theyare bolted to extension hubs, 2, that are clamped tothe axle shafts using wedges, 3, in the samemanneras Model 2145 pressed steel single wheels.

The hub to wedge attaching hardware can beinstalled in either of two positions to make removaleasier depending on wheel spacing.

Option 1Install six 76 mm (3″) long wedge to hub bolts fromthe wedge side as shown in 4, Figures 185 and 186.Torque bolts to 391 N·m (290 ft.-lbs.).

Option 2Install four 178mm (7″) longwedge to hub bolts fromthe hub side as shown in 5, Figures 185 and 186.Torque bolts to 391 N·m (290 ft.-lbs.).

IMPORTANT: These 178 mm (7″) long bolts areincluded in the optional dual wheel kit availablethrough your authorized dealer. Do not use thestandard (shorter) wedge bolts.

190


2-129

A minimum clearance of 102 mm (4″) must bemaintained between the sidewall of the tiresmeasured at the closest point, 1. The tractor shouldbe properly ballasted and the implement attached toaccurately measure the tire clearance.

191

Wheel Removal/InstallationTo remove the outer wheel, proceed as follows:

• Block the front wheels, front and rear, then jackup and support the rear axle.

WARNINGBefore removing a wheel, make sure it issecurely supported.

• Remove the ten wheel disc to hub bolts from thewheel and lower the wheel to the ground using asuitable lifting device.Repeat on theotherwheel.

When reinstalling the outerwheels, torque the disc tohub bolts in an alternate pattern to 800 N·m (590ft.-lbs.).

Inner WheelsThe manual adjust inner wheels can be adjusted inthe same way as manual adjust single wheels.However, due to interference between inner andouter tires or between the inner tires and the fenders,limited track settings may be achieved.

To adjust the inner wheels, first remove the outerwheels as described under “Outer Wheels.”

Follow the instructions under “Rear Wheels TrackAdjustment” in order to adjust the track width of theinner wheels.

NOTE: Check wheel hardware torque after drivingthe tractor for 200m (200 yards), after 1 hour, and 10hours of operation and thereafter at the 50-hourservice interval.


2-130

BALLASTING AND TIRES

192

1. Front weight2. Rear weight

BALLASTINGMaximum tractor performance is dependent uponproper ballasting and tire selection. Maximumefficiency will be achieved when tractor weight iscorrect for the application.

Selecting the proper size and type of front and reartires is also important in achieving maximum tractorefficiency. Various sizes and types of tires areavailable for your tractor. Your authorized dealer canassist you with this subject.

The tires selected for your tractor must be able tosupport the weight of the tractor and equipment. Thetires must also be able to provide adequate tractionto utilize the tractor horsepower and turn it into usefuldrawbar horsepower.

If your tractor has radial tires, you will find that theyproduce superior performance over similar bias plytires. You will have to adjust the ballast, tire pressureand tractor weight split between the front and rearaxles for various loads and conditions to achieve thebest ride and performance.


2-131

Always maintain the proper air pressure in the tire tocarry the load. Do not over inflate radial or bias plytires. Radial tires will work with LOWER airpressures. Radial tires will show up to 20% sidewalldeflection or BULGE when properly inflated.

The force that enables the tires to drive the tractormust be transmitted through the tire sidewalls. Thetires work best when all the tires on a given axle areworking at the same rate. Think of them like a shockabsorber; they must respond the same way to sharethe load equally.

Factors Determining Best Tire Performance

Good Performance

Proper air pressure for the load

Proper sidewall deflection

8-15% wheel slip

Proper tire size for expected load

Less than 50% fill of liquid ballast

Maintaining equal tire pressure in all tireson a given axle

Poor Performance

High or low air pressure

Stiff sidewalls

High or low wheel slip

Overloaded or underloaded tire

Excessive liquid calcium in a tire

Treating tires on an axle differently


2-132

SELECTING BALLASTWhen tractor horsepower loads vary, the optimumweight of the tractor will change. This means thatballastmay have to be added or removed tomaintainthe best tractor performance. Proper ballast willgreatly improve tractor operation and ride.

NOTE:Using theseprocedureswill result in radial plytires and bias-ply tires having different ballast. Radialtires require less overall weight to achieve the sametractive effort as bias tires. Proper ballasting of radialtires is commonly achieved with cast iron weightsalone. While bias tires commonly require both castiron weights and liquid ballast in the tires.

Always treat all the tires on a tractor axle equallywhen selecting ballast and tire pressure.

The amount of ballast required is affected by:

• Shipping weight of tractor• Soil and traction conditions• Type of implement: fully/semi-mounted or trailed

type• Working speed• Tractor horsepower load• Tires - type, size and number of tires• Tire pressure

ADAPTING BALLAST TO WORK LOADAND GROUND SPEEDDo not usemore ballast than needed. Excess ballastshould be removed when it is not required.

Do not add excessive weight to the tractor to pullheavy loads. Reduce the load because pulling alighter load at a higher ground speed ismore efficientand easier on the tractor.

The recommendations in this manual are based ona 8-10 kph (5-6 MPH) ground speed. If the tractor isoperated below 8 kph (5 MPH), additional ballast isrequired to maintain proper traction. This will causeexcessive strain on the tractor drive line compo-nents.

NOTE: Heavy draft loads should not be continuallypulled in a gear that results in laboring the engine atground speeds below 8 kph (5 MPH). Reduce theload as required to achieve recommended groundspeeds.

Too Little Ballast

Rough ride

Excessive wheel slip

Power loss

Tire wear

Excess fuel consumption

Lower productivity

Too Much Ballast

Higher maintenance costs

Increased driveline wear

Power loss

Increased soil compaction

Reduced fuel economy

Reduced productivity


2-133

CHECKING WHEEL SLIPPAGEA good way to monitor ballasting requirements is tocheck the drive wheel slippage. Slippage should be8-15% in normal field conditions.

If the drive wheels slip excessively, more weightmaybe required.However, remember thatexcessive loadand/or poor traction conditions will also causeexcessive wheel slip.

Wheel slippage will vary as field conditions change,so always check slippage several times and averagethe results. Remove weight if slippage is less than8%.

Wheel slippage is measured automatically by theoptional radar in the Tractor Performance Monitor.

Wheel slippage can also be measured manually asdescribed below.

1. Mark a tire with a large white mark.

2. With the tractor fully loaded,mark a starting pointon the ground.

3. Keep tractor loaded and mark the ground againwhen tire completes 10 full revolutions.

4. Drive back over the course again at workingspeed, with implement raised. Count tirerevolutions between the same two marks.

5. Use second count of tire revolutions and thewheel slippage chart to determine percentage ofslippage.

NOTE:A rate of 10-15 percent for two-wheel-drive or8-12 percent for FWD equipped tractors is ideal.

6. Adjust ballast or load to give correct slippage.

NOTE: Available drawbar horsepower is reducedwhen wheel slip drops below 8 percent becauseenergy is wasted carrying excess weight on thetractor.

Wheel Slippage Chart

Wheel RevolutionsCounted in Step 4

% Slip Result

10 0 RemoveB ll t

9-1/2 5Ballast

9 10 ProperB ll t

8-1/2 15Ballast

8 20 AddB ll t

7-1/2 25Ballast

7 30

BALLAST LIMITATIONS

IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the tractor grossvehicle weight shown below. This can cause anoverload condition that may void the warranty andmay exceed the load rating of the tires and ROPSstructure.

Ballast should be limited by the tire capacity or tractorcapacity. Each tire has a recommended carryingcapacity which should not be exceeded. If a greateramount of weight is needed for traction, either alarger single tire or duals should be used.

Ballast can be added by bolting on cast iron weight,or by adding liquid calcium chloride in the tires.Bolt-on cast iron weight is recommended because itcan easily be removed when not needed.

IMPORTANT: The maximum recommended grossvehicle weight (gvw) is:

2145: 9875 kg (21,750 lbs)2160: 14300 kg (31,500 lbs)2180: 14300 kg (31,500 lbs)2210: 14300 kg (31,500 lbs)


2-134

ESTIMATING BALLAST REQUIREMENTSIt is possible to estimate the tractor’s operatingweight and to calculate the amount of front and rearballast required. These calculations are generalstarting points. Contact your authorized dealer orlocal tire distributor for more information.

POINTS TO REMEMBERTwo-wheel drive and FWD equipped tractors shouldbe operated in a weight range of 54 kg to 64 kg (120to 140 lbs) per PTO horsepower in order to efficientlydevelop drawbar horsepower.

Two-wheel drive tractors should be ballasted toachieve 70% rear and 30% front weight distribution.

Tractors with FWD should be ballasted to achieve60% rear and 40% front weight distribution withtowed high draft implements and three-point hitchmounted implement.

CAUTIONSee page 2-130 for information about properballasting for front end stabilization.

Typical Shipping Weights of Genesis Tractors Without Cast BallastTotal weight Rear Front

2180 w/FWD 8250 kg (18,150) 5478 kg (12,050) 2772 kg (6,100)14.9R30/14.9R46Single tire

2180 UltraSteer FWD 8682 kg (19,100) 5788 kg (12,734) 2894 kg (6,366)16.9R30/20.8R42Single tire

2180 w/2WD 7590 kg (16,700) 5364 kg (11,800) 2227 kg (4,900)14.L-16.1/14.9R46Single tire

NOTE: These calculations include the weight of a full fuel tank, approximately 318 kg (700 lbs).

EXAMPLE 12180 w/UltraSteer FWD, 180 PTO HP - Desired 60%/40% weight split

Total Rear 60% Front 40%180 PTO HP x

59 kg (130 lbs) per HP = 10636 kg (23400) 6381 kg (14040) 4254 kg (9360)

Shipping weight in kg (lbs) -8682 kg (19100) -5788 kg (12734) -2894 kg (6366)

Weight to be added in kg (lbs) 1954 kg (4300) 593 kg (1306) 1361 kg (2994)

The rear weight needed can be accomplished by adding a set of duals and hubs which weigh approximately909 kg (2000 lbs) or by adding sixteen 39 kg (85 lbs) weights to the rear wheels.

The front weight can be added by using 12 of the 110 kg (242 lbs) front cast iron weights.


2-135

EXAMPLE 2

2180 w/2WD, 180 PTO HP and a desired 70%/30% weight split

Total Rear 70% Front 30%180 PTO HP x

59 kg (130 lbs) per HP = 10636 kg (23400) 7445 kg (16380) 3191 kg (7020)

Typical shipping weight in kg (lbs) - 7691 kg (16700) -5364 kg (11800) -2227 kg (4900)

Ballast to be added in kg (lbs) 3045 kg (6700) 2082 kg (4580) 964 kg (2120)

Rear ballast can be added in the following manner:Duals 908 kg (2000 lbs)20 max rear wheel weights 927 kg (2040 lbs)Calcium chloride 245 kg (540 lbs)TOTAL 2082 kg (4580 lbs)

Front ballast can be added in the following manner:22 small front weights + bracket 1090 kg (2400 lbs)

NOTE: For themost accurate results when ballasting a tractor, use the actual weights of the front and rear axlesof the tractor to be ballast. This will require weighing the individual axles on a truck scale. These examples areprovided to explain how to estimate the amount of ballast required. The specifications provided here are basedupon current available information and are subject to change.

Use these examples to estimate your tractor’s ballast requirements.

REMEMBER THAT YOU CAN INCREASE OR DECREASE THE POUNDS PER PTO HORSEPOWER NUM-BER ( RANGE IS 54-64 kg (120-140 lbs) ) DEPENDING UPON YOUR ANTICIPATED LOAD.


2-136

IMPORTANT: To extend tractor life and avoidexcessive soil compaction and rolling resistance, donot over ballast. Ballast should never exceed theweight needed to provide traction for sustained fullpower loads.

TIRES AND BALLASTINGThe tire chart in Section 5 shows the load carryingcapacity per tire.

IMPORTANT: Do not overload tires. If maximumtractor weight exceeds the load rating of the tire aslisted in the tire chart, reduce load, install higher ratedply tires, or reduce road speed.

Calculating Tire and Axle LoadsNOTE: Include the weight of fully raised three-pointhitch implements when calculating rear axle loadwhen operating at road speeds for an extendedperiod. An example is:

Model 2180 with UltraSteer with rear axle weightswith duals = 7470 kg (16434 lbs)

3-point hitch load fully raised = 2727 kg (6000 lbs)

Total rear axle loadwithout additional ballast = 10197kg (22434 lbs)

Estimated additional ballast 439 kg (966 lbs)

Total rear axle load supported by 4 tires = 10636 kg(23400 lbs)

Divided by 4

Load supported by each tire with 3-point hitch fullyraised = 2659 kg (5850 lbs)

NOTE: An 18.4R46 tire would require 1.6 bar (24PSI) inflation pressure to carry this weight duringextendedhighspeed roaduse.See tire inflation tablein Section 5. If the three-point hitch load was notpresent, or if three-point load is on the ground, theload per tire would be 1973 kg (4350 lbs). The tirepressure should then be reduced to maintain theproper tire side wall deflection for best traction.

REAR TIRE WEIGHTING

NOTE: Install cast iron weight first. Use liquid ballastonly as required.

CAUTIONInstalling liquid ballast requires special equip-ment and training. Have liquid ballast added byyour authorized dealer or a tire store.

IMPORTANT: With radial tires NEVER fill a tire tomore than 40-50 percent. More liquid ballast solutionwill leave too little air space to absorb shocks.Damage to the tire could occur. This occurs due tothe lower inflation pressures that are usedwith radialtires. Bias ply tires can be filled to 75 percent.

A solution of water and calcium chloride providessafe, economical ballast. Used properly, it will notdamage tires, tubes, or rims.

NOTE: Use of alcohol as liquid ballast is notrecommended. Calcium chloride solution is heavierand more economical.

Radial-ply and bias-ply tires should be handleddifferently. The following chart shows how muchballast each size and type of tire will hold.

Tire Size WaterLiters (Gal)

CaCl2Kg (Lbs)

Total Wt.Kg (Lbs)

18.4-38 337 (89) 202 (445) 539 (1187)

20.8-38 431 (114) 259 (570) 690 (1521)

18.4-42 352 (93) 211 (465) 563 (1240)

20.8-42 454 (120) 272 (600) 726 (1600)

14.9-46 246 (65) 147 (325) 393 (867)

18.4-46 397 (105) 238 (525) 635 (1400)

710/70R38 647 (171) 388 (855) 1041(2295)

ATTENTION: Maximum recommended vehicleweight can be exceeded when tires are filled to 75%fill. See Ballast limitations.

The aboveweights are based on 75% fill. Radial tiresshould only be a 40-50% fill. Calculate weight asrequired.

Some sloshing of the liquid ballast may be noticedwhen the tractor is first stopped. This is normal.


2-137

REAR WHEEL CAST IRON WEIGHTSCast iron weights, 1, are available in two sizes, 39 kg(85 lbs.) and 204 kg (450 lb.). These weights may beinstalled on the inside or outside of the rear wheels.

IMPORTANT: The 2145 39 kg (85-lb.) weight isdifferent than the 39 kg (85-lb.) weight used on theother models and cannot be interchanged with theweight for the cast center wheels.

The following table lists the maximum number andlocation of rear wheel weights:

REAR WHEEL WEIGHTS

Model 39 kg (85 lbs)Weight

240 kg (450 lbs)Weight

Inside ofWheel

Outsideof Wheel

Inside ofWheel

Outsideof Wheel

2145 2 3 N/A N/A

216021802210

5 5 1 1

NOTE: This table lists the maximum number ofweights that are recommended for the tractors.

193

INSTALLING CAST IRON REAR WHEELWEIGHTS

CAUTIONWheel weights are heavy. Use appropriate liftingequipment or have the job done by yourauthorized dealer.

To install weights, 1, on the inside of a wheel, thewheel must be removed. See “Rear Wheel TrackAdjustment” section for wheel removal information.

Attach the first weight to the wheel disc and tightenthe attaching bolts to 224 N·m (165 ft.-lbs.).

NOTE: Check the torque of all attaching bolts oneach wheel after driving the tractor for 200 m (200yards), after 1 hour, and 10 hours operation andthereafter at the 50-hour service intervals.

Install additional weights by installing bolts throughthepreviousweight.Rotate alternateweights to alignbolts with holes in the weights.

Tighten attaching bolts securely to 224 N·m (165ft.-lbs.). Retighten every two hours of service untilbolt torque stabilizes. Check tightness every 300hours thereafter.

Check to make sure the weights are centered.Excessive runout can cause an unbalancedcondition when operating at high speed.

194


2-138

BALLASTING FRONT END FORTRANSPORT

CAUTIONAdditional front ballast may be needed whentransporting large 3-point hitch mounted equip-ment.Alwaysdrive slowlyover rough terrain, nomatterhow much front ballast is used.

Add front end ballast when it is needed for stabilityand steering control. Never allow the tractor tooperate with the front wheels off the ground.

Tractor front end ballast may not always maintainsatisfactory stability if the tractor is operated at highspeed on rough or hilly terrain. Reduce speed andexercise caution under these conditions.

BALLASTING TWO-WHEEL DRIVETRACTORSThe best tractor weight split is 30% on the front axleand 70%on the rear axle to achieve 10%-15%wheelslip.

Two types of front end cast ironweights are availableto ballast the front of the tractor.

195

BALLASTING FOUR WHEEL DRIVETRACTORSIdeal tire slippage for FWD tractors is 8-12%. Toreduce tire slippage to this level, more weight isneeded on the front than two-wheel drive tractors.The best weight split is 40% front, 60% rear, of totaltractor weight. Ballast may be needed in the fronttires to obtain this weight split.

196


2-139

DETERMINING MAXIMUM FRONTBALLAST

IMPORTANT: Do not overload front tires. Ifmaximum weight shown in the tire chart is belowballasted weight, reduce ballast or install heaviertires.

Use adequate front weight as required for theoperating condition. Two-wheel drive tractors shouldhave only enough ballast to maintain safe steeringcontrol and keep the wheels on the ground. FWDtractors should have adequate ballast to properlyload front wheels - this is especially important whenpulling heavy loads. Remove ballast when it is nolonger needed.

The tire inflation chart in Section 5 shows the loadcarrying capacity for the front tires.

FRONT WEIGHTS - CAST IRONTwo different front weights are available as follows:

40 kg (88 lbs), Figure 193, 1.110 kg (242 lbs), Figure 194, 1.

Weights are available from your authorized dealer.The following table lists themaximum recommendedfront weights by model number:

Model Maximum40 kg (88 lbs)

Weights

Maximum110 kg (242 lbs)

Weight

2145 22= 878 kg(1936 lbs)

N/A

2160 22= 878 kg(1936 lbs)

N/A

2180 22= 878 kg(1936 lbs)

16=1756 kg(3872 lbs)

2210 22= 878 kg(1936 lbs)

16=1756 kg(3872 lbs)

70-360-122

197

70-360-122

198


2-140

INSTALLING FRONT WEIGHTS

CAUTIONOptional front weights are heavy. Use appropri-ate liftingequipmentorhave the jobdonebyyourauthorized dealer.

Install the front weights on the weight bucket using asuitable lifting device.

To add or remove individual weights, remove the fourtie bolts, 1, and loosen the attaching bolts, 2. Add orremove individual weights as required, then reinstallbolts. Torque attaching bolts, 2, to 231 N·m (170ft.-lbs.) and tie bolts, 1, to 189 N·m (140 ft.-lbs.).

The completeweight assembly canbe removedafterboth attaching bolts, 2, are removed. Use a suitablelifting device to remove the weights.

When theweight assembly is reinstalled, be sure thecenter weights are seated on the weight bracketalignment tab. Install attaching bolts, 2, and torque to81 N·m (60 ft.-lbs.).

IMPORTANT: Retorque attaching hardware after 1hour of use, then at 8 hours of use, thereafter at50-hour service intervals.

WARNINGThe tractormust not be operated unless both thetie bolts and attaching bolts are in position withthebolts tightenedasspecified.Recheck thebolttorques after one, eight and 50 hours ofoperation if thebolts havebeendisturbed for anyreason.

199


2-141

FRONT TIRES - LIQUID WEIGHT

CAUTIONInstalling liquid weight requires special equip-ment and training. Contact your authorizeddealer.

IMPORTANT:With radial tires NEVER fill any tire upto more than 40-50 percent. More liquid ballastsolution will leave too little air space to absorbshocks. Damage to the tire could occur. This occursdue to the lower inflationpressures that are usedwithradial tires. Bias ply tires can be filled to 75 percent.

A solution of water and calcium chloride provideseconomical ballast and, if used properly, it will notdamage tires, tubes, or rims.

The use of alcohol as liquid ballast is notrecommended.

Tire Size WaterLiters (Gal)

CaCl2Kg (Lbs)

Total Wt.Kg (Lbs)

11.00-16 77 (20) 42 (93) 121 (267)

14L-16.1 88 (23) 50 (110) 139 (307)

16.5L-16.1 127 (33) 76 (167) 200 (440)

16.9-26 197 (52) 118 (260) 315 (694)

18.4-26 242 (64) 145 (320) 387 (854)

14.9-R28 63 (43) 98 (215) 261 (574)

16.9-R28 212 (56) 127 (280) 339 (747)

14.9-R30 174 (46) 104 (230) 278 (614)

16.9-R30 223 (59) 132 (292) 355 (787)

480/70-30 227 (60) 136 (300) 363 (800)

18.4-30 273 (72) 163 (360) 436 (960)

The aboveweights are based on 75% fill. Radial tiresshould only be a 40-50% fill. Calculate weight asrequired.


2-142

TIRESCheck the air pressure in the tires and recheck every50 hours or weekly.

When checking tire pressures, inspect for damagedtread and side walls.

Inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that atire may carry. Locate the tire size for your tractor inthe Tire Pressure and Load tables in Section 5 of thismanual. Do not exceed the load for the pressureslisted. Do not over or underinflate the tires.

WARNINGInflating or servicing tires can be dangerous.Whenever possible, trained personnel should becalled in to service or install tires. In any event, toavoid the possibility of serious or fatal injury,follow the safety precautions below:• Tractor wheels are very heavy. Handle with

care and ensure, when stored, that theycannot topple and cause injury.

• Never attempt tire repairs on a public road orhighway.

• Ensure the jack is placed on a firm, levelsurface.

• Ensure the jack has adequate capacity to liftyour tractor.

• Use jack stands or other suitable blocking tosupport the tractor while repairing tires.

• Do not put any part of your body under thetractor or start the engine while the tractor ison the jack.

• Never hit a tire or rim with a hammer.• Ensure the rim is clean and free of rust or

damage. Do not weld, braze, otherwise repairor use a damaged rim.

• Donot inflate a tire unless the rim ismountedon the tractor or is secured so that it will notmove if the tire or rim should suddenly fail.

• When fitting a new or repaired tire, use aclip-on valve adaptor with a remote gaugethat allows the operator to stand clear of thetire while inflating it. Use a safety cage, ifavailable.

• Do not inflate a steering tire above themanufacturer’s maximum pressure shownon the tire or beyond the maximum shown inthe “tire pressure and load” table in section5 if the tire is not marked.

• Never inflate a traction tire (front tire on a fourwheel drive tractor or any rear tire) over 2.4bar (35 PSI). if the bead does not seat on therim by the time this pressure is reached,deflate the tire, relubricate the bead with asoap/water solution and reinflate. Do not useoil or grease, inflation beyond 2.4 bar (35 PSI)with unseated beads may break the bead orrim with explosive force sufficient to cause aserious injury.

• After seating the beads, adjust inflationpressure to the recommended operatingpressure.

• Do not reinflate a tire that has been run flat orseriously underinflated until it has beeninspected for damage by a qualified person.

• Torque wheel hardware after driving thetractor for 200m (200 yards), after 1 hour and10 hours operation, and thereafter at the50-hour service intervals.

• Refer to tractor weighting section beforeadding ballast to the tires.

3-1

SECTION 3 - LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE

GENERAL INFORMATION

INTRODUCTIONThis section gives full details of the serviceprocedures necessary to maintain your tractor atpeak efficiency. The lubrication and maintenancechart on page 3-8 provides a ready reference tothese requirements. Each operation is numbered foreasy reference.

In addition to the regular maintenance operationslisted, check the following items every 10 hours ordaily during the first 50 hours of operation:

• Wheel nuts for tightness• Front axle hub oil levels - Four Wheel Drive

(FWD) only

IMPORTANT: Park the tractor on level ground and,where applicable, extend all cylinders beforechecking oil levels.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSRead and observe all safety precautions listed in“Servicing the Tractor” in Safety Precaution -Section 0.

NOTE: Dispose of used filters and fluids properly.

CAUTIONDo not check, lubricate, service or adjust thetractor with the engine running.

PREVENTING SYSTEM CONTAMINATIONTo prevent contamination when changing oils, filters,etc., always clean the area around filler caps, levelplugs, drain plugs, dipsticks and filters prior toremoval. Before connecting remote cylinders,ensure that oil containedwithin them is clean, hasnotdegenerated due to long storage and is of the correctgrade.

To prevent dirt entry during greasing, wipe dirt fromthe grease fittings before greasing. Wipe excessgrease from the fitting after greasing.

FLEXIBLE MAINTENANCE INTERVALSThe intervals listed in the lubrication and mainte-nance chart are guidelines to be used whenoperating in normal working conditions.

Adjust the intervals for environmental and workingconditions. Intervals should be shortened underadverse (wet, muddy, sandy, extremely dusty)working conditions.

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCECHART - PAGES 3-8 AND 3-9The chart lists the intervals when routine checks,lubrication, service and/or adjustments should beperformed. Use the chart as a quick reference guidewhen servicing the tractor. The operations follow thechart.

FIRST 50-HOUR SERVICEAt the first 50-hour service, ensure that the followingadditional service operations are carried out. Theitems are listed in the “First 50-Hour Service”checklist at the rear of this manual.

• Change engine oil and filter• Change fuel filter / water separator• Clean fuel sedimenter• Change hydraulic oil filter• Change transmission oil filter• Check adjustment of front wheel bearings (two

wheel drive only)• Change FWD differential oil• Change FWD axle hub oil• Check and adjust park brake• Check all air intake connections• Tighten all cooling system hose connections.• Check torque of front end weight clamp bolts

(when installed)• Check torque of safety cab mount bolts• Check torque of exhaust manifold bolts

NOTE: Items listed in the first 50-hour check areimportant. If not performed, early component failureand reduced tractor life may result.


3-2

FUELING THE TRACTOR

CAUTIONWhen handling diesel fuel, observe the follow-ing:Do not smoke around diesel fuel. Under nocircumstances should gasoline, alcohol, gaso-hol or dieselhol (a mixture of diesel fuel andalcohol) be added to diesel fuel because ofincreased fire or explosion risks. In a closedcontainer such as a fuel tank they are moreexplosive than pure gasoline. Do not use theseblends. Additionally, dieselhol is not approveddue to possible inadequate lubrication of the fuelinjection system.Use only internally grounded fueling hose fromstorage tank and pump to tractor fuel tank. If indoubt check with your fuel hose supplier. (Anacceptable fuel hose would be one with aninternal wire that can be checked using acontinuity tester.)If the hose is not grounded, a large static electriccharge could occur while refueling and causedamage to the fuel system.Clean the filler cap area and keep it free of debris.Fill the tank at the end of each day to reduceovernight condensation.Never take the cap off or refuel with the enginerunning.When refueling, make sure the nozzle is incontact with the filler neck of the tractor fuel tankbefore fuel starts flowing and during the entiretime fuel is flowing.Keep control of the fuel nozzle while filling thefuel tank.Don’t fill the tank to capacity. Allow room forexpansion. If the original fuel tank cap is lost,replace it with a Buhler Versatile cap and tightensecurely.Wipe up spilled fuel immediately.

FUEL REQUIREMENTSThe quality of fuel used is an important factor fordependable performance and satisfactory enginelife. Fuels must be clean, well-refined, andnoncorrosive to fuel systemparts. Be sure to use fuelof a known quality from a reputable supplier.

Use Number 2-D in temperatures above -7° C (20°F). Use Number 1-D in temperatures below -7° C(20° F).

To obtain optimum combustion andminimum enginewear, the fuel selected for use should conform to theapplication andproperty requirements outlined in thefollowing “Diesel Fuel Selection Chart.”

DIESEL FUEL SELECTION CHART

GeneralFuel

Classification

FinalBoilingPoint(Max)

Cetane(Min.)

SulphurContent(Max)

No. 1-D 288° C(550° F)

40* 0.30%

No. 2-D 357° C(675° F)

40 0.50%

NOTE: When long periods of idling or cold weatherconditions below 0° C (32° F) are encountered orwhen continuously operating at an altitude above1524 m (5,000′), use Number 1-D fuel.

*When continually operating at low temperatures orhigh altitude, a minimum cetane of 45 is required.

Using diesel fuel with sulphur content above 0.50%requires more frequent oil changes as noted in themaintenance schedule.

The use of diesel fuel with a sulphur content above1.3% is not recommended.

Do not use Number 2-D fuel at temperatures below-7° C (20° F). The cold temperatures will causeNumber 2-D fuel to thicken, which may keep theengine from running. (If this happens, contact yourdealer.)

For the best fuel economy, use Number 2-Dwhenever temperature will permit.

To be sure that a fuel meets the required properties,enlist the aid of a reputable fuel oil supplier. Theresponsibility for clean fuel lies with the fuel supplieras well as the fuel user.


3-3

FUEL STORAGETake the following precautions to ensure that storedfuel is kept free of dirt, water, and othercontaminants.

• Store fuel in black iron tanks, not galvanizedtanks, as the zinc coating will react with the fueland form compounds that will contaminate theinjection pump and injectors.

• Install bulk storage tanks away from directsunlight and angle them slightly so sediment inthe tanks will settle away from the outlet pipe.

• To facilitate moisture and sediment removal,provide a drain plug at the lowest point at the endopposite the outlet pipe.

• If fuel is not filtered from the storage tank, put afunnel with a fine mesh screen in the fuel tankfiller neck when refueling.

• Arrange fuel purchases so summer grade fuelsare not held over and used in winter.

ADDING DIESEL FUEL

1. Clean the area around the fuel cap, 1, to preventdebris from entering the fuel tank, 2.

2. Remove the cap and place in a clean area duringrefueling.

3. After filling the tank, replace and tighten the fuelcap.

NOTE: Fuel tank capacity is 416 liters (110 USgallons).

IMPORTANT:Replace a lost or damaged cap with agenuine Buhler Versatile replacement cap.

1


3-4

REMOVING SHIELDING TO GAIN ACCESSTO COMPONENTS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

INTRODUCTIONTo gain access to perform inspection,lubrication andmaintenance operations, shields, access doors, andpanelsmayneed to beopened, closed, removedandreinstalled. The following pages cover theseprocedures.

IMPORTANT: After performing work on the tractor,install all safety shields before operating the tractor.

IMPORTANT: Follow the guidelines listed in“Servicing the Tractor” heading in the “SafetyPrecautions” Section 0 of this book.

ENGINE ACCESS DOORSAn access door, 1, with a hand grip slot, 2, is locatedon each side of the tractor to provide access for alldaily engine fluid level checks and to perform othermaintenance.

Located inside the left side access door are the:

• Hood release lever• Coolant recovery tank• Engine oil dipstick• Engine oil fill cap• Engine oil filter

Located inside the right side access door are the:

• Fuel filter/water separator• Starter• Booster battery connection points

2

OPENING THE ACCESS DOORSPull outward on the hand grip, 1, to open the door.

3


3-5

REMOVING THE ACCESS DOORSThe doors, 1, may be removed to provide improvedaccess.

To remove:

• Open the hood.• Open the access door, 1, 25 mm (1″).• Lift straight up on the door and slide the hinge

pins from the mount brackets.

4

HOODThehood is hingedat the rear to provide easyaccessto the engine area. Two gas springs (located underthe hood) assist to raise the hood to either of twopositions.

The first position, 1, provides access for routinemaintenance except servicing the air cleaner.

The second position, 2, provides access to servicethe air cleaner.

NOTE:Thegas springs canbe repositioned to adjustthe amount of force needed to open or close thehood. Gas spring adjustment is covered in“Operation 64” in this section of the manual.

5

OPENING THE HOODTo Open the Hood to Position 1:

1. Open the left-hand access door

2. Push forward and up on the hood latch releaselever, 1, to unlock the hood.

3. Lift up on the handle, 2, until the gas springs raisethe hood to the first position.

6


3-6

To Open the Hood to Position 2:

1. slide latch, 2.

2. Push up on the slide latch.

3. Release the handle, 1. The gas springs will raisethe hood to the second position.

1 2

7

CLOSING THE HOODTo Close the Hood from Position 1:

Pull down on the handle, 1, until the hood is in theclosed position.

8

To Close the Hood from Position 2:

1. Push up on the slide latch, 1. The hoodmay needto be raised slightly to release the latch.

2. Pull down on the handle, 2, until the hood is in theclosed position.

3. Pull up on handle, 2, to be sure the hood isproperly latched.

12

9


3-7

REMOVING THE BATTERY COVERTo Remove the Cover:

1. Remove the three attaching bolts, 1.

2. Disconnect the work light electrical connector, 2.

3. Remove the cover, 3, by pulling forward.

10


3-8

LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE CHART

SERVICEINTERVAL

OPERATIONNUMBER MAINTENANCE OPERATION

CHECKCLEAN

LUBECHANGE

ADJUSTDRAIN

WASHPAGE NO.

WHENWARNINGLAMPLIGHTS

1 ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER ELEMENT X X 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 ENGINE OIL LEVEL X X 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL X X 3-14. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 RADIATOR, OIL COOLER, CONDENSER

AND AIR/AIR INTERCOOLER X X 3-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/HYDRAULIC

OIL LEVEL X X 3-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EVERY10

HOURSOR

DAILY

# GREASE AT 10-HOUR INTERVAL WHEN OPERATING IN VERY WET, MUDDY OR EXTREMELY DUSTYCONDITIONS.

* OIL CHANGE INTERVALWILL BE REDUCED IF THE DIESEL FUEL HAS A HIGH SULPHUR CONTENT, ORIF THE TRACTOR IS OPERATED IN EXTREMELY COLD TEMPERATURES.

** FOR SEVERE/HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS, REDUCE CHANGE INTERVALFROM 1200 TO 600 HOURS.

6 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR X X 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 FUEL SEDIMENTER X X 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 CAB AIR FILTER X 3-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 FRONT AND REAR WHEEL HARDWARE

REAR WHEEL WEIGHT MOUNTINGHARDWARE X X 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10 TIRE PRESSURE AND CONDITION X X 3-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11/16# 2WD FRONT AXLE GREASE FITTINGS X 3-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17/21#FWD STANDARD STEER AXLE

GREASE FITTINGS / WEIGHT HARDWARE X 3-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22/28#FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE

GREASE FITTINGS X 3-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29# THREE POINT HITCH LINKAGE

GREASE FITTINGS X 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30# WIDE SWINGING DRAWBAR

GREASE FITTINGS X 3-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EVERY50

HOURS

31* ENGINE OIL AND FILTER X 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 FUEL SEDIMENTER SCREEN X 3-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 FWD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL OIL LEVEL X X 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 FWD AXLE HUB OIL LEVEL X X 3-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35 A/C RECEIVER DRIER SIGHT GLASS X 3-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36 BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVEL X X 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 FUEL TANK X 3-34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 CAB AIR FILTER X 3-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 CAB RECIRCULATION FILTER X 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 TRANSMISSION DIRECTIONAL

CLUTCH CALIBRATION X 3-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 SAFETY CAB MOUNT BOLTS X X 3-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EVERY300

HOURS

EVERY600

HOURS

42 CHECK FRT WEIGHT RETAINING BOLTS X 3-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 ENGINE AIR CLEANER OUTER FILTER X 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 ENGINE AIR INLET CONNECTIONS X 3-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 FUEL FILTER/WATER SEPARATOR X 3-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 AIR CONDITIONER DRAIN TUBES X 3-42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 2WD AXLE FRONT WHEEL BEARINGS X X 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48 ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCE X X 3-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54** FWD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL OIL X 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55** FWD AXLE HUB OIL X 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3-9

65 3-POINT HITCH CALIBRATION CHECK 3-63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66 BLEED THE FUEL SYSTEM 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 FUSE REPLACEMENT 3-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68 HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY BULB REPLACEMENT 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69 WORKLIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT 3-71. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 TURN SIGNAL, STOP LIGHT AND PARKING LIGHT BULB REPLACEMENT -

FENDER MOUNTED 3-72. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 TURN SIGNAL BULB REPLACEMENT - ROOF MOUNTED 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (EIC) BULB REPLACEMENT 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . .73 STORAGE PREPARATION 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 PREPARE THE TRACTOR FOR USE AFTER STORAGE 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SERVICEINTERVAL

OPERATIONNUMBER MAINTENANCE OPERATION

CHECKCLEAN

LUBECHANGE

ADJUSTDRAIN

WASHPAGE NO.

49 TRANSMISSION/REAR AXLE/HYDRAULIC OIL X 3-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

50 HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET SCREEN X 3-45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER X 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER X 3-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

53 ENGINE AIR CLEANER INNER ANDOUTER FILTERS X 3-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54* FWD AXLE DIFFERENTIAL OIL X 3-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55* FWD AXLE HUB OIL X 3-49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56 COOLANT FILTER/CONDITIONER X 3-50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 CAB AIR FILTER X 3-51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION

CLUTCH CALIBRATION X 3-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

+ PERFORM THESE OPERATIONS WITH THE OIL DRAINED IN OPERATION 49.

* FOR SEVERE/HIGH AMBIENT TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS, REDUCE CHANGE INTERVALTO 600 HOURS.

59 FUEL INJECTORS X X X 3-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60 ENGINE COOLANT AND

FILTER/CONDITIONER X 3-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EVERY900

HOURSOR

ANNUALLY

EVERY1200

HOURSOR

ANNUALLY

EVERY2400

HOURSOR TWOYEARS

62 PARK BRAKE ADJUSTMENT X 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63 WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID X 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 HOOD GAS SPRINGS X 3-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ASREQUIRED

GENERALMAINTE-NANCE


3-10

WHEN THE WARNING LAMP GLOWS

OPERATION 1

SERVICE ENGINE AIR CLEANERClean the outer element when the restrictionindicator light on the instrument console illuminates.Performservicewithin onehour of operation after theindicator lights.

IMPORTANT:Clean theouter elementonlywhen therestriction light illuminates. Cleaning the filter toofrequently will decrease the service life of the filter.

To service the filter:

1. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outercover, 2. The wing nut is attached to the cover.

12

11

2. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outerfilter element, 2.

IMPORTANT: Clean the inside of the air cleanerhousing using a damp, lint-free cloth beforeremoving the inner filter element.

NOTE: The inner filter element, 3, should only beserviced every 1200 hours or annually.

3. Examine the inside of the outer element. If dustis present, the outer element is defective andmust be replaced.

123

12


3-11

4. Clean the outer element using either method A,B, or C, depending on the element’s condition.

Methods A or B should be used for dry dust.Method C should be used if the element is sooty,oily or heavily contaminated, or after cleaning theelement six times using methods A or B.

Method ALightly tap the ends of the element against thepalm of the hand.

IMPORTANT:Do not tap the element against a hardsurface as this damages the element.

13

Method BUse compressed air, not exceeding 2 bar (30PSI). Insert the air line nozzle inside the element.Hold the nozzle 150 mm (6″) from the elementand blow the dust from the inside through theelement to the outside.

WARNINGWear eye protection and a face mask whencarrying out this operation.

14

Method CImmerse the element in warm water containinga small amount of non-sudsing detergent. Allowto soak for at least 15 minutes. Keep the openend of the element above the water line.

IMPORTANT:Never use fuel oil, gasoline, solvent orwater hotter than the hand can stand, otherwise thefilter element may be damaged.

After soaking, agitate the element in the water,taking care not to allow dirty water outside theelement to splash over to the inside.

15


3-12

Rinse the element with clean, running water.Rinse from the inside of the element through tothe outside until the water is free of dirt. If a hoseis used, do not exceed 2 bar (30 PSI). A gentletrickle of water is sufficient and will ensure thatthe element is not ruptured.Shake out excess water from the element andallow to air dry. DO NOT use compressed air, alight bulb or heat to dry the element.

NOTE: It usually takes one to three days for a filterelement to dry.

IMPORTANT:Do not attempt to dry the element withheat or compressed air and do not install untilthoroughly dry as it may rupture. It is recommendedthat a newor previously cleanedelement be installedat this service and the washed element put aside forinstallation at the next service. The spare elementshould be stored in a dry place and wrapped toprevent dust contamination or damage.

NOTE: An outer filter element may be washed up tosix times.

16

5. Examine the element for damage by placing alight inside the element. Discard the element ifpin pricks of light canbe seenor if there are areaswhere the paper appears thin.

6. Check the element material for bunching; themetal casing for distortion; and the rubber gasketfor damage. Discard the filter element if it isdamaged.

7. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing usingadamp, lint-free clothonaprobe.Donot damagethe inner filter element.

8. Install a cleaned or a new outer element. Tightenthe wing nut.

NOTE: Replace the wing nut seal if it is damaged.17

9. Install the air cleaner cover, 2, and wing nut, 1.

If the restriction indicator light continues toilluminate after cleaning the element, replace theelement.

12

18


3-13

EVERY 10 HOURS OF OPERATION OR DAILY(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 2

CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVELCheck the oil level when the tractor is parked on alevel surface and after the engine has been stoppedfor a minimum of five minutes.

1. Remove the dipstick, 1, wipe clean and reinsertfully.

2. Pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. Theoil level should be in the crosshatched area, 2.

3. Remove the filler cap, 3, and add fresh oil asrequired until the oil level falls in the cross-hatched area of the dipstick.

NOTE: Do not operate the engine with the oil levelbelow the bottom mark on the dipstick.

NOTE: Do not fill above the crosshatched area. Theexcessive oil will burn off and give a false impressionof oil consumption.

Oil Specification: API CF-4Refer to the “Specification” section for the correct oilviscosity.

19


3-14


OPERATION 3

CHECK ENGINE COOLANT LEVELCheck the coolant level in the recovery tank, 1, whenthe engine is cold. The coolant level should be to thebottom line, 2, on the recovery tank. If coolant isrequired, remove the filler cap, 3, and add a 50/50water and antifreeze mix as specified in the“Specification” section.

IMPORTANT: Install a new filter/conditioner in theevent of a large loss of coolant such as a failedcoolant hose. See “Operation 56.”

NOTE: If no coolant is visible in the recovery tank, thecoolant level must be checked in the radiator.

WARNINGThe cooling system operates under pressurewhich is controlled by the radiator pressure cap.It is dangerous to remove the cap while thesystem is hot. When the system has cooled, usea thick cloth and turn the radiator cap slowly tothe first stop and allow the pressure to escapebefore fully removing the cap. Coolant should bekept off the skin. Adhere to the precautionsoutlined on the coolant filter.

Remove the radiator pressure cap when the systemis cold. Add coolant as required to bring the level tothe bottom of the filler neck. Install the radiatorpressure cap and add coolant to the recovery tank.

NOTE: If the coolant level is low, check the systemfor leaks and repair as required.

20


3-15


OPERATION 4

CHECK RADIATOR, OIL COOLER,AIR CONDITIONER CONDENSER,FUEL COOLER (MODELS 2180/2210)AND INTERCOOLER CORES.Check the cores for trash accumulation or blockage.If any is noted, clean as follows (NOTE: model2145/2160 arrangement shown):

1. Release the latches, 1, on the air conditionercondenser, 2, and swing it open.

2. Use compressed air or a pressure washer forcleaning. Do not exceed 7 bar (100 PSI).

3. Direct the air or water through each core from theback to the front. Clean the radiator, 3, first; theintercooler, 4, second; the oil cooler, 5, third; theair conditioner condenser, 2, fourth; and ifapplicable, the fuel cooler (not shown) last.

4. Straighten any bent fins.

NOTE: If the cores are blocked with any oilysubstances, apply a detergent solution and removeit with a pressure washer.

CAUTIONWear eye protection and protective clothingduring the cleaning process. Clear the area ofbystanders so they are not struck by flyingparticles.

21


3-16


OPERATION 5

CHECK TRANSMISSION/REARAXLE/HYDRAULIC OIL LEVELCheck the oil level with the tractor parked on a levelsurface, with all cylinders extended and the engineshut off for at least five minutes.

1. Remove the dipstick, 1.

2. Check that the oil level is between the full, 2, andadd marks, 3, on the dipstick.

3. Remove the filler cap, 4, and add oil as requiredif oil level is low.

Oil Specification: SEE SPECIFICATIONS

2

3

4

1

22


3-17

EVERY 50 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations plus thefollowing:

OPERATION 6

CHECK FUEL SYSTEM WATERSEPARATOR

IMPORTANT: Before loosening or disconnectingany part of the fuel injection system, thoroughly cleanthe area to be worked on.

Drain the separator bowl, 1, if water or sediment arepresent as follows:

1. Open the drain plug, 2.

2. Operate the hand primer, 3, on the sedimenter,Figure 24, until all water is drained.Catch the fuelin a suitable container and dispose of properly.

3. Close the drain plug, 2.

4. Press the hand primer repeatedly until resis-tance is felt.

23

OPERATION 7

CHECK FUEL SEDIMENTERCheck the sedimenter bowl, 1, and filter screen, 2, forcontaminants. If contamination can be seen, cleanthe sedimenter bowl and screen as described in“Operation 32.”

NOTE: A partially plugged filter screen can causereduced fuel supply to the engine which can cause areduction in engine performance.

3

1

2

24


3-18

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 8

CLEAN CAB AIR FILTERBefore servicing the filter, switch off the blower andclose all windows and one door. Forcibly close theother door. The resulting back pressure will dislodgemost of the loose dirt from the underside of the filter.

NOTE: In humid conditions, such as occur on mostearly mornings, do not switch on the blower prior toservicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into thefilter may be difficult to remove without washing.

NOTE: The filter is made of specially treated paperwith a rubber sealing strip bonded to the uppersurface. Do not damage the element during removal.

To clean the filter:

1. Loosen the filter cover retaining screw, 1.

2. Lower the front of the filter cover, 2.

NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the rear.

3. Remove the filter element, 3.

4. Clean the filter using compressed air notexceeding2bar (30PSI).Hold thenozzle at least300 mm (12″) from the filter to prevent damageto the paper pleats. Direct the compressed airthrough the filter opposite the normal air flow.

5. Clean the filter chamber with a damp, lint-freecloth.

6. Install the filter with the rubber seal, 4, facing thecab roof.

7. Close the front of the cover and tighten theretaining screw.

NOTE: The filter should be cleaned more frequentlywhen operating in extremely dusty conditions.

WARNINGThe cab air filter is designed to remove dust fromthe air but will not exclude chemical vapor.Follow the chemical manufacturers directionsregardingprotection fromdangerouschemicals.

25


3-19

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 9

CHECK FRONT AND REAR WHEELHARDWARE, REAR WHEEL WEIGHTHARDWARECheck the front and rear wheel hardware, rear wheelweight hardware for tightness using a torque wrenchor torque multiplier. The specified torque figures areshown in the table below:

Front disc to hub nuts, 1 203 N·m(two wheel drive) (150 ft.-lbs.)

Front disc to hub nuts, 1 700 N·m(four wheel drive) (515 ft.-lbs.)

Front disc to rim nuts, 2 345 N·m(four wheel drive) (255 ft.-lbs.)

Rear wedge to disc bolts, 3 391 N·m(cast disc wheels) (290 ft.-lbs.)

Rear disc to rim nuts (Grade 8), 2 596 N·m(cast disc wheels) (440 ft.-lbs.)

Rear wedge to hub bolts, 4 391 N·m(steel disc wheels) (290 ft.-lbs.)

Rear disc to hub bolts, 1 800 N·m(steel disc wheels) (590 ft.-lbs.)

Rear wedge to hub bolts, 4 391 N·m(dual wheel - six wedge bolts) (290 ft.-lbs.)

Rear wedge to hub bolts, 4 391 N·m(dual wheel - four wedge bolts) (290 ft.-lbs.)

Rear wheel weight mounting bolts 224 N·m(165 ft. lbs.)

26

OPERATION 10

CHECK TIRE PRESSURES AND TIRECONDITIONCheck and adjust the front and rear tire pressures.Inspect the tread, 1, and sidewalls, 2, for damage.

Adjust the tire pressures to suit the load beingcarried.

See “Tire Pressures and Permissable Loads” inSection 5.

NOTE: If the tires are ballasted with a calciumchloride/water solution, use a special tire gauge asthe solution will corrode a standard-type gauge.Check pressurewith the valve stem, 3, at the bottom.

27


3-20

EVERY 50 HOURSTwo Wheel Drive (2WD) Front Axle GreaseFittingsOperations 11 through 16 cover 2WD front axlelubrication.Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.

NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals whenoperating in extremely wet, muddy or very dustyconditions.

Grease Specification: See specifications

OPERATION 11

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE PIVOT PIN

IMPORTANT:Lubricateuntil greaseappearsateachend of pivot pin.

28

OPERATION 12

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE BELLCRANK

29

OPERATION 13

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE STEERINGCYLINDER

30


3-21

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 14

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE TIE ROD ENDS(2 FITTINGS ON EACH TIE ROD)

31

OPERATION 15

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE SPINDLES(1 FITTING ON EACH SPINDLE)

32

OPERATION 16

LUBRICATE 2WD AXLE WHEEL HUBS(1 FITTING ON EACH HUB)

33


3-22

EVERY 50 HOURSFour Wheel Drive (FWD) Standard Steer FrontAxle Grease FittingsOperations 17 through 21 cover FWDstandard steerfront axle lubrication.Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.


Grease Specification: Use lithium base EPhigh temperature grease available from yourBuhler Versatile dealer.

OPERATION 17

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEERAXLE PIVOT PIN FRONT

34

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEERAXLE PIVOT PIN REAR

35


3-23

OPERATION 18

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEERAXLE KINGPIN BEARINGS(2 FITTINGS ON EACH AXLE END)

36

OPERATION 19

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEERAXLE TOP LEFT KINGPIN BEARINGWHEN EQUIPPED WITH TCS, 1.

LUBRICATE DYNAMIC FRONTFENDER PIVOT.(1 FITTING ON EACH END), 2. 2

1

37


3-24

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 20

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEERAXLE CYLINDERS(2 FITTINGS ON EACH CYLINDER)

38

OPERATION 21

LUBRICATE FWD STANDARD STEERDRIVE SHAFT SPLINES

39

THE FRONT WEIGHT PACK RETAININGBOLTS, 1, SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR THECORRECT TORQUE VALUE. ENSURE THATTHEBOLTSARETIGHTENEDTOATORQUEVALUE OF 250 NM (190 FT. LBS.).

1

40


3-25

EVERY 50 HOURS

Four Wheel Drive (FWD) UltraSteer Front Axle Grease FittingsOperations 22 through 28 cover FWD UltraSteer front axle lubrication. Lubricate by supplying grease through thefittings.NOTE: Lubricate at 10-hour intervals when operating in extremely wet, muddy or very dusty conditions.

Grease Specification: Use lithium base EP high temperature grease available from your BuhlerVersatile dealer.

OPERATION 22

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLEFRONT PIVOT PINS AND ROLLER STOPS

IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at bothends of pivot pin.

41

OPERATION 23

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLEREAR PIVOT PIN

IMPORTANT: Lubricate until grease appears at bothends of pivot pin.

42

OPERATION 24

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLEKINGPIN BEARINGS(2 FITTINGS ON EACH AXLE END)

43


3-26

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 25

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLE TOPLEFT KINGPIN BEARING WHEN EQUIPPEDWITH TCS, 1.

LUBRICATE DYNAMIC FRONT FENDERPIVOT (1 FITTING ON EACH END), 2.

1

2

44

OPERATION 26

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLECYLINDERS(2 FITTINGS ON EACH CYLINDER)

45

46


3-27

OPERATION 27

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLEREAR PIVOT

47

OPERATION 28

LUBRICATE FWD ULTRASTEER AXLEDRIVE SHAFT SPLINE

48


3-28

EVERY 50 HOURS

OPERATION 29

LUBRICATE 3-POINT HITCH LINKAGE

(3 fittings on each vertical link and 2 fittings onthe top link)

Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.


Grease Specification: Use lithium base EPhigh temperature grease available from yourBuhler Versatile dealer. 49

OPERATION 30

LUBRICATE ROLLER DRAWBAR(IF EQUIPPED)Lubricate by supplying grease through the fittings.


Grease Specification: Use lithium base EPhigh temperature grease available from yourBuhler Versatile dealer.

50


3-29

EVERY 300 HOURSComplete the preceding operations, plus thefollowing:

OPERATION 31

CHANGE ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

IMPORTANT: The sulphur content of diesel fuelaffects the engine oil and filter change interval asshown in the following chart:

Sulphur Content Oil Change Interval

Below 0.5% 300 hours0.5 - 1.0% 150 hours1.0 - 1.3% 75 hours

The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% isnot recommended.

WARNINGBevery careful to avoid contactwithhot engineoil.If engine oil is extremely hot, allow oil to cool tomoderately warm temperature before proceeding.

IMPORTANT: Cold weather operation affects the oilchange interval. When operating in temperaturesbelow -12° C (10° F). Change oil and filter every 150hours of operation.

Change theoil and filter after theenginehasbeen rununtil it is warm. Park tractor on level ground and stopengine. Engage park brake.

To change the oil and filter:

1. Remove the engine oil drain plug, 1, and catchthe oil in a suitable container. Dispose of oil andfilter properly.

2. Replace the drain plug after oil has drained.Torque plug to 38 NSm (28 ft. lbs.).

3. Clean the oil filter area.51

4. Remove the oil filter, 1.5. Wipe filter mounting surface, 2, clean.6. Apply a thin film of oil on the new oil filter sealing

ring, 3.

52


3-30

EVERY 300 HOURS

7. Install filter and tighten until sealing ring contactsmounting surface, then tighten an additional 3/4to 1 full turn. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

8. Remove filler cap, 1, and fill with 19 liters (5gallons) of fresh oil of the grade and viscosityprescribed in the “Specification” section.

9. Remove the cover from the right side “B” pillar toget access to the main electrical distributionpanel. See “Operation 65” for details onremoving the cover.

53

10. Remove the fuel solenoid relay, 1, (second fromthebottom) from themain distribution panel. Thiswill prevent the engine from starting.

11. Crank the engine for 20 seconds. Wait oneminute. Repeat the procedure two more times.

IMPORTANT:Cranking the engine provides lubrica-tion to the turbocharger and engine before startingwhich will extend engine life.

12. Reinstall the fuel solenoid relay, 1, and “B” pillarcover.

13. Run theengine at idle for 3minutes, then stop theengine.

14. Check drain plug and oil filter areas for leaks.

15. Wait 5 minutes to allow oil to drain into thecrankcase, then check the oil level on thedipstick, 2. The oil level should be in thecrosshatched area, 3, Figure 53.

16. Add new oil as required until the oil level is in thecrosshatched area.

NOTE: Do not fill above the upper line of thecrosshatched area. Excessive oil will be burned offwithin a short time and give a false impression of oilconsumption.

Oil Specification: API CF-4Refer to the “Specification” section for the correctoil viscosity.OilCapacity (including filter) - 21 liters (5.5USgallons)

54


3-31

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 32

CLEAN FUEL SEDIMENTER SCREEN


To clean the sedimenter:

1. Remove the sedimenter bowl, 1, from the liftpump, 2. Catch the fuel in a suitable containerand dispose of properly.

2. Inspect the O ring, 3, and replace if damaged.

3. Remove the screen, 4, and spring, 5.

4. Clean screen and bowl.

5. Inspect screen and replace if damaged.

6. Install the spring and screen in the bowl.

7. Fill the bowl with clean, fresh fuel.

8. Install the bowl. Hand tighten only.

9. Depress the hand primer on the fuel filtermanifold repeatedly until resistance is felt andthe sedimenter bowl is full.

10. Start the engine and check for leaks.

NOTE: A partially plugged filter screen can causereduced fuel supply to engine. This can cause lowpower performance.

IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start aftercranking for 20 seconds, the fuel system must bepurged of air. Refer to “Operation 66” in this section.

55


3-32

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 33

CHECK FWD AXLE HOUSING OIL LEVELThe correct oil level is determined with cold oil.

To check the oil level:

1. Park the tractor on level ground and block thewheels front and back.

2. Carefully loosen the level/fill plug, 1.

WARNINGHot oil may spray out when the plug is removed.Wear safety glasses and protective clothing toprevent injury.

3. Check that the oil level is to the bottom of thelevel/fill plug hole.

4. Add new oil as required.

5. Reinstall level/fill plug.

Oil Specification:See Specifications

1

56

OPERATION 34

CHECK FWD AXLE HUB OIL LEVELThe correct oil level is determined with cold oil.

To check the oil level:

1. Rotate the hub so the arrow, 1, points horizontal(level).

2. Park the tractor on level ground and block thewheels front and back.

3. Carefully loosen the level/fill plug, 2 (theplanetary hubs are not vented). If escaping air isheard, allow the pressure to subside beforecompletely removing the plug.

4. Check that the oil level is at the bottom of thelevel/fill plug hole.

5. Add new oil as required.

6. Reinstall level/fill plug.Repeat on the other hub.


12

57


3-33

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 35

CHECK A/C RECEIVER DRIER SIGHTGLASS AND MOISTURE INDICATORCheck the sight glass for bubbles and the color of themoisture indicator when the outside temperature is21° C (70° F) or warmer.

To check the sight glass:

1. Start engine and run at 2000 RPM.

2. Depress A/C switch, 1.

3. Position temperature switch, 2, full counterclock-wise and blower switch, 3, full clockwise.

58

4. Inspect the sight glass, 1, ten minutes afterdepressing the A/C switch. The compressormust be turning when inspecting the sight glass.

If bubbles are visible in the sight glass or themoisture indicator, 2, is pink in color, the airconditioning system should be serviced. Contactyour authorized dealer.

IMPORTANT: Do not allow R-134a refrigerant toescape into the atmosphere. Your authorized dealerhas the proper handling and recycling equipment toservice the system.

WARNINGThe air conditioning system contains environ-mentally safe R-134a refrigerant. This system isnot compatible with R12 refrigerant. do not usegauges or test equipment with R12 refrigerant asdamage to the system will result.

CAUTIONDo not attempt to service the air conditioningsystem. It is possible tobe severely frostbittenorinjured by escaping refrigerant.

59


3-34

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 36

CHECK BATTERY ELECTROLYTE LEVELCheck electrolyte level with the engine stopped,tractor on level ground, and the batteries cold.

To check:

1. Remove battery box cover.

2. Clean the top of the batteries with a damp cloth.

3. Remove the six fill plugs, 1, from each battery.

4. Check that the electrolyte level is 6 mm (1/4″)below the filler neck of each cell.

5. Add distilled or demineralized water as required.Do not overfill.

6. Replace all fill plugs.

7. Check for loose cable connections, 2, or loosebattery clamps, 3. Tighten as required.

8. Replace battery cover.

WARNINGBatteries contain sulfuric acid. In case ofcontact with skin, flush the affected area withwater for five minutes. Seek medical attentionimmediately.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or cloth-ing. Wear eye protection when working nearbatteries.

60

OPERATION 37

DRAIN FUEL TANKTo drain the fuel tank, 2:

1. Park the tractor with the front wheels on a slightupgrade and block the wheels front and back.

2. Open drain cock, 1, until water and sediment areeliminated. Catch the fuel in a suitable containerand dispose of the fuel properly.

3. Close the drain cock when clean fuel appears.

2

1

61


3-35

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 38

WASH CAB AIR FILTERBefore servicing the filter, switch off the blower andclose all windows and one door. Forcibly close theother door. The resulting back pressure will dislodgemost of the loose dirt from the underside of the filter.

NOTE: In humid conditions, such as occur on mostearly mornings, do not switch on the blower prior toservicing the filter. Damp particles drawn into thefilter may be difficult to remove without washing.

NOTE: The filter is made of specially treated paperwith a rubber sealing strip bonded to the uppersurface. Do not damage the element during removal.



NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the back.

3. Remove the filter element, 3.

4. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm watercontaining a small amount ofmild detergent. Theside of the filter with the sealing strip shouldremain above the surface of the water.

5. Rinse the filter with running water below 2.8 bar(40 PSI). Direct the water through the filter in theopposite direction of the normal air flow.

6. Shakeoff theexcesswater. Position the filterwiththe seal side up and allow to dry naturally.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter withheat or compressed air and do not install untilthoroughly dry as the filter may rupture. It isrecommended that a new filter be installed at thisservice and thewashed filter put aside for installationat a subsequent service. Store the spare filter in a dryplace and wrap it to prevent dust contamination ordamage.

7. Clean the filter chamber with a damp, lint-freecloth.

8. Install the filter with the rubber seal, 4, facing thecab roof.

9. Close the front of the cover and tighten theretaining screw.

NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently whenoperating in extremely dusty conditions.

IMPORTANT: Replace the filter if pinholes can beseen when the filter is held up to a strong light, whenthe filter is dark and dirty appearing after cleaning,when the metal housing is bent, or when the seal isdamaged.

62



3-36

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 39

CLEAN CAB RECIRCULATION FILTERTo clean:

1. Remove the two retaining screws, 1, from thecover, 2.

2. Remove the cover and filter, 3.

3. Soak the filter for 15 minutes in warm watercontaining a mild detergent.

4. Rinse the filter with running water below 1.4 bar(20 PSI).

5. Shake off the excess water and allow to air dry.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to dry the filter withheat or compressed air and do not install untilthoroughly dry as the filter may rupture. It isrecommended that a new filter is installed at thisservice and the washed one put aside for installationat a subsequent service. Store the spare filter in a dryplace and wrap it to prevent dust contamination ordamage.

6. Install the filter, cover and retaining screws.

NOTE: Wash the filter more frequently whenoperating in extremely dusty conditions.

IMPORTANT: Replace the filter when holes or tearsare visible.

OPERATION 40

TRANSMISSION DIRECTIONAL CLUTCHCALIBRATION

1. If 9-10 shift has greatly deteriorated or the tractoris in severe duty, the F-1, F-2, and Reversedirectional clutches may require calibration.

2. See your authorized dealer or Operation 58.

3. This operation requires that the tractor be atoperating temperature.

4. For future reference, always record the shiftconstant that the EIC displays during thecalibration process.

63


3-37

EVERY 300 HOURS

OPERATION 41

CHECK SAFETY CAB MOUNTING BOLTTORQUECheck the torque of the cab mount bolts and themount bracket bolts. The specified torque figures are:

Cab mount bolts: 217 N·m (160 ft.-lbs.).

Mount bracket to transmission bolts: 239 N·m (177ft.-lbs.).

Mount bracket to rear axle bolts:Model 2145 306 N·m (226 ft.-lbs.)Models 2160, 2180, and 2210:239 N·m (177 ft.-lbs.).

FRONT CAB MOUNTS - ALL MODELSRemove the sill plate, 1, and fold back the floor mat,2, to access the front cab mounting bolts. Torquemount bolts, 3, as specified. Repeat on the otherfront mount.

4. Cab mount bracket5. Mount bracket to transmission bolts

64

REAR CAB MOUNTS - MODEL 2145Torque bolts as specified.

1. Cab mount to bracket bolt2. Mount bracket to rear axle bolts

65


3-38

REAR CAB MOUNTS - MODELS 2160,2180, AND 2210Torque left and right side mount bolts as specified.

1. Cab mount bolts2. Mount bracket to rear axle bolts

66

OPERATION 42

THE FRONT WEIGHT PACK RETAININGBOLTS, 1, SHOULD BE CHECKED FOR THECORRECT TORQUE VALUE. ENSURE THATTHEBOLTSARETIGHTENEDTOATORQUEVALUE OF 250 NM (190 FT. LBS.).

1

67


3-39

EVERY 600 HOURS

Complete the preceding operations plus thefollowing:

OPERATION 43

CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANEROUTER FILTER

To change the filter:

1. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the filtercover, 2. The wing nut is attached to the cover.

12

68

2. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outerfilter, 2.

IMPORTANT: Do not remove or disturb the innerfilter.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing usingadamp, lint-free clothonaprobe.Donot damagethe inner filter, 3.

4. Install a new outer filter and tighten the wing nut.

NOTE: Replace the wing nut seal if it is damaged.

5. Reinstall the air cleaner cover and tighten thewing nut.

123

69


3-40

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 44

CHECK ENGINE AIR INTAKECONNECTIONSCheck all intake system connections for propersealing and the clamps for tightness.

1. Left side connections

1

70

1. Right side connections1

1

71


3-41

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 45

CHANGE FUEL FILTER/WATERSEPARATOR


1. Hold the filter, 1, so it cannot turn.

2. Unscrew the plastic water separator bowl, 2,from the filter. Donot damage the bowl or lose theO ring. Catch the fuel in a suitable container anddispose of properly.

72

3. Remove the filter, 1. Dispose of filter properly.

4. Clean the filter mount surface, 2.

5. Install theO ringandplasticwater separator bowlon the new filter. Hand tighten only.

6. Fill the filter with clean, fresh, diesel fuel.

7. Coat the filter seal, 3, with diesel fuel.

8. Install the filter until the seal contacts the mount,then tighten an additional 1/2 turn.

9. Depress and release the hand primer at the fuelpump until resistance is felt indicating the filter isfull.

10. Start the engine and check for fuel leaks.

IMPORTANT: If the engine does not start aftercranking for 20 seconds, the fuel system must bepurged of air. Refer to “Operation 66” in this section.

2

3

1

73


3-42

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 46

CHECK AIR CONDITIONER DRAIN TUBESCheck that the four drain tubes and end caps areopen.

One tube, 1, travels down and exits beneath each ofthe front cab “A” pillars. One tube, 2, travels downand exits beneath each of the cab “B” pillars.

NOTE: There are two tubes on each side of thetractor.

74


3-43

EVERY 600 HOURS

OPERATION 47

ADJUST 2WD FRONT AXLE WHEELBEARINGS1. Block the rear wheels front and rear to prevent

movement.

2. Raise one side of the front axle until the wheel isoff the ground. Put a support under the front axle.

3. Remove the hub cap, 1, from the hub, 2.

4. Remove the cotter pin, 3.

5. Turn the wheel as you tighten the hex nut, 4, to atorque of 20 N·m (15 ft.-lbs.). Back off the hex nutuntil the first slot where the cotter pin can beinstalled is aligned with the hole in the spindle.

6. Install the cotter pin, 3, in the spindle, 5.

7. Install the hub cap, 1, on the hub, 2.

8. Raise the axle and remove the support.

9. Adjust the other wheel bearing.

75

OPERATION 48

CHECK ENGINE VALVE CLEARANCECheck valve clearance with the engine cold.

The correct valve clearance is:

Inlet 0.36 mm - 0.46 mm (0.014″ - 0.018″)Exhaust 0.43 mm - 0.53 mm (0.017″ - 0.021″)

Remove the rocker cover and adjust as follows:

1. Turn the crankshaft until any pair of valves in the“Valves Open” column is fully open. Check andadjust the corresponding pairs of valves in the“Valves to Adjust” column.Valves Open Valves to Adjust1 inlet/3 exhaust 4 exhaust/6 inlet5 inlet/6 exhaust 1 exhaust/2 inlet2 exhaust/3 inlet 4 inlet/5 exhaust4 exhaust/6 inlet 1 inlet/3 exhaust1 exhaust/2 inlet 5 inlet/6 exhaust4 inlet/5 exhaust 2 exhaust/3 inlet

2. Slide a feeler gauge, 1, of the correct thicknessbetween the valve stem, 2, and rocker arm, 3.

3. Turn the rocker arm adjusting screw, 4, until theproper clearance is obtained. Turn the screwclockwise to reduceclearanceandcounterclock-wise to increase clearance.

4. Repeat the process until all the valves have beenchecked and adjusted.

5. Install the rocker cover. Use a new gasket if theoriginal shows damage.

76


3-44

EVERY 900 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)Complete the appropriate preceding operations plusthe following:

OPERATION 49

CHANGE TRANSMISSION/REARAXLE/HYDRAULIC OIL

NOTE: Perform this operation in conjunction with“Operations 50, 51 and 52.”

Prior to changing the oil, run the engine and operatethe hydraulic system until the oil is warm. Park thetractor on level ground, lower three-point linkage andstop the engine. Engage the park brake and blockwheels on both sides.

WARNINGBe very careful to avoid contact with hot oil. If oilis extremely hot, allow oil to cool to moderatelywarm temperature before proceeding.

To change the oil:

1. Remove the drain plug, 1, and catch the oil in asuitable container. Dispose of oil properly.

NOTE:Approximately 136 liters (36gallons) of oilwillbe drained depending on the model.

2. Install the drain plug.

IMPORTANT: Perform operations 50, 51 and 52before refilling with oil.

77

3. Remove the filler cap, 1, and refill with new oil.

Model 2145 - 83 liters (22 U.S. gal.)Models 2160, 2180, 2210 - 106 liters (28 U.S.gal.).Normal refill quantity will be approximately 23liters (6 U.S. gal.) less than factory fill capacity,stated on Section 5, due to oil retained in thesystem.

4. Run the engine and operate the hydraulicsystem. Fully raise the three-point linkage.

5. Stop the engine and wait five minutes whilechecking the system for leaks.

6. Check oil level on the dipstick, 2. Add oil asrequired to bring the oil level to the full mark, 3.

NOTE: Do not fill above the full mark.

Oil Specification: See Specification

Oil Capacity:

Model 2145 - 113 liters (30 U.S. gal.)Models 2160, 2180, 2210 - 140 liters (36.9 U.S.gal.)

NOTE: Capacities listed are for a COMPLETELYDRAINED system.

2

3

1

78


3-45

EVERY 900 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS (WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)

OPERATION 50

CLEAN HYDRAULIC PUMP INLET SCREEN

NOTE: Perform this operation while oil is drained in“Operation 49.”

NOTE: Clean inlet screen area before proceeding.

To clean the inlet screen:

1. Remove the threeattachingbolts, 1, from theendcover, 2.

79

2. Pull the end cover, 1, down until it is free of thecoupler, 2.

NOTE: Do not damage the O rings, 3, whenremoving the end cover.

80

3. Remove the suction screen, 1, by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Clean the sump area.

5. Clean, then inspect, suction screen and all Orings. Replace if damaged.

6. Install the suction screen. Turn clockwise untilhand tight, then turn anadditional 1/4 turn.Donotover tighten.

7. Install the O ring, 2, on the housing and lubricatewith oil.

8. Oil the exposed O ring, 3, on the coupler.

9. Install the end cover and coupler. Do not damagethe O rings.

10. Install the attaching bolts and torque to 50 N·m(37 ft.-lbs.).

81


3-46


OPERATION 51

CHANGE TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER


NOTE: Clean filter area before proceeding.



2. Discard the O ring, 2.

3. Clean the filter manifold seal surface, 3.

4. Coat the new O ring, 2, with clean oil.

5. Install the filter and tighten.

82

OPERATION 52

CHANGE HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER


NOTE: Clean filter area before proceeding.



2. Discard the O ring, 2.

3. Clean the filter manifold seal surface, 3.

4. Coat the new O ring, 2, with clean oil.

5. Install the filter and tighten.

IMPORTANT:Be sure to install the correct size filter.

83


3-47


Complete the appropriate preceding operations plusthe following:

OPERATION 53

CHANGE ENGINE AIR CLEANERINNER AND OUTER FILTER ELEMENTSTo change the filters:

1. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outercover, 2.

12

84

2. Unscrew the wing nut, 1, and remove the outerfilter element, 2.

3. Clean the inside of the air cleaner housing usinga damp, lint-free cloth.

4. Unscrew the wing nut, 3, and remove the innerfilter element, 4.

5. Check the seals on the wing nuts and replace ifdamaged.

6. Install new inner filter element, 4, and tightenwing nut, 3, hand tight.

7. Install new outer filter element, 2, and tightenwing nut, 1, hand tight.

8. Install air cleaner filter cover and tighten wing nuthand tight.

IMPORTANT: Failure to install the inner filterelement properly could result in engine damage.Therefore it is recommended that the element beinstalled by an authorized dealer.

124

3

85


3-48


OPERATION 54For severe/high ambient temperature applica-tions, reduce change interval to 600 hours.

CHANGE FWD DIFFERENTIAL OILPark the tractor on level ground and engage the parkbrake. It is recommended that oil be changed shortlyafter the tractor has been operating, so thatcontaminents do not settle out.

To change the oil:

1. Loosen the fill/check plug, 2. Allow air to enter.

2. Carefully remove the drain plug, 1, andcompletely drain all oil into a suitable container.Dispose of the oil properly.

WARNINGHot oil may spray out when the plug is removed.Wear safety glasses and protective clothing toprevent injury.

3. Reinstall drain plug.

4. Remove fill/check plug, 2.

5. Fill with new oil until it reaches the bottom of thefill/check plug hole.

6. Reinstall fill/check plug.


Oil Capacity: 14.5 liters (15.3 U.S. qts)

2

1

86


3-49


OPERATION 55For severe/high ambient temperature applica-tions, reduce change interval to 600 hours.

CHANGE FWD PLANETARY HUB OILPark the tractor on level ground and engage the parkbrake. It is recommended that oil be changed shortlyafter the tractor has been operating, so thatcontaminents do not settle out.

To change the oil:

1. Position the wheel so the fill/drain/level plug, 1,is at the highest point, at 12:00. 87

2. Carefully loosen the plug (the planetary hubs arenot vented) and allow any air to escape. Rotatethe wheel so plug is in the lowest point. Removeplug and drain oil completely into a suitablecontainer. Dispose of oil properly.

3. Rotate the wheel so the arrow and plug, 2, ispointing straight down.

88

4. Refill the hub with new oil until it reaches thebottom of the fill/check/level plug hole, 3, when itis horizontal level.

5. Install the fill/drain/level plug.

6. Repeat the process on the other hub.


Oil Capacity (each hub):

- 5 liter (5.3 U.S. quarts)

89


3-50


OPERATION 56

CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT FILTER/CONDITIONERA replaceable coolant filter/conditioner is installed onthe tractor. The filter/conditioner canister contains afilter element and a conditioner in the formof a paste.As coolant flows through the filter, the pastedissolves and mixes with the coolant to provideoptimum engine corrosion protection.

The conditioner in the filter will:

• Increase rust prevention.• Reduce scale formation.• Minimize cylinder wall erosion (pitting).• Reduce foaming of the coolant.

As the conditioner works and protects the system, itgradually loses its strength andmust be replenished.Replacing the filter at the specified interval ensuresmaximum protection.

IMPORTANT: The new filter contains a measuredamount of chemical inhibitor in paste form. Theamount of conditioner and the size of the filterelement are matched to the cooling capacity of thetractor. It is important that this filter is changed every1200 hours if total protection of the engine coolingsystem is to be maintained. The use of anon-approved filter may jeopardize this protection.

IMPORTANT: Install a new filter/conditioner in theevent of a large coolant loss such as a failed coolanthose.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the filter/conditionermore frequently than specified unless a large coolantloss occurs.

IMPORTANT: Anti-leak additives should not beused. The clogging properties of these additivescould affect the performance of the filter andconditioner.

IMPORTANT: If it becomes necessary to replace thefilter before the 1,200 hour change interval, or if lessthan one-half of the coolant is lost, a filter without aconditioner should be installed.

IMPORTANT: If replacing with fully formulatedcoolant, a coolant filter without the additive should beused.

90

CAUTIONOnly change the filter when the engine is cool.


1. Close both shutoff valves, 1.

2. Remove the filter, 2. Dispose of properly.

3. Lubricate the filter seal, 3, on the new filter withclean oil.

4. Clean the filter manifold sealing surface, 4.

5. Install the new filter until the seal contacts themanifold. Tighten an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

6. Open both shutoff valves.

7. Start the engine and run it for 5 minutes.

8. Check the filter area for leaks.


3-51


OPERATION 57

CHANGE CAB AIR FILTERTo change the filter:



NOTE: The filter cover is hinged at the rear.

3. Remove the filter element, 3, and discard.

4. Clean the filter chamber with a damp cloth.

5. Install a new filter with the rubber seal, 4, facingthe cab roof.

6. Close the cover and tighten the retaining screw.


91


3-52


92

OPERATION 58

CHECK POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSIONCLUTCH CALIBRATION

NOTE: The Powershift transmission has threedirectional clutches. Calibrate the clutches periodi-cally to compensate for wear. This service should beperformed after the first 50 hours of operation andevery 1200 hours, or more frequently at 300 hours ifa deterioration in shift quality is noted (seeOperation40). It is recommended that this operation beperformed by an authorized dealer.

WARNINGBefore carrying out the calibration procedure,firmly apply the park brake and block thewheels,front and rear.

IMPORTANT: During the calibration procedure, theelectronicmanagement systemdetects precisely thepoint at which the clutches start to engage. Thisengagement is detected by a very small reduction inengine speed. During calibration, it is essential thatno action is taken to cause the engine speed to vary.Be sure that the air conditioner and all electricalequipment is switched off. Do not operate the PTOorany hydraulic lever or move the hand or foot throttle.

Preparing the Tractor for CalibrationNOTE: The clutches should be adjusted when the oilis at normal operating temperatures.

Prior to calibrating the directional clutches, carry outthe following:

1. Park the tractor on level ground away from anyobstacles in case of unexpected tractormovement. Stop the engine and place remotehydraulic controls in the neutral position.

2. Engage the park brake and block the wheels,front and rear.

NOTE: The LCD will flash “P” if the parking brake isnot applied.

3. Turn off the air conditioning.

4. Move the shift lever to the ”NEUTRALDOWNSHIFT” position (to the left) and hold inposition.While holding it there, turn the key--startswitch to the start position.

5. Start the engine. The full LCD will be displayed.

6. Release the shift lever three to five seconds afterthe engine starts.NOTE: If lever is held longer than three to fiveseconds, a ”d” will momentarily appear on thedisplay accompanied by an audible alarm. Thedisplay then exits the calibration mode. If thisoccurs, repeat steps 1 through 6.

7. Verify the digital display is showing a steady ”CC”indicating the electronic management system isin the clutch calibration mode.

NOTE: Repeat steps 1 through 7 if ”CC” is notpresent.

8. Adjust engine speed to 1200 +/-- 30 RPM usingthe hand throttle (do not use cruise control).

9. Push the shift lever forward and ”CC” shouldbegin flashing.

10. Proceed to calibrate the clutches if ”CC” isflashing.


3-53


Calibrate F1 Directional ClutchTo calibrate the low range directional clutch (F1):

1. Move the speed control lever to the forwardposition.

2. Verify the display shows a flashing “CC.”

3. Move the speed control lever to the left and holdit there.

NOTE: If wheel movement is detected, the LCD willflash “F” (failed). Recheck parking brake engage-ment and wheel blocks before restarting thecalibration procedure.

4. Observe the digital display. It will flash “20” forapproximately 4 seconds, then the numberdisplayedwill increase by one digit every seconduntil the reading becomes steady. A steadyreading indicates that clutch F1 is calibrated.

5. Return the speed control lever to the neutralposition after the clutch is calibrated.

6. Verify that the digital display shows a flashing“CC.”

93

Calibrate F2 Directional ClutchTo calibrate the high range directional clutch (F2):

1. Move the speed control lever to the forwardposition.

2. Verify that the display shows a flashing “CC.”

3. Move the speed control lever to the right andholdit there.

4. Observe the digital display. It will flash “20” forapproximately 4 seconds, then the numberdisplayedwill increase by one digit every seconduntil the reading becomes steady. A steadyreading indicates that clutch F2 is calibrated.


6. Verify that the digital display shown is flashing“CC.”

94


3-54


Calibrate Reverse Directional ClutchTo calibrate the reverse range directional clutch:

1. Move the speed control lever to the reverseposition.

2. Verify that the display shows a flashing “CC.”

3. Move the speed control to the right and hold itthere.

4. Observe the digital display. It will flash “20” forapproximately 4 seconds, then the numberdisplayed will increase by one digit for everysecond until the reading becomes steady. Asteady reading indicates that the reverse rangeclutch is calibrated.


6. Verify that the digital display shown is flashing“CC.”

EXIT CALIBRATION MODETo exit the calibration mode:

1. Stop the engine and wait 10 seconds beforeproceeding.

2. Start the engine in the normal manner.

3. Verify that with the speed control lever in theneutral position, the digital display indicates“N5.”

The tractor is now ready for normal operation.

95

PROGRAMMING FAULTSFlashing “F”: Indicates that the CCM has detectedpossible transmission output shaft rotation. This cancause drive wheel movement. THE CALIBRATIONPROCESSWILL AUTOMATICALLY BE STOPPED.To clear it, ensure the wheels are blocked and thatservice brakes are applied. If the tractor is parked ona slope, move the tractor to level ground.

Flashing “P”: Indicates that the park brake leverwas not applied before the calibration process wasstarted. To clear it, apply the park brake and restartthe calibration process.

“EH” Error High: During calibration process, theinitial application of the clutch occurred too quicklyand that the engine speed dropped the 14 RPMbefore the constant had a chance to ramp upnormally. Ensure that all tractor accessories (airconditioning) are turned off. If this continues, contactyour Buhler Versatile dealer.

“EL” Error Low: During the directional clutchcalibration, the CCM increased the constant numberto the maximum limit and the clutch did not load theengine down by 14 RPM. The calibration process onthis clutch will automatically stop at that point. Theconstant usually counts up to 99 and the “EL” showsup. If this continues, contact your Buhler Versatiledealer.


3-55


Complete theappropriateprecedingoperations,plusthe following:

OPERATION 59

CHECK AND CLEAN FUEL INJECTORS

IMPORTANT: The injectors should be cleaned andadjusted by an authorized dealer or an injectorspecialist.

WARNINGDiesel fuel escaping under pressure canpenetrate the skin causing serious injury.

• Do not use your hand to check for leaks. Use apiece of cardboard or paper to search for leaks.Wear eye protection.

• Stop the engine and relieve pressure beforeconnecting or disconnecting lines.

• Tighten all connections before starting theengine or pressurizing lines.

If any fluid is injected into the skin, obtain medicalattention immediately or gangrene may result.


IMPORTANT: Remove and replace one injector at atime. This will reduce the chance of dirt entering theengine through the injector opening.

IMPORTANT:Place caps on all open lines or injectoropenings to prevent the entry of dirt.

The following text assumes that you have a spare setof injectors which have been cleaned and adjustedand are ready to be installed. Use the followingprocedure to remove and replace the injectors:

1. Disconnect the high pressure injector line, 1,from the injector, 2.

2. Remove the leak off line retaining bolt, 3.

3. Remove the leak off line, 4, and discard the twocopper washers (one on either side of the banjofitting).

96


3-56


4. Remove the injector retainingbolts andwashers,1, and hold-down clamp, 2.

5. Turn the injector, 3, clockwise to loosen it, thenremove from the head.

6. Remove the copper sealing washer, 4, from theinjector. If the washer is not on the injector it hasremained in the head and must be extracted.Discard the copper washers.

7. Remove the cork dust seal, 5, from the injector.

8. Install a new cork dust seal on the replacementinjector.

9. Install a new copper washer on the end of theinjector.

10. Install the injector.

11. Install the hold-down clamp.

12. Install the retaining bolts and washers. Torquethe bolts evenly to 22 N·m (17 ft.-lbs.).

13. Install the leak off line using new copperwashers, 6, on either side of the banjo fitting.

14. Torque the leak off line retaining bolt, 7, to 4.5N·m (40 in.-lbs.).

15. Install the high pressure line and tighten theconnector to 24 N·m (18 ft.-lbs.).

16. Repeat the process on the remaining injectors.

17. Bleed the fuel system as detailed in “Operation66” in this section.

18. Start the engine and visually inspect for leaks.The injectors which were removed should beservicedbyanauthorizeddealer and retained for useat the next service interval.

NOTE: Unauthorized modification or adjustment offuel injection equipment outside specification willinvalidate the warranty.

NOTE: Be sure to install the clamp with the raisedside facing up.

97


3-57


OPERATION 60

CHANGE ENGINE COOLANT ANDFILTER/CONDITIONERThe rust andcorrosion inhibitors in theantifreezeandthe filter/conditioner deteriorate with use and requirereplacement on a regular basis.

The tractor is equippedwith awater filter with coolantconditioner. The water filter/conditioner removesforeign material from the cooling system, controlsrust, and conditions the coolant to prevent erosionand cavitation in the cooling system.

See “Operation 56” for additional information on thefilter/conditioner.

WARNINGThe coolant system operates under pressurewhich is controlled by the radiator pressure cap.It is dangerous to remove the pressure capwhilethe system is hot. When the system has cooled,use a thick cloth and turn the cap slowly to thefirst stopandallow thepressure toescapebeforefully removing the cap. Coolant should be keptoff the skin. Adhere to the precautions outlinedon the antifreeze and inhibitor containers, whereused.

CAUTIONDrain the coolant when the engine is cool.

Park the tractor on level ground and engage the parkbrake and block the wheels front and rear.

To change coolant and the filter/conditioner:

1. Turn the heater control knob to the maximumposition.

2. Check that the heater shutoff valves, 1, are open.

98


3-58


3. Open the drain plug, 1, on the radiator and drainall the coolant into a suitable container. Disposeof the coolant properly. The system holds 26.4liters (7 U.S. gallons).

WARNINGCoolant shouldbekept off the skin.Adhere to theprecautions outlined on the antifreeze container.

99

4. Remove the drain plug, 1, from the left rear of theengine block. Drain all the coolant into a suitablecontainer. Dispose of the coolant properly.

100

5. Remove the radiator cap,1, to increase thedrainage rate.

101


3-59


6. Close the shutoff valves, 1, at the filter/condition-er, 2.

7. Remove the filter/conditioner.

8. Flush the system with a commercial coolantsystem cleaner. Follow the instructions suppliedwith the cleaner.

9. Drain the cleaner and let the engine cool.

IMPORTANT:Never put cold coolant in a hot engine.The difference in temperature could cause the blockor head to crack.

10. Fill system with clean water.

11. Run engine for 10 minutes, then drain all thewater. Allow the engine to cool.

12. Close all drain plugs.

13. Coat the filter seal, 3, with coolant.

IMPORTANT: The standard replacement condition-er filter contains conditioning additive. If thereplacement coolant is fully formulated and containsthe correct amount of conditioner, a coolant filterwithout conditioner should be used. See “PartNumbers of High Usage Items” in the specificationssection of this manual or contact your BuhlerVersatile Dealer.

14. Wipe the sealing surface of the filter manifold, 4.

15. Install the filter until the gasket contacts themanifold. Tighten an additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

16. Open the shutoff valves, 1, at the filter manifold.

17. Inspect cooling system hoses and connectionsfor leaks.

18. Fill the cooling system with a 50/50 blend of lowsilicate antifreeze and clean soft water. Addcoolant slowly through the radiator filler neckuntilthe coolant is to the bottom of the filler neck.

NOTE: To avoid trapping air in the system, fill theradiator as slowly as practicable thereby allowingany air pockets to disperse.

102


3-60


19. Fill the coolant recovery tank, 1, to the lowestmark, 2.

20. Start the engine and run it until normal operatingtemperature is reached.

NOTE: The coolant level will drop as coolant ispumped around the system.

21. Stop the engine and allow the coolant to cool.

22. Remove the radiator cap and add coolant to theradiator to bring the coolant level to the bottom ofthe filler neck. Install the radiator cap.

23. Add coolant to the recovery tank as required tobring the level to the cold mark.

NOTE: If the engine is not going to be operatedimmediately following the coolant and filter change,run the engine for one hour to ensure that thechemical conditioner within the filter is dispersed intothe cooling system.

Antifreeze Specification: See Specifications

Clean Water Specification (Maximum):Total Hardness 300 parts per millionChlorides 100 parts per millionSulfates 100 parts per million

Coolant Capacity: 26.4 liters (7 U.S. gallons)

103


3-61

AS REQUIRED OPERATIONS

OPERATION 62

ADJUST THE PARK BRAKEThe park brake should be fully appliedwhen the parkbrake handle is raised to the third or fourth notch(click) on the quadrant.

IMPORTANT: Adjust the park brake when the parkbrake handle must be raised above the fourth notchon the quadrant to fully apply the park brake.

Adjust the park brake with the tractor parked on levelground, the engine off, and the wheels blocked frontand rear.

To adjust the park brake:

1. Position the park brake handle, 1, in the fullylowered, 0, position.

2. Raise the park brake handle to the second notchon the quadrant.

104

3. Loosen the forward jam nut, 1, as far as possibleon the cable housing, 2.

4. Pull the cable housing, 2, rearward until a20-pound (9 kg) resistance is felt. Hold inposition.

5. Tighten the rear jam nut, 3, until it contacts thebracket, 4. DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

6. Tighten both jam nuts, 1 and 3, against thebracket, 4.

7. Raise theparkbrakehandleandcheck for properadjustment.

105


3-62


OPERATION 63

CHECK WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUIDLEVELTo add fluid to the windshield washer reservoir:

1. Remove the filler cap, 1.

2. Add washer solvent until the reservoir, 2, is full.

3. Replace the filler cap.

IMPORTANT: In cold weather use a washer solventwith anti-freeze properties.

106

OPERATION 64

ADJUST THE HOOD GAS SPRINGSThe gas springs, 1, are installed at the factory in therear mount hole, 2. The gas springs can be installedin the frontmount hole to provide additional lift assist.

To reposition the gas spring:

1. Open the hood to the fully raised position.

CAUTIONFully support the hood before removing eithergas spring.

2. Support the hood with a sling or prop rod toprevent the hood from closing when a gas springis removed.

NOTE: Change the location of one gas spring thenchange the position of the other gas spring.

3. Unscrew the pivot ball, 3, from the mount hole.

4. Position the pivot ball in the desired mount holeand tighten to 54 N·m (40 ft.-lbs.).

5. Repeat for the other gas spring.

6. Remove the support sling or prop rod.

7. Check the operation of the gas springs.

1

2

34

107


3-63


OPERATION 65

3-POINT HITCH CALIBRATION CHECKSThree-point hitch calibration is necessary if:

1. Full travel from 0-99 on the TPM does not occurwith the height limit turned fully clockwise.

2. Cylinder rods are not fully retracted when theTPM indicates “0”.

3. The 3-point looses capture when the quadrantlever is moved rapidly during tractor operation

4. Any 3-point hitch components are changed ordisconnected.

When any of these conditions occur, the 3-point hitchrequires calibration.

EDC Calibration - Pre-Steps1. Place mix knob, 1, fully counterclockwise

(position mode).

2. Turn the height limit knob, 2, fully clockwise. Aflashing HL on 3-point hitch display during thecalibration pre-steps indicates the height limitknob is not turned fully clockwise.

2

1

108


3-64

3. Put RAISE/WORK switch, 1, in work position, 3.(2 = Raise position, 3 = Work position, 4 = lowerposition)

4. Start the tractor with the parking brake applied.

5. Move the quadrant lever fully forward.

6. Check lift cylinders for exposed chrome. Ifchrome is visible, use fender switches to lower3-point until cylinders are fully retracted.

NOTE: The RAISE/WORK switch must be cycled tothe raise position then work position before thequadrant lever will capture the hitch and allow you toproceed.

7. Slowly move quadrant lever rearward to full upposition, which captures the hitch and raises it tothe top of its range.

NOTE: Steps 1-7 allow the modules to establish thelimits of the rockshaft and quadrant sensors, (0-99).

3

2

4

109

EDC Valve Calibration1. To calibrate the 3-point hitch valve select mode

11 by:

a. holding the set up select switch, 1,(approximately 3 seconds) until a “beep” ishead from the alarm. The TPM display willindicate --- 1, 2, which means the EIC is atmode 1.

110

b. using the “DIGIT SET” switch, 1, (up arrow)advance to mode 11.

c. enter mode 11 by holding the SET/UPSELECT switch, 2, (approximately 3 sec-onds) until a “beep” is heard.

1 2

111


3-65

2. When “H1” appears, 1, advance to “H6” using theSET UP/SELECT switch, 2. 1

2

112

The “H6” calibration status, 1, should be “0”indicating the system is OK for valve calibration.

NOTE: If “0” does not appear in “H6” the system willnot calibrate. If “H6” indicates any other value exitmode 11 and repeat thePreSteps then verify systemstatus.

3. Exit mode 11 by depressing the E/M switch, 2,once to display hitch position.

4. Lower the hitch below the 3-point hitch positiondisplay of 60, then raise it above 60 but less than90. You will observe the hitch moving slightly atthis time. It will cycle up and down about oneposition count to find valve raise and lowerthresholds.

NOTE: The hitch will cycle up/down three or moretimes until three cycles are verified by themicrocontroller. This will take several minutes.

5. While the hitch is cycling up and down, entermode 11 and index to “H6”. The “H6” calibrationstatus should still be “0” indicating the system isOK for calibration.

1

2

6 11

113

When three cycles are verified by the microcon-troller, the status will change from “0” to “9”,1,showing the system performed 3 calibrationcycles.

6. Exit mode 11 by depressing the E/M switch, 2,twice and return to “NORMAL” display. Move thequadrant to full up (“99” will be on the TPMdisplay). Then move the quadrant to full down(“0” will be on the TPM display) and there shouldbe no chrome showing on the lift cylinders.

7. The 3-point hitch calibration is now complete.

2

69

11

114


3-66

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 66

BLEED THE FUEL SYSTEMTobleed the fuel systemuse the followingprocedure:

1. Loosen fuel line (1) at the injection pump.

2. Operate fuel lift pump piston (2) by hand until thefuel escaping is free from air bubbles.

3. Retighten fuel line (1) when fuel free of airbubbles escapes.

4. Continue pumping until the force neededremains more or less constant. This allows thefuel to be drawn into the injection pump.

1

2

115

5. Start the engine.

6. Run the engine at low idle until the engine runssmoothly.

IMPORTANT: Check the bleed screw after theengine starts to ensure there are no fuel leaks. Donot crank the starter continually for more than 30seconds at a time. Let the starter cool for twominutesbetween attempts.Injection System Bleeding

It may be necessary after injection pump removal orinjector removal to purge the high pressure lines ofair to allow the engine to start.

Injection System Bleeding

If the engine fails to start after several turns bleed thesystem using the following procedure:

1. “Crack” open in turn, starting at injector number 1,the nut (1) of each high pressure lines. Crank theengine on the starter motor to expel the air. With theaid of an assistant, tighten the injector nuts as theengine begins to fire.

CAUTIONDiesel fuel in the injection system is under highpressure and can penetrate the skin. Alwayswear protective gloves, safety glasses andclothing when working on the fuel injectionsystem. Failure to follow these instructions canresult in serious injury. If fluid is injected into theskin, obtain medical attention immediately organgrene may result.

116


3-67

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 67

FUSE REPLACEMENTPower is distributed from the battery to themain fusepanel, 1, to the main distribution panel, 2, and to theindividual circuits.

Automotive-style block fuses are used to protectcircuits from overload.

IMPORTANT: Locate and correct the cause of ablown fuse. DO NOT replace a blown fuse withanother of a different rating than specified.

IMPORTANT: Be sure the key switch is in the “Off”position when replacing a fuse.

1

2

117

Main Fuse Panel (MFP)The main fuse panel, 1, is located at the base of theright-hand console. To gain access to the fuses,release the tabs, 2, and remove the cover, 3.

118


3-68

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

The main fuse panel has eight fuse locations.

Refer to the table for fuse information and to identifythe circuit each protects.

FuseNo. Rating Color Circuit

1 40A Orange Main electro-hydraulic fuse

2 60A Red Main fuse I

3 40A Orange Main transmissionfuse

4 50A Red Main road lampfuse

5 50A Red Main work lampfuse

6 40A Orange Main accessoryfuse

7 40A Orange Main fuse II

8 40A Orange Main implementsocket fuse

60A

119

Main fuse locations


3-69

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANELThe main distribution panel is located behind thecover, 1, on the right-hand “B” pillar. To gain accessto the panel, release the latches, 2, and remove thecover.

The panel has thirty-two (32) fuse locations andtwenty (20) relay locations.

Refer to the table for fuse and relay informationincluding the circuit each controls.

RELAYS

RelayNo. Circuit

M1 Lower front and side work lamps

M2 Lower cab rear work lamps

M3 Upper cab rear work lamps

M4 Upper cab front work lamps

M5 Power take-off

M6 Transmission directional interrupt

M7 Brakes

M8 Cold start

M9 Accessory

M10 Auxiliary power #2

M11 Transmission power

M12 Auxiliary power #1

M13 Flasher module

M14 NASO/ISO turn signal, flasher convertermodule

M15 NASO/ISO turn signal, flasher convertermodule

M16 Fuel solenoid - engine power

M17 Implement power

M18 Remote valve electro-hydraulics

M19 Right hand trailer lights

M20 Left hand trailer lights

M21 Signal light relay




120


3-70

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

F1F2F3F4F5F6F7F8F9F10F11F12F13F14F15F16F17F18F19

F20

F21F22F23F24F25

F26F27F28F29F30F31F32

F33F34F35

15A25A15A20A20A15A15A20A15A15A15A5A25A15A7.5A10A20A7.5A20A

20A

15A5A5A5A10A

5A15A15A20A10A20A5A

15A10A20A

20001346

BlueClearBlueYellowYellowBlueBlueYellowBlueBlueBlueTanClearBlueBrownRedYellowBrownYellow

Yellow

BlueTanTanTanYellowREDTanBlueBlueYellowRedYellowTan

BlueRedYellow

Monitor socketClimate controlWasher/wiperFront/Mid work lampsLower cab rear work lampsUpper cab rear work lampsUpper cab front work lampsTrailer plug aux powerPark lampBrake lampCigar/horn/beaconDome lampRoad LampHazard lampMovable consoleAccessory SocketSeatRadio PowerTransmission shift controlsolenoids fuse #1Transmission shift controlsolenoids fuse #2RH console trans/PTO solenoidECU PowerRH consoleFront consoleControl module switchespower (VPWR)VCU powerTurn signalRoad lamp high beamMain fuse--electronic engineIgnition switchCold StartUnswitched power direct frombattery (KAPWR)Road Lamp low beamRemote valve electrohydraulicTrailer plug light power

Fuse No. Rating Color Circuit

MAIN DISTRIBUTION PANEL

121


3-71

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 68

REPLACE HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY BULBS

IMPORTANT: All headlights have halogen bulbs.Never touchahalogenbulbwith your fingers.Naturaloil in the skin may cause the bulb to fail prematurely.Always use a clean cloth or tissue when handlinghalogen bulbs.

To replace a bulb:

1. Disconnect the wire harness connector, 1, fromthe bulb assembly, 2.

2. Rotate the bulb assembly, 2, counterclockwiseuntil it disengages from the housing, 3.

3. Remove the bulb assembly.

4. Install the new bulb assembly in the housing.

5. Rotate clockwise until the bulb assembly locks inthe housing.

6. Connect the wire harness connector.

7. If more than one bulb assembly was replaced,check operation of lights with light switch toensure harness was reconnected correctly.

122

OPERATION 69

REPLACE WORK SEALED BEAM UNITS

1. Remove the retaining screws, 1.

2. Pull the beam unit, 2, from the case, 3.

3. Disconnect the connectors, 4.

4. Connect the new beam unit to the connectors.

5. Install the new beam unit into the case.

6. Install the retaining screws.

123


3-72

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 70

REPLACE THE FENDER MOUNTED TURNSIGNAL AND STOP LIGHT/ PARKINGLIGHT BULBSThe turn signal bulbs, 3, are behind the amberlenses. The stop light and parking light bulbs, 2, arebehind the red lenses on the rear fenders.

To replace the bulbs:

1. Remove the retaining screws, 1.

2. Remove the lens.

3. Remove the failed bulb by pressing the bulb inand turning it counterclockwise.

4. Install a new bulb by pushing the bulb in andturning it clockwise until it locks in place.

5. Replace the lens and tighten the retainingscrews, while being careful to fit lens properlyinto the rubber gasket base.

124

OPERATION 71

REPLACE ROOF MOUNTED TURN SIGNALBULBSTo replace the bulb:

1. Remove the retaining screws, 1, then remove thelens, 2.

2. Remove the bulb, 3, by pressing the bulb in andturning it counterclockwise.

3. Install a new bulb by pushing the bulb in andturning it clockwise until it locks in place.

4. Replace the lens and tighten the two screws.

IMPORTANT: When replacing the lens, do notovertighten the retaining screws.

NOTE: The lens must fit inside the rubber seal, 4, toensure a waterproof fit.

125


3-73

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 72

ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENT CLUSTER(EIC) BULB REPLACEMENTTo replace a bulb:

1. Loosen the two retaining screws, 1, then pull theEIC away from the dash.

126

2. Disconnect the electrical connector, 1, andground wire, 2, from the rear of the EIC.

3. Remove the rear cover retaining screws, 3, andremove the rear cover.

127

4. Remove the failed bulb assembly, 1, by rotating1/4 turn counterclockwisewith a small screwdriv-er. Install a new bulb.

5. Reinstall the rear cover.

6. Install the electrical connector and ground wire.

7. Install the EIC in the dash and tighten the tworetaining screws.

128


3-74

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

OPERATION 73

PREPARATION FOR TRACTOR STORAGEBefore storing the tractor at the end of the season orfor an extended period, the following precautionsshould be taken:

1. Clean the tractor.

2. Drain the engine and transmission/rear axle andrefill with clean oil.

3. Drain the fuel tanks and pour approximately twogallons of special calibrating fuel into the tank.Run the engine for at least 10 minutes to ensurecomplete distribution of the calibrating fuelthroughout the injection system. See the nextitem before running the engine.

4. Check the radiator coolant level. If the coolant iswithin 200 hours of the next change, drain, flushand refill the system.Run the engine for one hourto disperse the coolant throughout the system.

5. Using the tractor hydraulic system in PositionControl, raise the lift linkage and support the liftarms in the raised position.

6. Lubricate all grease fittings and lightly coat allexposed hydraulic piston rods with petroleumjelly, e.g., power steering cylinder rams, lift rams,spool valves, etc.

7. Remove the batteries and store in a warm, dryplace. Recharge periodically to a minimum of12.6 volts. Do not allow voltage to fall below 12.4volts.

NOTE:Donot store the tractor formore than 30 dayswith the batteries connected. The normal key-offcurrent drain of the electrical system modules willcompletely discharge the batteries. This can causepermanent battery damage. If the batteries are leftconnected during storage, charge the batteries dailyusing a low-rate charger connected to a timer. Forshort term tractor sotrage, removal of the5aMPKAM(Keep Alive Memory) fuse will minimize key offcuurent draw. This will result in loss of radioaccessory memory requiring the clock and channeltuner buttons to be reprogrammed. For short termtractor storage, removal of the 5 AMP KAM (KeepAlive Memory) fuse will minimize key off currentdraw. This will result in loss of radio/accessorymemory requiring the radio clock and channel tunerfeatures to be reprogrammed.

8. Raise the tractor and place supports under theaxles to take the weight off the tires.

9. Cover the exhaust pipe opening.

OPERATION 74

PREPARING THE TRACTOR FOR USEAFTER STORAGEBefore placing the tractor in service after anextended storage period, perform the following:

1. Inflate the tires to the correct pressure and lowerthe tractor to the ground.

2. Refill the fuel tanks.

3. Check the radiator coolant level.

4. Check all oil levels.

5. Install fully charged batteries.

6. Remove the exhaust pipe covering.

7. Prime the engine oil system as detailed in steps9 through 12 of “Operation 31.”

IMPORTANT: Priming the engine oil systemprovides lubrication to the turbocharger and enginebefore starting which will extend engine life.

8. Start the engine and check that all instrumentsand controls function correctly. Using the tractorhydraulic system in Position Control, fully raisethe lift linkage and remove the supports.

9. Drive the tractor without a load to ensure that itis operating satisfactorily.

4-1

SECTION 4 - TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING AND FAULT FINDINGINTRODUCTIONThe following information is intended as a guide toassist in identifying and correcting possible tractormalfunctions and fault conditions.

Information is divided into three headings:

OPERATOR PROMPTSFAULT CODESSYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

OPERATOR PROMPTSOperator prompts, 1, indicate that an operationalprocedure has been performed out of sequence.The “prompts” are meant to advise the operator totake correct action.

The following flashing prompts will be displayed onthe Electronic Instrument Cluster (EIC) gear shiftdisplay.

70-550-357

1

PROMPT CAUSE CORRECTION

F Gear shift lever in forward while starting Return shift lever to neutral

R Gear shift lever in reverse while starting Return shift lever to neutral

P Park brake applied when gear selected Return shift lever to neutral and releasepark brake

d Gear shift lever in downshift when starting Return shift lever to neutral

U Gear shift lever in up shift while starting Return shift lever to neutral


4-2

FAULT CODESA fault code indicates that there has been amalfunction in the tractor electrical system. Duringnormal operation, the READ YOUR MANUALsymbol, 1, will be displayed in the tractorperformance monitor (TPM) if a fault has occurred.Fault codes can be retrieved and view using theprocedure detailed in “Electronic Instrument Cluster- Operator Calibration” section.

Fault codes, 2, will be displayed as a flashing threedigit number preceded by the letter “F”. The codewillidentify the circuit in which the malfunction hasoccurred, along with the type of malfunction such asshort circuit, open circuit, etc.

The following chart identifies the system thatcorresponds to the range of fault code numbers.

NOTE: Not all numbers in a range are used.

Contact your authorized dealer for assistance incorrecting a fault code.

FAULT CODENUMBERS SYSTEMF000-F099 Electronic Draft Control

F100-F199 Right-hand Controls

F200-F299 Electronic InstrumentCluster

F300-F399 Electronic TransmissionControl

F400-F499 Engine

70-550-358

2

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

The following information lists possible problems, their cause and corrective action. The systems are listed asfollows:

ENGINETRANSMISSIONELECTRICALHYDRAULIC

3-POINT HITCHBRAKESCAB


4-3

ENGINE

PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSE CORRECTION

Engine will not start, or starts hard Incorrect starting procedure

Low or no fuel

Air in fuel lines

Incorrect engine oil viscosity

Incorrect fuel for operatingtemperature

Contaminated fuel system

Clogged sedimenter

Clogged fuel filter

Malfunctioning fuel injector(s)

Malfunctioning fuel solenoid orsolenoid relay

Review starting procedures

Check fuel level

Bleed fuel system

Use correct viscosity oil

Use correct type fuel fortemperature conditions

Clean system

Clean sedimenter

Replace filter element

See your authorized dealer


Engine runs rough and/or stalls Clogged sedimenter or fuel filter

Contaminated fuel system

Fuel solenoid not properlyadjusted


Clean sedimenter and replacefilter

Clean system



Engine does not develop fullpower

Engine overloaded

Air cleaner restricted

Clogged sedimenter or fuel filter

Incorrect type of fuel

Engine overheated

Low engine operating temperature

Implement incorrectly adjusted

Incorrect valve clearance


High idle speed is low

Shift to lower gear or reduce load

Service air cleaner

Clean sedimenter and replacefilter

Use correct fuel

See Engine Overheats

Check thermostats

See implement operator’s manual

Check and adjust

Have authorized dealer checkinjectors



4-4


Engine knocks Low oil level

Low oil pressure

Engine overheated

Add correct grade of oil


See Engine Overheats

Low engine operatingtemperature

Malfunctioning thermostat(s) Replace thermostat(s)

Low oil pressure Low oil level

Wrong grade or viscosity oil

Add oil as required

Drain and refill with correct gradeand viscosity oil

Drain and replace perspecifications

Excessive oil consumption Engine oil level too high

Incorrect viscosity oil

External oil leaks

Plugged breather tube vent filter

Reduce oil level

Use correct viscosity

Repair leaks

Replace vent filter

Engine overheats Dirty radiator core

Excessive engine load

Low engine oil level

Low coolant level

Faulty radiator cap

Loose or worn fan belt

Cooling system plugged

Malfunctioning thermostat(s)

Hose connection leaking

Malfunctioning temperature gaugeor sender

Clean

Shift to a lower gear or reduce load

Add oil as required.

Fill coolant recovery tank. Checkcooling system for leaks.

Replace cap

Check automatic tensioner.Replace belt if worn

Flush cooling system

Check thermostats

Tighten hose connection


Excessive fuel consumption Incorrect type of fuel

Clogged or dirty air cleaner

Engine overloaded

Incorrect valve clearance

Implement incorrectly adjusted

Low engine temperature

Excessive ballast

Fuel injection nozzles dirty

Use correct fuel

Service air cleaner

Shift to lower gear or reduce load

Check and adjust

See implement operator’s manualfor proper operation

Check thermostats

Adjust ballast to current load

Haveauthorizeddealer service theinjectors


4-5

TRANSMISSION


Tractor won’t move after starting Flashing “F” “R”“P” “U”or “d”

Transmissionoperationperformedout of sequence

Return shift control lever to neutraland release parking brake. See“Operator Prompts.”

Poor inching control when usinginching pedal

Transmission clutches out ofcalibration

Recalibrate transmission clutchesF1, F2 and R

Transmission will not operate Fault code displayed indicatingmalfunction

See “Fault Codes ON/OFF” andcontact your authorized dealer

Low transmission oil pressure Low oil supply

Clogged transmission oil filter

Fill system with oil

Replace filter


4-6

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


Electrical system is inoperative Loose or corroded batteryconnections

Sulfated batteries

Clean and tighten connections

Check battery open circuit voltagefor 12.6 volts minimum. Checkelectrolyte level and specificgravity.

See battery storage, page 3-74

Starter speed low and enginecranks slowly

Loose or corroded connections

Low battery output

Incorrect viscosity engine oil

Clean and tighten looseconnections



Use correct viscosity oil fortemperature conditions

Starter inoperative Transmission shift lever in gear

Loose or corroded connections

Dead batteries

Place shift lever in neutral

Clean and tighten looseconnections

Charge or replace batteries.

Charge indicator lamp stays onwith engine running

Low engine idle speed

Loose belt

Malfunctioning battery(ies)

Malfunctioning alternator

Increase idle speed

Check automatic belt tensioner


Have authorized dealer checkalternator

Batteries will not charge Loose or corroded terminalconnections

Sulfated batteries

Loose or worn belt

Clean and tighten connections



Check automatic belt tensioner.Replace belt if required.

Charge indicator flashingindicating excessive chargingvoltage

Malfunctioning alternator Have authorized dealer checkalternator


4-7

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM


Complete hydraulic system doesnot operate

Low oil level

Restricted hydraulic filter

Restricted charge pump suctionscreen

Blown fuse - bad relay

Malfunctioning hydraulic system

Fill system

Replace hydraulic filter

Clean screen

Replace fuses and or relay


Hydraulic oil overheats Oil level low or high

Oil cooler or radiator plugged

Blocked oil filter element

Flow control improperly adjusted

Hydraulic load or orbit motor notmatched to tractor

Adjust oil level

Clean oil cooler and radiator

Replace filter

Adjust flow control to lower flowposition


Hoses will not couple Incorrect male connectors Replace connectors with ISO-(1/2″) standard connectors avail-able from your authorized dealer

Remote attachment operates toofast or too slow

Flow control not properly adjusted Adjust flow control

Remote attachment does notoperate

No power to EHR system

Fuse Blown

Hoses not completely connected

Flow checking in couplers

Load exceed system capacity

Ensure power switch is on (raised)position: see engagement switchpage 2--79


Attach hoses correctly

Cycle remote switches. If problempersists replace male couplers.

Reduce load or use correct sizecylinder


4-8

3-POINT HITCH


Hitch does not move when controllever is moved

Hitch not in phase with controllever

Work/raise switch in raise position

Malfunction in lever position orhitch position sensor

Excessive load on hitch

Height limit control not properlyadjusted

Capture the hitch

Position switch in thework position


Reduce load

Adjust upper height limit control

Rear fender raise/lower switchesdo not function

Work/raise switch in raise position

Control lever not positioned fullforward

Position switch in thework position

Push lever full forward

Hitch does not fully raise Upper height limit control notcorrectly set

Adjust height limit control

Hitch drops slowly Drop rate control not properlyadjusted

Adjust drop control

Hitch slow to respond to draft load Position/draft mix control notproperly adjusted

Drop rate too slow

Implement not working properly

Adjust position/draft mix control

Adjust drop rate control

See implement operator’s manual

Hitch over responsive to draft load Position/draft mix control notproperly adjusted

Adjust position/draft mix control

Hitch status light flashescontinually

Malfunctioninghitchcomponent(s) See “Fault Codes ON/OFF” andyour authorized dealer


4-9

BRAKES


Spongypedalwithenginestopped Air in system See your authorized dealer

Pedal bottoms with enginestopped

Brake piston seal leaking

Worn brake, discs

Brake bleeder not sealing

Leakage in brake valve(s)





Excessivepedal travel or kickbackwith engine running

Leakage in brake valve

Air in system

Brake piston seal leaking

Brake bleeder not sealing






4-10

CAB


Dust enters the cab Improper seal around filterelement

Plugged filter

Defective filter

Excessive air leak(s)

Check seal condition

Clean or replace filter

Replace filter

Seal air leak(s)

Pressurizer air flow low Plugged filter or pluggedrecirculation filter

Heater core or evaporator coreplugged

Clean or replace filter(s)


Air conditioner does not cool Condenser plugged

Low refrigerant

Belt slipping or damaged

Heater control turned on

Clean radiator, oil cooler, andcondenser

Check sight glass for bubbles.Contact your authorized dealer.

Check automatic belt tensionerand belt condition

Turn temperaturecontrol knob fullycounterclockwise for maximumcooling

5-1

SECTION 5 - SPECIFICATIONS

The specifications on the following pages are given for your information andguidance.For further information concerning the tractor consult yourauthorizeddealer.

Our policy is one of continuous improvement, and the right to change prices,specifications or equipment at any time without notice is reserved.

All data given in this book is subject to production variations. Dimensions andweights are approximate only. For exact information about any particulartractor, please consult your authorized dealer.


5-2

GENERAL DIMENSIONS 2145 2160 2180 2210(Two wheel drive)

Height to the Top of Cab mm 3080 3080 3080 N/A(in) (121.3) (121.3) (121.3) N/A

Height to the Top of Exhaust mm 3159 3159 3159 N/A(in) (124.4) (124.4) (124.4) N/A

Minimum Width mm 2456 2456 2456 N/A(in) (96.7) (96.7) (96.7) N/A

Minimum Ground ClearanceDrawbar mm 471 471 471 N/A

(in) (18.6) (18.6) (18.6) N/A

Front Axle mm 507 507 507 N/A(in) (19.9) (19.9) (19.9) N/A

Track SettingFront Axle Minimum mm 1575 1575 1575 N/A

(in) (62) (62) (62) N/A

Front Axle Maximum mm 2210 2210 2210 N/A(in) (87) (87) (87) N/A

Rear Axle Minimum mm 1530 1530 1530 N/A(in) (60.3) (60.3) (60.3) N/A

Rear Axle Maximum(96″) Hub Out mm 2738 2639 2639 N/A

(in) (107.8) (103.9) (103.9) N/A

(112″) Hub Out mm 3144 3046 3046 N/A(in) (123.8) (119.9) (119.9) N/A

(120″) Hub Out mm 3251 3251 N/A(in) (128.0) (128.0) N/A

Overall Length to theEnd of Lower Links

Unballasted mm 4997 4997 4997 N/A(in) (196.7) (196.7) (196.7) N/A)

Ballasted mm 5396 5396 5396 N/A- Small Weights (in) (212.4) (212.4) (212.4) N/A

- Large Weights mm 5639 5639 5639 N/A(in) (222.0) (222.0) (222.0) N/A

To Edge of Rear Tire mm 5273 5273 5273 N/A- Large Weights (in) (207.6) (207.6) (207.6) N/A

Wheelbase: Standard mm 3005 3005 3005 N/A(in) (118.3) (118.3) (118.3) N/A

Turning Ratio mm 2375 2375 2375 2375(in) (93.5) (93.5) (93.5) (93.5)

NOTE: The above dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with the tire sizes as shown:Front - 2WD 14L - 16.1 14L - 16.1 14L - 16.1 N/A

Rear 480/80R42 480/80R42 480/80R42 N/A(18.4R42) (18.4R42) (18.4R42)


5-3

GENERAL DIMENSIONS 2145 2160 2180 2210(Four wheel drive)

Height to the Top of Cab mm 3080 3080 3080 3080(in) (121.3) (121.3) (121.3) (121.3)

Height to the Top of Exhaust mm 3159 3159 3159 3159(in) (124.4) (124.4) (124.4) (124.4)

Minimum Width mm 2456 2456 2456 2456(in) (96.7) (96.7) (96.7) (96.7)

Minimum Ground ClearanceDrawbar mm 471 471 471 471

(in) (18.6) (18.6) (18.6) (18.6)Front Axle mm 432 432 432 432

(in) (17) (17) (17) (17)

Track SettingFront Axle Minimum mm 1525 1525 1525 1525

(in) (60.0) (60.0) (60.0) (60.0)Front Axle Maximum mm 2235 2235 2235 2235

(in) (88) (88) (88) (88)Rear Axle Minimum mm 1530 1530 1530 1530

(in) (60.3) (60.3) (60.3) (60.3)Rear Axle Maximum(112″) Hub Out mm 3144 3046 3046 3046

(in) (123.8) (119.9) (119.9) (119.9)(120″) Hub Out mm 3251 3251 3251

(in) (128.0) (128.0) (128.0)

Overall Length to Endof Lower Links

Unballasted mm 4997 4997 4997 4997(in) (196.7) (196.7) (196.7) (196.7)

Ballasted- Small Weights mm 5396 5396 5396 5396

(in) (212.4) (212.4) (212.4) (212.4)- Large Weights mm 5639 5639 5639 5639

(in) (222.0) (222.0) (222.0) (222.0)To Edge of Rear Tire mm 5273 5273 5273 5273- Large Weights (in) (207.6) (207.6) (207.6) (207.6)

Wheelbase:Standard Steer mm 3005 3005 3005 3005

(in) (118.3) (118.3) (118.3) (118.3)UltraSteer mm 3115 3115 3115 3115

(in) (122.6) (122.6) (122.6) (122.6)

Turning radius:Standard mm 3353 3353 3353 3353Without Brakes (in) (132) (132) (132) (132)UltraSteerWithout Brakes mm 2134 2134 2134 2134

(in) (84) (84) (84) (84)

NOTE: The above dimensions are based on standard tractors fitted with the tire sizes as shown:

Front - 4WD 16.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R28 16.9R28

Rear 480/80R42 480/80R42 480/80R42 480/80R42

(18.4R42) (18.4R42) (18.4R42) (18.4R42)


5-4

2145 2160 2180 2210

WEIGHT(Two wheel drive)

Total with Fuel, Oil and Coolant kg 7180 7858 7858 N/A(lbs) (15829) (17324) (17324) N/A

On Front Axle kg 2080 2235 2235 N/A(lbs) (4586) (4927) (4927) N/A

On Rear Axle kg 5100 5623 5623 N/A(lbs) (11244) (12397) (12397) N/A

WEIGHT(Four wheel drive STD)

Total with Fuel, Oil and Coolant kg 8140 8818 8818 8818(lbs) (17946) (19440) (19440) (19440)

On Front Axle kg 2934 3089 3089 3089(lbs) (6468) (6810) (6810) (6810)

On Rear Axle kg 5206 5729 5729 5729(lbs) (11477) (12630) (12630) (12630)

WEIGHT(Four wheel drive UltraSteer)

Total with Fuel, Oil and Coolant kg 8312 8990 8990 8990(lbs) (18325) (19820) (19820) (19820)

On Front Axle kg 3106 3261 3261 3261(lbs) (6848) (7189) (7189) (7189)

On Rear Axle kg 5206 5729 5729 5729(lbs) (11477) (12630) (12630) (12630)

Additional Factory or Dealer Installed Accessories

(Hydraulic Components) kg (lbs)

Add 4th Remote Valve 9.07 (20)Delete Electronic Draft Control -7.25 (-16)Delete 3-Point Hitch -376.5 (-830)HydraFlow Plus Ready 27.2 (60)HydraFlow Plus Equipped 47.6 (105)

(Axle and Drive Components) kg (lbs)

(112″) Axles 26.3 (58)(120″) Axles 34.0 (75)Front Weight Bracket L/UltraSteer 97.0 (214)Front Weight Bracket W/UltrarSteer 95.7 (211)Front Weight Package 12X40 kg (12x88 lbs) 499.8 (1102)Front Weight Package 22X40 kg (22x88 lbs) 914 (2015)Front Weight Package 16X110 kg (16x242 lbs) 1747 (3853)Rear Weight Package 10X39 kg (10x85 lbs) 395.9 (873)Rear Weight Package 2X225 kg (2x450 lbs) 413.6 (912)Front Fenders 39.0 (86)Duals and Hubs (2000)

NOTE: The above weights are based on the standard build units and should be used as a guide only.


5-5

2145 2160 2180 2210

ENGINE

Max Power at Rated Speed PTO HP 145 160 180 210(Din HP) (170) (190) (210) (240)

Rated Speed RPM 2100 2100 2100 2100

PTO Speed at Rated Speed RPM 1103 1103 1103 1103

Low Idle Speed RPM ± 25 900 900 900 900

High Idle Speed RPM ± 25 2285 2285 2285 2285

Aspiration Turbo Turbo Turbo Turbo

Intercooled Yes Yes Yes Yes

Number of Cylinders 6 6 6 6

Bore mm 112 112 112 112(in) (4.4) (4.4) (4.4) (4.4)

Stroke mm 127 127 127 127(in) (5.0) (5.0) (5.0) (5.0)

Displacement L 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5(in3) (456) (456) (456) (456)

Compression Ratio 17.5:1 17.5:1 17.5:1 17.5:1

Firing order 153624 153624 153624 153624

Valve Tappet Clearance (cold)Intake mm 0.406 0.406 0.406 0.406

(in) (0.016) (0.016) (0.016) (0.016)

Exhaust mm 0.483 0.483 0.483 0.483(in) (0.019) (0.019) (0.019) (0.019)

FUEL SYSTEM

Injection Pump Type (Inline) Bosch Bosch Bosch BoschP 3000 P 3000 P 3000 P 3000

Timing BTDC Degrees 0 0 0 0

Injector Cracking Pressure bar 300 300 300 300(PSI) (4400) (4400) (4400) (4400)

Fuel Cooler No No Yes Yes


5-6

2145 2160 2180 2210

COOLING SYSTEM

Type Pressurized with full flow bypass, recovery tank andfilter with conditioner

Thermostats 2 2 2 2

Begin to Open °C 81 81 81 81(°F) (178) (178) (178) (178)

Fully Open °C 95 95 95 95(°F) (203) (203) (203) (203)

Radiator Pressure Cap bar 0.9 0.9 0.9 0.9(PSI) (13) (13) (13) (13)

Viscous Fan Yes Yes Yes Yes

Number of Blades 8 8 8 8

Fan Diameter mm 686 686 686 686(in) (27) (27) (27) (27)

TRANSMISSION

Type 18x9 Powershift with power shuttle

POWER TAKE-OFF

Type Independent PTO

Engine Speed for 540 RPM ERPM 1880 NA NA NAPTO Speed

Engine Speed for 1000 RPM ERPM 1900 1900 1900 1900PTO Speed

DRAWBAR

Drawbar pin dia mm 38 38 38) 38(in) (1.5) (1.5) (1.5) (1.5)

Drawbar clevis throat mm 92 92 92 92(in) (3.6) (3.6) (3.6) (3.6)

Distance from hitch point to PTO shaft

Rear drawbar hole mm 355 406 406 406(in) (14) (16) (16) (16)

Center drawbar hole mm 406 508 508 508(in) (16) (20) (20) (20)

Forward drawbar hole mm 508 609 609 609(in) (20) (24) (24) (24)


5-7

Maximum Static Downward Load 2145 2160 2180 2210

Rear drawbar hole kg 2449 2750 2750 2750(lbs) (5400) (6000) (6000) (6000)

Center drawbar hole kg 2086 2131 2131 2131(lbs) (4600) (4700) (4700) (4700)

Forward drawbar hole kg 1587 1770 1770 1770(lbs) (3500) (3900) (3900) (3900)

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Type Closed center load sensing (CCLS)

Nominal System Pressure bar ± 3.0 200 200 200 200(PSI ± 50) (2900) (2900) (2900) (2900)

Hydraulic Pump Variable displacement axial piston pump

Flow at Rated Engine SpeedStandard L/min 117 117 117 117

(US gal/min) (31.0) (31.0) (31.0) (31.0)

HydraFlow Plus (option) L/min 208 208 208 208(US gal/min) (55.0) (55.0) (55.0) (55.0)

Remote Control ValvesMax Flow Capacity atOne CouplerStandard Pump L/min ± 8 102 102 102 102

(US gal/min± 2) (27) (27) (27) (27))

HydraFlow Plus Pump L/min ± 8 102 102 102 102(US gal/min± 2) (27) (27) (27) (27)

THREE-POINT LIFT

Linkage Cat III Cat III Cat III Cat III

Category Adaptor Yes Yes Yes Yes

Lift Capacity kg 5670 5670 5670 6804(lbs) (12500) (12500) (12500) (15000)

BRAKES

Type Inboard Inboard Inboard Inboardwet wet wet wet

Disc Diameter OD-ID mm 368 - 305 368 - 305 368 - 305 368 - 305(in) (14.5 - 12.0) (14.5 - 12.0) (14.5 - 12.0) (14.5 - 12.0)

No. of Discs (total) 4 4 4 4

Self Adjusting yes yes yes yes

Parking Brake Rear axle - oil immersed 3 disc


5-8

2145 2160 2180 2210

STEERING

Type Hydrostatic with tilt and telescopic steering wheel

Maximum Pressure bar +7/-0 172 172 172 N/ATwo Wheel Drive (PSI +100/-0) (2500) (2500) (2500) N/A

Maximum Pressure bar ±+7/-0 186 186 186 186Four Wheel Drive (PSI +100/-0) (2700) (2700) (2700) (2700)

Front Wheel Toe-inTwo Wheel Drive mm 6.3 - 12.7 6.3 - 12.7 6.3 - 12.7 N/A

(in) (0.25 - 0.5) (0.25 - 0.5) (0.25 - 0.5) N/A

Four Wheel Drive mm 0.0 - 6.3 0.0 - 6.3 0.0 - 6.3 0.0 - 6.3(in) (0.0 - 0.25) (0.0 - 0.25) (0.0 - 0.25) (0.0 - 0.25)

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

Batteries Required 2 2 2 2

CCA Rating 950 950 950 950

Alternator Heavy-Duty 12v - 130 amp

Starter Motor Positive engagement, solenoid operated6.0 HP (4.5 kw)

MAXIMUM TRACTOR OPERATING ANGLE DEGREES

Front End Up 25 25 25 25Rear End Up 25 25 25 25Right Side Up 25 25 25 25Left Side Up 25 25 25 25


5-9

2145 2160 2180 2210

CAPACITIES

Main Fuel Tank L 246 246 246 246(US gal) (65) (65) (65) (65)

Auxiliary Fuel Tank L 170 170 170 170(US gal) (45) (45) (45) (45)

Total Fuel Capacity L 416 416 416 416(US gal) (110) (110) (110) (110)

Cooling System L 25 25 26.4 26.4(US gal) (6.6) (6.6) (7) (7)

Engine Oil (with filter) L 21.0 21.0 21.0 21.0(US gal) (5.5) (5.5) (5.5) (5.5)

Four Wheel Drive Front Hubs(amount shown is for one hub only)

L 5 5 5 5(US qts) (5.3) (5.3) (5.3) (5.3)

Four Wheel Drive Differential CaseL 14.5 14.5 14.5 14.5(US qts) (15.3) (15.3) (15.3) (15.3)

Transmission/*Rear Axle/Hydraulic System

L 117 140 140 140(US gal) (30.9) (36.9) (36.9) (36.9)

NOTE: Whenoperating remote cylinders, the rear axle oil levelwill be affected.When toppingup the rearaxle to accommodate the oil requirement of remote cylinders, no more than 38 liters (10 US gallons)should be added to bring the oil level up to the full mark on the dipstickwhen all rams are fully extended.

Remote cylinderswith a total oil capacity of up to 23 liters (6 USgallons)may be connected to the tractorhydraulic system without adding oil, provided the tractor is being operated on level ground.

*NOTE: Normal oil change capacities may be 19-23 liters (5-6 gallons) less than these factory fillcapacities. This difference is that oil remains in hydraulic tubes, passages and wet areas within thetransmission and rear axle center sections.

LUBRICANTSArea Specification

Four Wheel Drive Differential All season ag. transmission Hydraulic oil----See NOTE below

Four Wheel Drive Front Hubs All season ag. transmission Hydraulic oil----See NOTE below

Front Wheel Bearings (2 WD) andFront Hub Swivel Bearings (4 WD) Lithium Base EP High Temperature with molyLubrication Fittings Lithium Base EP High Temperature with moly

Transmission/Rear Axle All season agricultural transmissionHydraulic oil----SeeNOTE below

Engine API CF-4


5-10

NOTE:

Lubricant brand equivalency chart for all season agricultural transmission hydraulic oil:

BRAND Imperial Oil

Esso

Shell Texaco Amoco Petro--

Canada

Exxon Mobil

SPECIFICATION Hydraul 56 Donax TD TDH 2016 (USA)

01055 (Can)

Duratran 424

ENGINE LUBRICANTIt is recommended that an oil whichmeets API service category CF-4 (preferred), CF-4/SF or CF-4/SG be used.If API CF-4 oils are not available, the API CE or CE/SF or CE/SG category may be used. For low temperatures-18° C (below 0° F), an SAE 5W-30 SG/CD may be used.

NOTE : Engines are filledwith 10W-30 oil at the factory. The oil should be changed after the first 50 hoursof operation.

Selecting the Right Viscosity for Your Climate

To choose the right viscosity grade, you must consider the temperature in which you will operate your vehicle.If you regularly operate in temperatures that are consistently above -12° C (10° F), use SAE 15W-40 oil. If youregularly operate in temperatures that are below -18° C (0° F), use SAE 5W30 and change oil and filter every150 hours. Select the proper viscosity grade to correspond with the ambient temperature range shown in thefollowing chart.

IMPORTANT: Using oil quality and/or viscosity grades other than those recommended may result in enginedamage.

-25° C -18° C -12° C 15° C

>< SAE 5W-30SAE 15W-40 (Perferred)

SAE 10W-30

>>

<<

(-13° F) (0° F) (10° F) (60° F)

OIL CHANGE INTERVAL

NOTE: Engines are filled with 10W-30 oil at the factory. The oil should be changed after the first 50 hoursof operation.

The engine oil change interval is 300 hours under average operating conditions; however, locally available fuelmay have a high sulphur content, in which case adjust the oil change period as follows:

Sulphur Content Oil Change Period

Below 0.5% Normal0.5 - 1.0% Half the normal1.0 - 1.3% One quarter normal

The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is not recommended.

Engines operating in temperatures below -12°C (10° F) should have the oil and filter changed every 150 hoursof operation.


5-11

DIESEL FUEL

Use a high quality number 1-D or number 2-D diesel fuel as listed in the chart.

Temperature Fuel Cetane(min)

Sulphur Content(max)

Below -7°C (20° F) No. 1-D 40* 0.30%

Above -7°C (20° F) No. 2-D 40 0.50%

* When continually operating at low temperatures or high altitude, a minimum cetane of 45 is required. Usingdiesel fuel with a sulphur content above 0.5% requires more frequent oil changes, as detailed in the “Engine Oil”section.

The use of fuel with a sulphur content above 1.3% is not recommended.

NOTE:When longperiodsof idlingor coldweather conditionsbelow0°C (32°F) are encounteredorwhencontinuously operating at an altitude above 1524 m (5,000 ft.) use number 1-D fuel.

ENGINE COOLANT

Use an engine coolant that contains Propylene Glycol or Ethylene Glycol. Mix with an equal amount of cleanwater.

Change coolant every 2400 hours or 24 months (whichever occurs first).

Change coolant filter every 1200 hours or 12 months (whichever occurs first).

NOTE: In order to reduce deposits and corrosion, water used in the cooling system should not exceedthe following limits:

Total hardness 300 parts per million

Chlorides 100 parts per million

Sulphates 100 parts per million

ROAD SPEEDS

The following charts show the road speeds for tractors fittedwith 18.4 - 42 rear tires. If the rear tires of your tractorare of a different size, multiply the road speeds shown in the printed charts by the following conversion factors.

NOTE: For your convenience, a blank chart follows the printed charts so you may insert your owncalculated road speeds.

Tire Size 14.9 - 46 18.4 - 46 20.8 - 38 20.8 - 42 710/70R38

Conversion Factor 0.998 1.056 0.984 1.041 1.032

EXAMPLE:

From the following table with 18.4 - 42 tires - locate the speed for gear ratio F16 at 2100ERPM - A forward speedof 29.9 KPH (18.55 MPH) listed.

To calculate the speed with 14.9 x 46 rear tire for the same gear ratio and engine speed use the followingformulas:

29.9 KPH (18.51 MPH) x 0.998 (conversion factor) = 29.9 KPH (18.51 MPH)

NOTE: To determine creeper speedsmultiply the ground speed for each gear listed in the ground speedchart or calculated ground speed by 0.10.

Example: 0.10 x 1.98 KPH (1.23 MPH) = 0.198 kph (0.123 MPH)


5-12

GROUND SPEED: 2145 WITH 18X9 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION (18.4 - 42 TIRES)

FORWARD GEARS

Gear Ratio 1500 engine RPM 1900 engine RPM 2100 engine RPM

KPH (MPH) KPH (MPH) KPH (MPH)

REVERSE GEARS

F1 1.88 (1.17) 2.38 (1.48) 2.64 (1.64)

F2 2.23 (1.38) 2.82 (1.75) 3.11 (1.94)

F3 2.60 (1.62) 3.29 (2.06) 3.65 (2.27)

F4 2.99 (1.85) 3.78 (2.35) 4.18 (2.59)

F5 3.53 (2.19) 4.47 (2.78) 4.94 (3.06)

F6 4.13 (2.56) 5.23 (3.25) 5.77 (3.59)

F7 4.86 (3.02) 6.16 (3.82) 6.80 (4.23)

F8 5.74 (3.56) 7.27 (4.51) 8.04 (5.00)

F9 6.71 (4.18) 8.51 (5.29) 9.40 (5.85)

F10 7.80 (4.85) 9.88 (6.14) 10.92 (6.79)

F11 9.22 (5.73) 11.68 (7.26) 12.91 (8.02)

F12 10.80 (6.69) 13.67 (8.49) 15.11 (9.39)

F13 12.35 (7.68) 15.65 (9.73) 17.30 (10.76)

F14 14.61 (9.08) 18.50 (11.50) 20.45 (12.71)

F15 17.09 (10.62) 21.65 (13.46) 23.93 (14.87)

F16 20.12 (12.50) 25.49 (15.83) 28.17 (17.50)

F17 23.78 (14.78) 30.12 (18.72) 33.29 (20.69)

F18 27.82 (17.29) 35.24 (21.90) 38.95 (24.21)

R2 2.29 (1.42) 2.89 (1.80) 3.20 (1.99)

R3 2.70 (1.68) 3.42 (2.12) 3.78 (2.35)

R4 3.16 (1.96) 4.01 (2.49) 4.42 (2.75)

R5 3.62 (2.25) 4.58 (2.85) 5.06 (3.15)

R6 4.27 (2.66) 5.42 (3.37) 5.98 (3.72)

R7 5.00 (3.11) 6.34 (3.94) 7.00 (4.35)

R8 5.89 (3.66) 7.46 (4.64) 8.25 (5.13)

R9 6.96 (4.32) 8.82 (5.49) 9.75 (6.06)

R10 8.15 (5.06) 10.32 (6.42) 11.40 (7.09)

Based on rear tire 480/80R42 (18.4 - 42) Rear TiresDivide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: (10.609) to obtain creeper gear speeds.


5-13

GROUND SPEED: 2160, 2180 AND 2210 WITH 18X9 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION (18.4 - 42 TIRES)

FORWARD GEARS



REVERSE GEARS

F1 1.90 (1.18) 2.41 (1.50) 2.67 (1.66)

F2 2.25 (1.40) 2.85 (1.77) 3.15 (1.96)

F3 2.63 (1.63) 3.33 (2.07) 3.69 (2.30)

F4 3.02 (1.87) 3.82 (2.37) 4.23 (2.62)

F5 3.56 (2.22) 4.51 (2.80) 5.00 (3.10)

F6 4.17 (2.59) 5.28 (3.29) 5.84 (3.63)

F7 4.91 (3.05) 6.22 (3.87) 6.88 (4.27)

F8 5.80 (3.60) 7.35 (4.57) 8.13 (5.05)

F9 6.79 (4.22) 8.61 (5.35) 9.51 (5.91)

F10 7.89 (4.90) 9.99 (6.21) 11.05 (6.86)

F11 9.32 (5.79) 11.81 (7.34) 13.05 (8.11)

F12 10.91 (6.78) 13.82 (8.59) 15.97 (9.49)

F13 12.50 (7.77) 15.83 (9.84) 17.49 (10.87)

F14 14.76 (9.18) 18.70 (11.63) 20.67 (12.85)

F15 17.28 (10.74) 21.89 (13.60) 24.20 (15.03)

F16 20.35 (12.64) 25.77 (16.01) 28.48 (17.70)

F17 24.04 (14.95) 30.45 (18.93) 33.66 (20.92)

F18 28.14 (17.48) 35.64 (22.14) 39.39 (24.48)

R2 2.31 (1.43) 2.92 (1.82) 3.24 (2.01)

R3 2.73 (1.70) 3.46 (2.15) 3.82 (2.37)

R4 3.19 (1.99) 4.04 (2.52) 4.48 (2.78)

R5 3.66 (2.28) 4.63 (2.88) 5.12 (3.18)

R6 4.32 (2.69) 5.48 (3.40) 6.05 (3.77)

R7 5.06 (3.14) 6.41 (3.99) 7.08 (4.40)

R8 5.96 (3.70) 7.54 (4.69) 8.34 (5.19)

R9 7.04 (4.37) 8.91 (5.54) 9.86 (6.13)

R10 8.23 (5.12) 10.43 (6.48) 11.53 (7.17)

Based on rear tire 480/80R42 (18.4 - 42) Rear TiresDivide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: (10.609) to obtain creeper gear speeds.


5-14

GROUND SPEED -- 18X9 POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION

FORWARD GEARS



REVERSE GEARS

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

F7

F8

F9

F10

F11

F12

F13

F14

F15

F16

F17

F18

R2

R3

R4

R5

R6

R7

R8

R9

R10

TIRE SIZEDivide normal speeds by creeper reduction ratio: (10.609) to obtain creeper gear speeds.


5-15

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE TIRE COMBINATIONS

The tires fitted to tractors with optional four wheel drive have been carefully selected to match the gearing of thetransmission and axles. When replacing worn or damaged tires, always install tires of the same make, modeland size as those removed. The installation of other tire combinations may result in excessive tire wear, loss ofuseable power or severe damage to driveline components. If in doubt, consult your authorized dealer.

Radial Tire Identification

Radial tires are identified according to rating by a star code - -either one star ( ), two stars ( ) or three stars ( ).

Tires with are inflated to a maximum of 1.2 bar or 18 PSI.



Refer to the identification panel on the side of the tire sidewall.

TIRE PRESSURES AND PERMISSIBLE LOADS

IMPORTANT: The figures in the following charts are for guidance only. Tire specifications vary by tiremanufacturer. For exact tire loading information, refer to the information provided by themanufacturer of the tireson the tractor.

To avoid the possibility of tire to rim creep, tire pressures below 0.40 bar (6 PSI) with radial tires and 0.80 bar(12 PSI) with bias ply should not be used for operations having a high torque requirement, e.g., subsoiling,plowing, heavy cultivation, etc.

Tire loading figures in the following tables are for a singlewheel. To determine themaximum tire loading for singlewheel applications, multiply the load figure in the table by two, the total number of wheels on the axle.

Example:

Rear2 wheels (singles) x table figure = Maximum tire load

Todetermine themaximum tire loading for unitswith duals,multiply the load figure in the table by the total numberof wheels on the axle, then multiply by 88%.

Example:

Rear4 wheels (models with duals) x table figure x 88%= Maximum tire load

Axle loading must be within the capacities listed in Section 3 of this manual.

Remember the information in the charts and the examples cited are for guidance only. For exact informationregarding inflation pressures and tractor loading, consult your authorized dealer or the tire manufacturer.

When front mounted implements are fitted, front tire loads may be increased by up to 35% with no increase ininflation pressure when operated at speeds not exceeding 20 KPH (12 MPH).

At speednot exceeding 8KPH (5MPH), the loadon the front tiresmaybe increasedby 50%provided the inflationpressures are increased by 25%.

Whenmounted implements are used, rear tire loadsmay be increased by up to 20%with no increase in inflationpressure when operated at speeds not exceeding 20 KPH (12 MPH).


5-16

FRONTTIREPRESSURESANDPERMISSIBLELOADS(Twowheeldrive)

INFLATIONPRESSUREBar

TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

1.40

1.50

1.70

1.80

1.90

2.00

2.20

2.30

2.50

2.60

2.75

3.00

3.30

3.50

3.80

4.00

11.00-16

14L-16.1

16.5-16.1

12 10 10

1161

1469

LOADCAPA

CITY--kg

1224

939

1306

1352

1043

1411

1637

1470

1145

1529

1792

1583

1234

1637

1937

1687

1325

1741

2073

1406

1488

1565

1642

1715

-- -- --

INFLATIONPRESSUREPSI

TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

2022

2426

2830

3234

3638

4044

4852

5660

11.00-16

14L-16.1

16.5-16.1

12 10 103240

LOADCAPA

CITY--LBS.

2070

2850

2980

2300

3110

3610

3240

2520

3370

3950

3490

2720

3610

4270

3720

2920

3840

4570

3100

3280

3450

3620

3780

-- -- --


5-17

FRONTTIREPRESSURESANDPERMISSIBLELOADS(Fourwheeldrive)


TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

0.40

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.70

0.80

1.00

1.10

1.20

1.40

1.50

1.60

1.80

1.90

2.00

2.20

2.30

14.9-28

16.9-28

14.9-30

480/70-30

16.9-30

10 8 10 8

800

965

820

1180

1000

LOADCAPA

CITY--kg

870

1055

900

1285

1095

945

1145

970

1400

1180

1010

1225

1045

1550

1265

1075

1300

1105

1650

1345

1195

1450

1235

1800

1495

1305

1590

1345

1900

1640

1415

1715

1460

1770

1500

1850

1550

2120

1900

1615

1960

1660

2360

2015

1705

2070

1760

2130

1800

2240

1850

2575

2300

1880

1940

2800

1960

2025

2060

2120

3075

3350

3550

3 2 3 2

RADIAL


TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

67

89

1012

1416

1820

2224

2628

3032

34

14.9-28

16.9-28

14.9-30

480/70-30

16.9-30

10 8 10 8

1760

2130

1810

2600

2200

LOADCAPA

CITY--LBS.

1920

2330

1980

2830

2410

2080

2520

2140

3080

2600

2230

2700

2300

2420

2790

2370

2870

2440

3640

3300

2630

3200

2720

3960

3620

2880

3500

2970

4180

3900

3120

3780

3220

4180

3300

4080

3420

4680

4440

3560

4320

3660

5200

4700

3760

4560

3880

5080

3960

4940

4080

5680

4140

4280

6150

4320

4460

4540

4680

6800

7400

7850

3 2 3 2

RADIAL


5-18

REARTIREPRESSURESANDPERMISSIBLELOADS


TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

0.80

1.00

1.10

1.20

1.40

1.50

1.60

1.80

1.90

2.00

2.20

2.30

2.40

16.9-26

18.4-26

14.9-28

16.9-28

18.4-30

10 10 10 10 8

1409

1686

1195

LOADCAPA

CITY--kg

1541

1845

1309

1664

1991

1418

1718

2122

1786

2136

1518

1841

2277

1895

2273

1614

1959

2422

2005

2400

1705

2072

2109

2527

1795

2181

2214

2650

1882

2286

2309

2764

1964

2386

2877

2045

2991

2123

BIASPLY


TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

1214

1618

2022

2426

2830

3234

36

16.9-26

18.4-26

14.9-28

16.9-28

18.4-30

10 10 10 10 8

3100

3710

2630

LOADCAPA

CITY--LBS.

3390

4060

2880

3660

4380

3120

3780

4670

3930

4700

3340

4050

5010

4170

5000

3550

4310

5330

4410

5280

3750

4560

4640

5560

3950

4800

4870

5830

4140

5030

5080

6080

4320

5250

6330

4500

6580

4670

BIASPLY


5-19



TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

0.40

0.50

0.55

0.60

0.70

0.80

1.00

1.10

1.20

1.40

1.50

1.60

1.80

1.90

2.00

18.4-38

20.8-38

710/70-38

18.4-42

20.8-42

14.9-46

420/80R46

18.4-46

8 10 10 10 8 10

1345

1625

2430

1415

1715

1025

1320

1490

LOADCAPA

CITY--kg

1470

1780

2650

1550

1880

1120

1450

1635

1590

1925

1680

2030

1210

1760

1705

2060

2900

1795

2175

1295

1600

1885

1805

2195

3150

1905

2315

1380

1750

2005

2015

2440

3350

2125

2575

1535

1850

2230

2205

2665

3875

2320

2810

1680

2220

2450

2385

2880

2515

3040

1815

2640

2575

3075

4375

2725

3250

1950

2430

2800

2715

3290

4875

2860

3470

2070

2650

3015

2880

3470

3015

3675

2195

3175

3000

3650

5300

3150

3875

2300

2900

3350

2415

3250

3515

2520

3675

2650

3875

2 2 2 2 3 3

RADIAL


5-20



TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

67

89

1012

1416

1820

2224

2628

30

18.4-38

20.8-38

710/70-38

18.4-42

20.8-42

14.9-46

420/80R46

18.4-46

8 10 10 10 8 10

2960

3580

5360

3120

3780

2260

2910

3280

LOADCAPA

CITY--LBS.

3240

3920

5840

3420

4140

2470

3200

3600

3500

4240

3700

4480

2670

3880

3760

4540

6400

3960

4800

2860

3520

4160

3980

4840

6950

4200

5100

3040

3860

4420

4440

5380

7400

4680

5680

3380

4080

4920

4860

5880

8550

5120

6200

3700

4680

5400

5260

6350

5540

6700

4000

5820

5680

6800

9650

6000

7150

4300

5360

6150

5980

7250

10700

6300

7650

4560

5840

6650

6350

7650

6650

8100

4840

7000

6600

8050

11700

6950

8550

5080

6400

7400

5320

7150

7750

5560

8100

5840

8550

2 2 2 2 3 3

RADIAL


5-21



TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

0.80

1.00

1.10

1.20

1.40

1.50

1.60

1.80

1.90

2.00

2.20

2.30

R118.4-38

R120.8-38

R230.5L-32

R220.8-38

8 10 12 10

LOADCAPA

CITY--kg

2387

1663

4145

2980

2559

3100

4440

3100

2718

3295

4722

3295

3486

3486

BIAS


TIRESIZE

PLY

RATING

1214

1618

2022

2426

2830

3234

R118.4-38

R120.8-38

R230.5L-32

R220.8-38

8 10 12

LOADCAPA

CITY--LBS.

5250

6360

9120

6360

5630

6820

9770

6820

5980

7250

10390

7250

7670

7670

BIAS


5-22

HARDWARE TORQUE VALUES

Check the tightness of hardware periodically.

Use the following charts to determine the correcttorque when checking, adjusting or replacinghardware on the tractor.

IMPORTANT: DO NOT use the values listed in thecharts if a different torque value or tighteningprocedure is specified in this manual for a specificapplication. Torque values listed are for general useonly.

Make sure fastener threads are clean and notdamaged.

NOTE: A torque wrench is necessary to properlytighten.


5-23

M4 15* (1.7) 19* (2.2) 23* (2.6) 30* (3.4) 33* (3.7) 42* (4.8) 16* (1.8)

M6 51* (5.8) 67* (7.6) 79* (8.9) 102* (12) 115* (13) 150* (17) 56* (6.3)

M8 124* (14) 159* (18) 195* (22) 248* (28) 274* (31) 354* (40) 133* (15)

M10 21 (28) 27 (36) 32 (43) 41 (56) 45 (61) 58 (79) 22 (30)

M12 36 (49) 46 (63) 55 (75) 72 (97) 79 (107) 102 (138) 39 (53)

M16 89 (121) 117 (158) 137 (186) 177 (240) 196 (266) 254 (344) 97 (131)

M20 175 (237) 226 (307) 277 (375) 358 (485) 383 (519) 495 (671) 195 (265)

M24 303 (411) 392 (531) 478 (648) 619 (839) 662 (897) 855 (1160) 338 (458)

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATIONHEX CAP SCREW AND CARRIAGE BOLTS

CLASSES 5.6 AND UP

MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION

PROPERTY CLASS

HEX NUTS AND LOCKNUTSCLASSES 05 AND UP

MANUFACTURER’S IDENTIFICATION

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUESIN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

METRIC HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

SIZE UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED W/CL8.8W/ZnCr W/ZnCr W/ZnCr BOLT

CLASS 5.8 CLASS 8.8 CLASS 10.9

PROPERTY CLASS

LOCKNUTCL.8NOMINAL

CLOCK MARKING


5-24

NOTE: Torque values shown with * are inch pounds.

IDENTIFICATIONCAP SCREWS AND CARRIAGE BOLTS

LOCKNUTS

GRADE A NO MARK

1 213 (289) 275 (373) 547 (742) 708 (960) 773 (1048) 1000 (1356) 386 (523) 545 (739) 17/8 142 (193) 183 (248) 365 (495) 473 (641) 515 (698) 667 (904) 258 (350) 364 (494) 7/8

3/4 146 (198) 189 (256) 226 (306) 293 (397) 319 (432) 413 (560) 160 (217) 226 (306) 3/45/8 83 (112) 107 (145) 128 (174) 165 (224) 180 (244) 233 (316) 90 (122) 127 (172) 5/8

9/16 60 (81) 77 (104) 92 (125) 120 (163) 130 (176) 169 (229) 65 (88) 92 (125) 9/161/2 42 (57) 54 (73) 64 (87) 83 (113) 91 (123) 117 (159) 45 (61) 64 (88) 1/27/16 27 (37) 35 (47) 42 (57) 54 (73) 59 (80) 77 (104) 30 (41) 42 (57) 7/16

3/8 17 (23) 22 (30) 26 (35) 34 (46) 37 (50) 48 (65) 19 (26) 26 (35) 3/85/16 115* (13) 149* (17) 178* (20) 229* (26) 250* (28) 324* (37) 125* (14) 176* (20) 5/161/4 55* (6.2) 72* (8.1) 86* (9.7) 112* (13) 121* (14) 157* (18) 61* (6.9) 86* (9.8) 1/4

MINIMUM HARDWARE TIGHTENING TORQUESIN FOOT POUNDS (NEWTON-METERS) FOR NORMAL ASSEMBLY APPLICATIONS

INCH HARDWARE AND LOCKNUTS

NOMINAL UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED UNPLATED PLATED GR.B GR.C NOMINALSIZE or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr or W/ZnCr w/GR5 w/GR8 SIZE

PLATED PLATED PLATED BOLT BOLTSILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD SILVER GOLD

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8 LOCKNUTS

SAE GRADE 2 SAE GRADE 5 SAE GRADE 8

REGULAR NUTS SAE GRADE 5HEX NUTS

SAE GRADE 8HEX NUTS

GRADE IDENTIFICATION

GRADE A NO NOTCHES

GRADE B ONE CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCH

GRADE C TWO CIRCUMFERENTIAL NOTCHES


GRADE A NO MARKS

GRADE B THREE MARKS

GRADE C SIX MARKS

MARKS NEED NOT BE LOCATED


AT CORNERS

GRADE B LETTER BGRADE C LETTER C


5-25

DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORIES

Part Number Qty DescriptionApproximate.

Installation Time86014147 1 Kit, Block Heater, Engine 1.5

86014146 1 Kit, Transmission Heater 2.0

86013781 1 Kit, Radiator Baffle 0.3

9845903 1 Kit, EDC 1.5

86030112 1 Kit, (132”) Rear Wheel Spacer 2.0

86018543 1 Kit, (15”) Rear Dual Spacer Kit (Not applicable to 2145) 3.0

86014389 1 Kit, Rear Dual Hubs -- 2145 4.0

86014391 1 Kit, Rear Dual Hubs -- 2160, 2180 & 2210 4.0

86012421 1 Kit, Toolbox, Side Mount 0.5

86020974 1 Kit, Deluxe RH & LH Rear View Mirrors 1.0

86500295 1 Kit, Sunvisor 1.0

86018083 1 Kit, Rear Wiper/Washer 2.0

86013437 1 Kit, Solid Fan Hub 1.0

86030111 1 Kit, Radar Installation 1.0

86030437 1 Kit, Side Monitor Mtg 0.2

86593079 1 Kit, Side Monitor Mtg, Deluxe 0.5

86030509 1 Kit, Monitor Mount/Power Bar Auxiliary 1.2

86032122 1 Kit, Accessory Implement Plug, 3 Prong 0.1

V59624 1 Kit, Accessory Implement Plug, 7 Pin 0.1

86520481 1 Kit, Toolbox, Front 0.5

86029289 1 Kit, HydraFlow Plus Conversion 7.0

86031849 1 Kit, Low Pressure Hydraulic Return Line 0.3

86031847 1 Kit, Hydraulic Trailer Brake

86031206 1 Kit, (12,500 lb) HPL L/EDC 4.0

86031207 1 Kit, (15,000 lb) HPL L/EDC 4.0

86029890 1 Kit, Dynamic Front Fenders -- 520 mm (20.5 in) 2.0

86029294 1 Kit, Dynamic Front Fenders -- 470 mm (18.5 in) 2.0

86029891 1 Kit, Dynamic Front Fender -- 620 (24.4 in) 2.0

86030502 1 Kit, 4th Remote Valve 6.0

86031169 1 Kit, “HydraFlow Plus” (Only for “HydraFlow Plus” Readyunits) prior to S/N

7.0

86029289 1 Kit, HydraFlow Plus (On) 7.0

9824857 1 Front Worklamp, High Mount 0.7

9824982 1 Wheel Adjustment Tool N/A

9840406 1 Shaft, PTO, 1000 -- 20 Tooth (1.75”) 1.0

9843942 1 Shaft, PTO, 1000 -- 21 Tooth (1.35”) 1.0

86029318 1 Radio Kit -- Standard Cassette 0.1

86029319 1 Radio Kit -- Premium Cassette 0.1

86029320 1 Radio Kit -- CD Player 0.1


5-26

DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORIES CONT’D

Part Number Qty DescriptionApproximate.

Installation Time86026864 1 Front Dual Wheel Kit 8.0

86032174 1 Front Wheel Spacer Kit (11”) 1.0

86505861 1 Rear Fender Extension Kit 1.5

86513451 1 “Y” Harness Assembly, Radar/Monitor 0.2

9843487 1 Controls, Limited Slip (Requires Radar) 0.6

86029309 1 Decal Kit, French Canadian 1.0

86500265 1 Rotating Beacon 2.0

86029321 1 Quick Hitch, Cat. III 0.5

86029270 1 Red paint -- aerosol N/A

86029274 1 Cream paint -- aerosol 0.5

86029278 1 Black paint -- aerosol 0.5

86029282 1 Chassis grey paint -- aerosol 0.5

86030472 1 Kit, Front (A-post) Monitor Bracket 0.1

86033740 1 Kit, Cigar Lighter Power Adapter 0.1

96033914 1 Draw Bar Kit -- Heavy Duty 1.8

Part Numbers For High Usage Items

Component 2145 2160 2180 2210

Belt, Fan -- Standard 86029736

Belt, Fan -- Air brake compressor option 86029735

Block Heater 82019779

Block Heater Cord 86539137

Filter, Engine Air (Inner) 86029108

Filter, Engine Air (Outer) 86029107

Filter Engine Fuel/Water Separator (O--Ring, Bowl -- 87840137)

Filter, Engine Oil 86029164

Filter, Engine Coolant (With conditioner) 96029672 (Seal Ring -- 9617873)

Filter, Engine Coolant (Less conditioner) 86031985 (Seal Ring -- 9617873)

Filter, Hydraulic -- Standard Hydraulic 86029161

Filter, Hydraulic -- HydraFlow Plus Option 86029162

Filter, Transmission 86029161

Flasher 9821783

Fuse 5-amp 9623775

Fuse 7.5-amp 9623776

Fuse 10-amp 9811773

Fuse 15-amp 9623774

Fuse 20-amp 9804895

Fuse 25-amp 9846342

Fuse 40-amp 86507935

Fuse 50-amp 86507936

Fuse 60-amp 86031151


5-27

Part Numbers For High Usage Items -- Cont’d

Component 2145 2160 2180 2210

Fuse Puller 86000363

Key Ignition 86502201

Replacement Bulbs

Description BVI Bulb Number

Instrument Cluster (6 bulb kit) 86503542

Console Lamp -- Roof Mounted 276433

Cab Interior Lamp 470016

Head Lamps -- Side Facing 9847313

Head Lamps -- Front Facing 9847312

Worklamps 9848640

Stop/Tail Lamps 9626318

Wide Transport Marker Signal Lights 529068

Rocker Switch Indicator 9825842

Roof Warning Lamps 529068


5-28

5-29

INDEX

Adapting ballast to work load andground speed 2-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding diesel fuel 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjustable pressurizer vents 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjusting drawbar length 2-109. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjusting PTO speed 2-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Adjusting rear wheels 2-126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Air conditioner activation switch 1-17. . . . . . . . . . .Air conditioning operation 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Area accumulator 2-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Area per hour forcaster 2-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Area preset 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Attaching and detaching trailed equipment 2-111. . .Attaching equipment to the PTO shaft 2-74. . . . . .Attaching 3-point equipment 2-105. . . . . . . . . . . . .Audible alarm 2-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Auto shift 2-53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Automatic display information 2-27. . . . . . . . . . . . .Automatic engine shutdown 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Automatic hitch pin 2-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Auxiliary connector, seven pin 2-41. . . . . . . . . . . . .Auxiliary connector, single pin 2-42. . . . . . . . . . . . .Auxiliary connector, three pin 2-42. . . . . . . . . . . . .Auxiliary control mounting locations 2-43. . . . . . . .Auxiliary control cable routing 2-43. . . . . . . . . . . . .Ballast limitations 2-133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ballast, selecting 2-132. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ballasting 2-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ballasting and tires 2-130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ballasting front end for transport 2-138. . . . . . . . . .Ballasting four wheel drive tractors 2-138. . . . . . . .Ballasting, points to remember 2-134. . . . . . . . . . .Ballasting two wheel drive tractors 2-138. . . . . . . .Bar graph displays 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Battery cover 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Battery voltage 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Before operating 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Bleeding remote cylinders 2-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Brakes 2-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Brakes specifications 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Brake locking plate 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Breaking-in procedure 2-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cab 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cab identification 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cab toolbox 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cancel flashing service indicator 2-34. . . . . . . . . .Capacities 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Central display (LCD) 2-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Changing the PTO output shaft 2-71, 2-72. . . . . . .Checking wheel slippage 2-133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cigar lighter 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clearing fault codes 2-37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cleaning the cab interior 2-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Closing the hood 3-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cold start aid switch 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cold weather starting 2-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Connecting double-acting cylinders 2-84. . . . . . . .Connecting single-acting cylinders 2-84. . . . . . . . .Controls 2-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Control and instruments, overview 1-10. . . . . . . . .Control console illumination lights 1-18. . . . . . . . .Control switches 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cooling system specifications 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Creeper gears 2-55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Creeper switch 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cruise control operation 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Dealer installed accessories 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Delivery Reports 5-33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Determining maximum front ballast 2-139. . . . . . .Determining 3-point hitch mode of operation 2-95. . .Diesel fuel 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Diesel fuel selection chart 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Differential lock 2-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Differential lock, engaging and disengaging 2-60. . .Differential lock switch 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Digital display 2-47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Disconnecting the negative battery cable 1-26. . .Disengaging the PTO 2-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Distance measurement 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Doors 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Draft control operation 2-92. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drawbar height adjustment 2-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drawbar length 2-108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drawbar specifications 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drawbar-towing attachments 2-106. . . . . . . . . . . . .Driving the tractor 2-69. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Drop rate control knob 2-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Dual rear wheels 2-128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EIC lighting display 2-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EIC programming 2-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EIC tractor performance monitor (TPM) 2-26. . . . .Electronic instrument cluster 1-14, 2-12. . . . . . . . .Electrical equipment specifications 5-8. . . . . . . . . . .Emergency stopping and parking brake 2-45. . . .Engagement switch 2-79. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engaging the PTO 2-76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine access doors 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine access door, left side 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine access door, right side 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine block heater 2-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine coolant 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine coolant temperature 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine hood 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine hour meter 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine identification 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine load 2-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine lubricant 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine oil pressure 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine shutdown override 2-67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine shutdown override switch 1-12. . . . . . . . . .Engine specifications 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Engine speed-digital display 2-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Entering the cab 2-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Estimating ballast requirements 2-134. . . . . . . . . .Exiting the set up mode 2-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Exterior toolbox 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .External 3-point hitch controls 2-97. . . . . . . . . . . . .Fan shields, left side 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fan shields, right side 1-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fast raise/work switch 2-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fault codes 4-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fault code indicator 2-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fault codes on/off 2-36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Field operation 2-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-30

Flexible link ends 2-101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Flexible maintenance intervals 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . .First 50-hour service 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Flow control adjustment 2-82. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Foot and floor controls 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Foot brakes 2-44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Foot brake pedals 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Foot throttle 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Forward operator controls 1-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive (FWD) 2-59. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive (FWD),

engaging and disengaging 2-59. . . . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive (FWD) front axle

identification 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive (FWD) front axle

track spacing 2-116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive operating precautions 2-59. . . . .Four wheel drive steering stops 2-120. . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive (FWD) switch 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive tire combinations 5-15. . . . . . . . .Four wheel drive track adjustment 2-116. . . . . . . . .Front tires - liquid weight 2-141. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front weights - cast iron 2-139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front wheel positions 2-117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front wheel track spacing 2-112. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front/rear lights 2-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front wheel position (2WD) 2-114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front windshield wiper/washer 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Front windshield wiper/washer switch 1-18. . . . . .Fuel level 2-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuel requirements 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuel storage 3-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuel system specifications 5-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fueling the tractor 3-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fuses 3-68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General dimensions 5-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General information 1-1, 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General maintenance -

bleed the fuel system 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General maintenance -

electronic instrument cluster (EIC)bulb replacement 3-73. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance - fuse replacement 3-68. . .General maintenance -

main distribution panel 3-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General maintenance -

preparation for tractor storage 3-74. . . . . . . . .General maintenance -

preparing the tractor for useafter storage 3-74. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance - relays 3-69. . . . . . . . . . . . .General maintenance -

replace the fender mounted turn signaland stop light/parking light bulbs 3-72. . . . . . .

General maintenance -replace headlight assembly bulbs 3-71. . . . . .

General maintenance -replace roof mounted turn signal bulbs 3-72. .

General maintenance -replace work sealed beam units 3-71. . . . . . . .

Ground speed charts 5-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ground speed calibration 2-35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Ground speed display 2-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Guide blocks, spacers and shims 2-102. . . . . . . . .Hand throttle control lever 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hardware torque values 5-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hauling the tractor on a transporter 1-28. . . . . . . .Hazard warning light switch 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hazard warning lights 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Headlight flash 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Headlights high/low beams 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Heater operation 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Height limit control knob 2-88. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hitch disabled symbol 2-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hitch enabled display 2-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hitch position display 2-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hood 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Horn 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HydraFlow Plus system 2-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .HydraFlow Plus tractor 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hydraulic motor application 2-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hydraulic oil sump heater 2-64. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hydraulic return kit 5-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Hydraulic systems introduction 2-77. . . . . . . . . . . .Hydraulic system specifications 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . .Implement to cab clearance 2-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Inch hardware and locknuts 5-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Inching pedal 1-15, 2-48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Indicator, warning lamps, and audible alarm 2-14.Installing cast iron weights 2-136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Installing front weights 2-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Interior lights 1-18, 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Interior rearview mirror 1-18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Key start/stop switch 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lift control lever 2-87. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lift rods 2-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lighting display 2-38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lights and accessory power points 2-39. . . . . . . .Linkage category conversion 2-104. . . . . . . . . . . . .Low pressure return circuit 2-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lower link float 2-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubricants 5-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance chart 3-8. . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

as required 3-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 10 hours or daily 3-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 50 hours 3-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 300 hours 3-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 600 hours 3-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 900 hours or 12 months 3-44. . . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 1200 hours or 12 months 3-47. . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

every 2400 hours or 24 months 3-55. . . . . . . .Lubrication and maintenance,

general maintenance 3-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Manual operation 2-80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Manual-programmable operation switches 2-80. .Master light switch 1-13, 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Maximum tractor operating angle 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . .

5-31

Metric hardware and locknuts 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . .Minimum hardware tightening torques

and locknuts 5-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Modes of operation 2-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Monitor mount -- auxiliary power bar kit 2-42. . . . .Multi-function switch 1-13, 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Oil change interval 5-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Opening the access doors 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Opening the hood 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operating continuous flow

hydraulic equipment 2-84. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operating remote equipment simultaneously 2-85. .Operating the engine 2-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operation 2-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator prompts 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator calibration 2-31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator’s manual holder 1-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Operator’s seat 2-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Overhead controls 1-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Panel dim control 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Parking brake 1-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Position control operation 2-91. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Position/draft sensitivity control knob 2-88. . . . . . .Position/draft control test 2-96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Position/float control test 2-95. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Possible track adjustments 2-113. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Power Beyond Applications 2-85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Powershift transmission 2-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Powershift transmission control

lever with neutral lock 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Power take-off display 2-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Power take-off (PTO) independent 2-70. . . . . . . . .Power take-off specifications 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Precautionary statements 0-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pre-operation checks 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Preparing to start the tractor 2-61. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pressurizer fan speed switch 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pressurizer operation 2-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pressurizer vents 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Preventing system contamination 3-1. . . . . . . . . . . .Product Publications 5-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Programming reverse gear ratios 2-58. . . . . . . . . .Programming the up/down shift 2-57. . . . . . . . . . .Programming the “Service Alert Indicators” 2-33.Programmable operation 2-81. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Programmable up shift-down shift 2-56. . . . . . . . .Protecting the electronic/electrical systems

during charging or welding 1-25. . . . . . . . . . . .Protective shielding 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTO engagement switch 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTO master shield 2-70. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTO operation 2-75. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTO speed 540 rpm scale 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTO speed 1000 rpm scale 2-30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PTO status light 1-22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quick couplers 2-83. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Quick hitch 2-104. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Radio 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear axle identification 1-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear tire weighting 2-136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear wheel cast iron rear wheel weights 2-137. . .Rear wheel track adjustment 2-125. . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear wheel track spacing 2-121, 2-122. . . . . . . . . .

Rear window 2-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear window grommet 2-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear window wiper/washer 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rear window wiper/washer switch 1-18. . . . . . . . .Remote control valves 2-77, 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . .Remote valve electro-hydraulic

control switches 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Remote valve electro-hydraulic

engagement switch 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Remote valve electro-hydraulic

flow control knobs 1-21. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Remote valve electro-hydraulic

manual/programmable operation switches 1-21Removable panel 2-43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Removing equipment 2-105. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Removing shields 3-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Removing the access doors 3-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Removing the battery cover 3-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Right hand console 2-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Right side console controls 1-19. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Right side console position switch 1-24. . . . . . . . .Right side window 2-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Road speeds 5-11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rotary beacon 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Rotary beacon switch 1-13. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Safety 0-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Safety decals 0-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Seat adjustments 2-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Seat belt 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Selectable displays 2-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Selectable display information 2-28. . . . . . . . . . . . .Service engine air cleaner 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Service Reports 5-41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Setting implement width 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Setting the slip alarm point 2-32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Shield locations 1-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Shuttle operations 2-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Slip alarm 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Slip control 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Slip limit control knob 2-90. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Specifications 5-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Speed matching 2-52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Standard flow systems 2-77. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Standard flow tractors 2-78. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Starter solenoid shield 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Starting the engine and moving forward 2-49. . . .Starting the engine and moving in reverse 2-51. .Starting the engine in cold weather 2-62. . . . . . . .Starting the engine in warm weather

or when engine is hot 2-62. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Starting the tractor with jumper cables 2-65. . . . . .Steering column telescopic adjustment

control knob 1-12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Steering column tilt control lever 1-12. . . . . . . . . . .Steering specifications 5-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Steering wheel and column 2-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stopping the engine 2-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Sway blocks 2-102. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Swinging drawbar 2-106. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Temperature control switch 1-17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Three-point lift specifications 5-7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Three-point hitch controls 2-86. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Three-point hitch fast raise/work switch 1-21. . . . .

5-32

Three-point hitch float 2-94. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Three-point hitch height limit control 1-23. . . . . . . .Three-point hitch lift control 1-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Three-point hitch linkage 2-99. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Three-point hitch position/draft control 1-24. . . . . .Three-point hitch position -- area counter 2-37. . .Three-point hitch rate of drop control 1-23. . . . . . .Three-point hitch status light 1-22, 2-89. . . . . . . .Tire pressures and permissible loads 5-15. . . . . . .Tire pressures and permissible loads charts 5-16. . .Tires 2-142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tires and ballasting 2-136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Toolbox 2-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Top link 2-100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Traction Control System (TCS) 2-60. . . . . . . . . . . .Tractor identification 1-2, 1-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tractor identification data 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tractor master PTO shield 1-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tractor PTO stub shaft cover 1-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tractor hauling 1-28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tractor towing 1-27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Transmission 2-46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Transmission auto shift switch 1-20. . . . . . . . . . . . .Transmission gear shift position display 2-23. . . .Transmission identification 1-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Transmission programming 2-57. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Transmission specifications 5-6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Transmission up/down shift switch 1-21. . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting and fault finding 4-1. . . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, brakes 4-9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, cab 4-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, electrical system 4-6. . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, engine 4-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, hydraulic system 4-7. . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, 3-point hitch 4-8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Troubleshooting, transmission 4-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Turn signals 2-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Two wheel drive axle adjustment 2-114. . . . . . . . . .Two wheel drive front axle track spacing 2-113. . . .Two wheel drive front wheel track spacing 2-113. .Two wheel drive front wheel toe-in 2-115. . . . . . . . .Universal symbols 0-15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Vehicle identification data 1-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Warning lamp glows 3-10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Weight specifications 5-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wheel slip 2-29. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wheel slip indicator light 1-23. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wheel toe-in (FWD) 2-118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Wide swinging roller drawbar 2-109. . . . . . . . . . . .Work lights 2-39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-33

OWNER COPY

DELIVERY REPORT/SERVICECHECK AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED

STATIONARY CHECKS -- ENGINE OFF:

_____1. Tire pressures and condition

_____2. Lift--rod adjusting blocks for proper operation

_____3. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____4. Poly V belt

_____5. Engine oil level

_____6. Drain diesel fuel filter and clean fuelsedimenter

_____7. Air Cleaner element and hose connections

_____8. Coolant lines and clamps

_____9. Windshield wiper washer and fluid

_____10. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____11. Front axle differential oil level (FWD)

_____12. Front axle hub oil level (FWD)

_____13. Upper link, drawbar pins in position

_____14. Wheel disc--to--rim hardware torque

_____15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____17. Front end wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____18. Fuel level

_____19. Sheet metal and paint condition

_____20. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____21. Seat mounting and adjustment

_____22. Side console operation

_____23. Tilt telescopic steering column operation

_____24. Cab door and lock operation and sealcondition

_____25. Cab interior upholstery, trim and moldings

_____26. Cab window operation, gas springs, latchesand seal condition

_____27. Cab filter installation

_____28. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____29. Hood gas springs in proper mounting position

SAFETY ITEM CHECKS:

_____1. Seat belt operation

_____ 2. Safety decals installed

_____ 3. All Safety shields installed

_____4. Neutral start switches operative

_____5. Parking brake operative

_____6. Flashing lights/taillights operation

_____7. Operator’s manual supplied

_____8. SMV emblem installed

_____9. Battery cables

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE RUNNING:

All operative checks are to be performed with the tractorat normal operating temperature:

_____1. Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____2. Fluid and oil leaks

_____3. Maximum no--load speed and idle speedadjustments and fuel shut--off

_____4. PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft and positioncontrol operation

___ Draft control operation

___ Remote control valves

___ Flow control operation

___ Pressure detent operation

_____6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____7. Transmission clutch calibration_____ F1_____ F2_____Rev

PERFORMANCE SERVICE CHECKS

_____1. Dynomometer HP test, engine operationincluding throttle and governor operation

_____2. Transmission

_____3. Steering control

_____4. Differential lock and FWD engagement anddisengagement

_____5. Brake action

_____6. All optional equipment and accessories___30--amp and 8--amp sockets

_____7. Ballasting

5-34

Service Performed Actual Engine Hours__________

Delivery Date ____________________________________________________________________

Owner’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address ________________________________________________________________________

Dealer’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address ________________________________________________________________________

Tractor: Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Engine: Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Using the operator’s manual as a guide, instruction was given as indicated by the check marks.

( ) Safety precautions and practice

( ) Lubrication points and schedule

( ) Maintenance areas, adjustments and schedule

( ) Operation of all controls

( ) Electro--hydraulics (EHR) programming--time delay

( ) Transmission programming – forward/reverse shuttle, upshift--downshift

( ) Transmission and three point hitch calibration

( ) Preseason service

( ) End--of--season service

( ) Warranty coverage

( ) Proper use of operator’s manual

( ) Customer given operator’s manual

Dealer Representative’s Signature ___________________________________________________

Date ________________

“I have been instructed in the operation,maintenance, and safety features of thismachine as detailed inthe operator’s manual.”

Owner’s Signature ________________________________________________________________

Date ________________

5-35

DEALER COPY

DELIVERY REPORT/SERVICECHECK AND ADJUST AS REQUIRED

STATIONARY CHECKS – ENGINE OFF:

_____1. Tire pressures and condition

_____2. Lift--rod adjusting blocks for proper operation

_____3. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____4. Poly V belt

_____5. Engine oil level

_____6. Drain diesel fuel filter and clean fuelsedimenter

_____7. Air Cleaner element and hose connections

_____8. Coolant lines and clamps

_____9. Windshield wiper washer and fluid

_____10. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____11. Front axle differential oil level (FWD)

_____12. Front axle hub oil level (FWD)

_____13. Upper link, drawbar pins in position

_____14. Wheel disc--to--rim hardware torque

_____15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____17. Front end wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____18. Fuel level

_____19. Sheet metal and paint condition


_____21. Seat mounting and adjustment

_____22. Side console operation

_____23. Tilt telescopic steering column operation

_____24. Cab door and lock operation and sealcondition

_____25. Cab interior upholstery, trim and moldings

_____26. Cab window operation, gas springs, latchesand seal condition

_____27. Cab filter installation

_____28. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____29. Hood gas springs in proper mounting position

SAFETY ITEM CHECKS:

_____1. Seat belt operation

_____2. Safety decals installed

_____3. All Safety shields installed

_____4. Neutral start switches operative

_____5. Parking brake operative

_____6. Flashing lights/taillights operation

_____7. Operator’s manual supplied

_____8. SMV emblem installed

_____9. Battery cables



_____1. Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____2. Fluid and oil leaks

_____3. Maximum no--load speed and idle speedadjustments and fuel shut--off

_____4. PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft and positioncontrol operation





_____6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____7. Transmission clutch calibration_____ F1_____ F2_____Rev


_____1. Dynomometer HP test, engine operationincluding throttle and governor operation

_____2. Transmission

_____3. Steering control

_____4. Differential lock and FWD engagement anddisengagement

_____5. Brake action

_____6. All optional equipment and accessories___30--amp and 8--amp sockets

_____7. Ballasting

5-36

Service Performed Actual Engine Hours ___________

Delivery Date ____________________________________________________________________

Owner’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address_______________________________________________________________________________

Dealer’s Name ___________________________________________________________________

Address_______________________________________________________________________________

Tractor: Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Engine: Model No. ___________ Serial No. ________________________________

Using the operator’s manual as a guide, instruction was given as indicated by the check marks.

( ) Safety precautions and practice

( ) Lubrication points and schedule

( ) Maintenance areas, adjustments and schedule

( ) Operation of all controls

( ) Electro--hydraulics (EHR) programming--time delay

( ) Transmission programming – forward/reverse shuttle, upshift--downshift

( ) Transmission and three point hitch calibration

( ) Preseason service

( ) End--of--season service

( ) Warranty coverage

( ) Proper use of operator’s manual

( ) Customer given operator’s manual

Dealer Representative’s Signature __________________________________________________

Date ________________

“I have been instructed in the operation,maintenance, and safety features of thismachine as detailed inthe operator’s manual.”

Owner’s Signature _______________________________________________________________

Date ________________

5-37

OWNER COPY

FIRST 50--HOUR SERVICE


_____ 1. Tire pressures and condition

_____ 2. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____ 3. Poly V Belt

_____ 4. Engine oil and filter change

_____ 5. Change Diesel fuel filter, clean fuelsedimenter, and bleed system

_____ 6. Change transmission filter

_____ 7. Change Hydraulic filter

_____ 8. Air cleaner element and hose connections

_____ 9. Coolant lines and clamps

_____ 10. Windshield wiper/operation and washerfluid level

_____ 11. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____ 12. Change front axle differential oil (FWD)

_____ 13. Change front axle hub oil (FWD)

_____ 14. Wheel--to--rim hardware torque

_____ 15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____ 16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____ 17. Front wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____ 18. Check adjustment of front wheel bearings(two--wheel drive only)

_____ 19. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____ 20. Seat operation

_____ 21. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____ 22. Exhaust manifold bolt torque

_____ 23. Clean cab air filter

SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:



_____ 1. Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____ 2. Fluid and oil leaks

_____ 3. Maximum no--load speed and idle speedadjustments

_____ 4. PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System:

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft andposition control operation





_____ 6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____ 7. Calibrate transmission directional clutches_____ F1 _____ F2 _____ Rev


_____ 1. Road test engine operation includingthrottle and governor operation

_____ 2. Transmission, transmission programming

_____ 3. Steering control

_____ 4. Differential lock and FWD engagementand disengagement

_____ 5. Brake action

_____ 6. All optional equipment and accessories

NOTE: Engines are filled with 10W--30 at the factory.The oil must be changed after the first 50 hours ofoperation. Change oil and filter.

_____ 1. Seat belt operation


_____ 3. Neutral start switches operative

_____ 4. Parking brake operation & adjustment

_____ 5. Battery Cables

_____ 6. Cab bolt torque

5-38

5-39

DEALER COPY

FIRST 50--HOUR SERVICE


_____ 1. Tire pressures and condition

_____ 2. Radiator coolant level and specific gravity1.071 – 1.083 at 16° C (60° F)

_____ 3. Poly V Belt

_____ 4. Engine oil and filter change

_____ 5. Change Diesel fuel filter, clean fuelsedimenter, and bleed system

_____ 6. Change transmission filter

_____ 7. Change Hydraulic filter

_____ 8. Air cleaner element and hose connections

_____ 9. Coolant lines and clamps

_____ 10. Windshield wiper/operation and washerfluid level

_____ 11. Transmission/rear axle oil level

_____ 12. Change front axle differential oil (FWD)

_____ 13. Change front axle hub oil (FWD)

_____ 14. Wheel--to--rim hardware torque

_____ 15. Wheel disc--to--hub hardware torque

_____ 16. Front end weight clamp bolts for tightness

_____ 17. Front wheel toe--in & steering stops

_____ 18. Check adjustment of front wheel bearings(two--wheel drive only)

_____ 19. Lubricate all grease fittings

_____ 20. Seat operation

_____ 21. All electrical cables, terminals and wires

_____ 22. Exhaust manifold bolt torque

_____ 23. Clean cab air filter

SAFETY ITEMS CHECKS:



_____ 1. Lights and instruments for proper operation

_____ 2. Fluid and oil leaks

_____ 3. Maximum no--load speed and idle speedadjustments

_____ 4. PTO operation & brake

5. Hydraulic System:

___ Selector lever & knobs for draft andposition control operation




___ Detent operation

_____ 6. Transmission selector & EIC gear display

_____ 7. Calibrate transmission directional clutches_____ F1 _____ F2 _____ Rev


_____ 1. Road test engine operation includingthrottle and governor operation

_____ 2. Transmission, transmission programming

_____ 3. Steering control

_____ 4. Differential lock and FWD engagementand disengagement

_____ 5. Brake action

_____ 6. All optional equipment and accessories

NOTE: Engines are filled with 10W--30 at the factory.The oil must be changed after the first 50 hours ofoperation. Change oil and filter.

_____ 1. Seat belt operation


_____ 3. Neutral start switches operative

_____ 4. Parking brake operation & adjustment

_____ 5. Battery Cables

_____ 6. Cab bolt torque

5-40

5-41

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT100 – 250 HOUR SERVICE

Service 100 hours 150 hours 200 hours 250 hours

1. Check engine oil level

2. Check engine coolant level

3. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditionercondenser, and intercooler cores

4. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

5. Check fuel system water separator

6. Check fuel sedimenter

7. Clean cab air filter

8. Check front and rear wheel hardware

9. Check tire pressure and condition

10. Lubricate all grease fittings

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No._______________________Tractor Serial No.____________________

100 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature ________________________________Date ________________



200 Hour Service Performed _______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________






5-42

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT300 HOUR SERVICE

_____1. Change engine oil and filter

_____2. Clean Fuel Sedimenter Screen

_____3. Check FWD Axle Housing Oil Level

_____4. Check FWD Axle Hub Oil Level

_____5. Check Air Conditioning System (Receiver drier sight glass and moisture indicator)

_____6. Check Battery Electrolyte Level

_____7. Drain Fuel Tank of Water and Sediment

_____8. Clean Cab Air Filter

_____9. Clean Cab Recirculation Filter

_____10. Calibrate Transmission Directional Clutches

_____F1_____F2_____Rev

_____11. Check Safety Cab Mounting Bolt Torque

_____12. Check engine coolant level

_____13. Check radiator, oil cooler, air conditioner condenser, and intercooler cores

_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil level

_____15. Check fuel system water separator

_____16. Check front and rear wheel hardware

_____17. Check tire pressure and condition


_____19. Front end weight bolt clamp tightness

SERVICE PERFORMED

Tractor Model No. _________________________Tractor Serial No.____________

Service Performed _________________________Actual Engine Hours ___________

Dealer Signature __________________________Date ________________

5-43


Service 350hours

400hours

450hours

500hours

550hours




4. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oillevel







SERVICE PERFORMED












5-44


_____1. Change Engine Oil and Filter










_____F1_____F2_____Rev









_____19. Change Engine Air Cleaner Outer Filter

_____20. Check Engine Air Intake Connections

_____21. Change Fuel Filter/Water Separator

_____22. Check Air Conditioner Drain Tubes

_____23. Adjust 2WD Front Axle Wheel Bearings

_____24. Check/adjust Engine Valve Clearance

SERVICE PERFORMED




5-45


Service 650hours

700hours

750hours

800hours

850hours











SERVICE PERFORMED












5-46

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT900 HOURS OR 12 MONTH SERVICE

(WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST)











_____F1_____F2_____Rev








_____18. Change transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil

_____19. Clean hydraulic pump inlet screen

_____20. Change hydraulic transmission filter

_____21. Change hydraulic filter

SERVICE PERFORMED




5-47


Service 950hours

1000hours

1050hours

1100hours

1150hours











SERVICE PERFORMED




1000 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours ___________


1050 Hour Service Performed ______________________Actual Engine Hours _____________






5-48

GENESIS SERVICE REPORTEVERY 1200 HOURS OR 12 MONTHS SERVICE




_____3. Change FWD Differential Oil

_____4. Change FWD Planetary Hub Oil




_____8. Change Cab Air Filter



_____F1_____F2_____Rev


_____12. Change Engine Coolant Filter/Conditioner


_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil





_____19. Change Engine Air Cleaner Inner and Outer Filter Elements



_____22. Change Rocker Cover Ventilation Filter


_____24. Check/Adjust 2WD Front Axle Wheel Bearings

_____25. Check/Adjust Engine Valve Clearance

SERVICE PERFORMED




5-49


Service 1250hours

1300hours

1350hours

1400hours

1450hours











SERVICE PERFORMED












5-50












_____F1_____F2_____Rev









SERVICE PERFORMED




5-51


Service 1550hours

1600hours

1650hours

1700hours

1750hours











SERVICE PERFORMED












5-52

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT1800 HOUR OR 24 MONTHS SERVICE

(WHICHEVER COMES FIRST)











_____F1_____F2_____Rev









_____19. Change transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil

_____20. Clean hydraulic pump inlet screen

_____21. Change hydraulic transmission filter

_____22. Change hydraulic filter

_____23. Check/adjust Engine Valve Clearance

SERVICE PERFORMED




5-53


Service 1850hours

1900hours

1950hours

2000hours

2050hours











SERVICE PERFORMED












5-54

GENESIS SERVICE REPORT2100 HOURS SERVICE











_____F1_____F2_____Rev









SERVICE PERFORMED




5-55


Service 2150hours

2200hours

2250hours

2300hours

2350hours











SERVICE PERFORMED












5-56

GENESIS SERVICE REPORTEVERY 2400 HOURS OR 24 MONTHS SERVICE




_____3. Change FWD Differential Oil

_____4. Change FWD Planetary Hub Oil




_____8. Change Cab Air Filter



_____F1_____F2_____Rev


_____12. Change Engine Coolant and Filter/Conditioner


_____14. Check transmission/rear axle hydraulic oil





_____19. Change Engine Air Cleaner Inner and Outer Filter Elements



_____22. Change Rocker Cover Ventilation Filter


_____24. Check/Adjust 2WD Front Axle Wheel Bearings

_____25. Check/Adjust Engine Valve Clearance

_____26. Check and Clean Fuel Injector (Injectors should be cleaned and adjusted by an authorizeddealer or an injector specialists)

SERVICE PERFORMED





5-57

Product PublicationsAvailable through your local Buhler Versatile Dealer.

VERSATILE FOUR WHEEL DRIVE PUBLICATIONS

Part No. Description

89002000 Complete repair manual set (includes 13 sections)

89002001 1-Engine

89002002 2-Fuel System

89002003 3-Electrical System

89002004 4-Transmission

89002005 5-Axles

89002006 6-Brake System

89002007 7-Power Take-Off System

89002008 8-Hydraulic System

89002009 9-Steering System

89002010 10-Shielding/Frame

89002011 11-Cab

89002012 12-Climate Control

89002013 13-3 Point Hitch

89002014 Repair Manual 1402/1407 Transmission

89002100 Operator’s Manual L4WD (Before S/N 300601)

Models 2240, 2270, 2310, 2360, 2425

89002101 Assembly Instructions (Before S/N 3006001)

89002102 Oper/Maint Manual-8.3L Engine

89002103 Oper/Maint Manual-M11 Engine

89002104 Oper/Maint Manual-N14 Engine

89002105 Operator’s Manual L4WD (After S/N 300600)

Models 2290, 2335, 2360, 2375, 2425

89002106 Oper/Maint Manual-QSM11 Engine

89002107 Oper/Maint Manual-1407 Transmission

89002108 Assembly Instructions (After S/N 300600)

GENESIS PUBLICATIONS

Part No. Description

89007000 Complete repair manual set (includes 12 sections)

89007001 1-Engine

89007002 2-Fuel System

89007003 3-Electrical System

89007004 4-Transmission

89007005 5-Rear Axles

89007006 6-Brake System

89007007 7-Power Take-Off System

89007008 8-Hydraulic System

89007009 9-Front Axle and Steering System

89007010 10-Separating the Components

89007011 11-Cab

89007012 12-Climate Control

89007100 Operator’s Manual BVI-Genesis (Before S/N 500701)

89007102 Operator’s Manual BVI--Genesis (After S/N 500700)

89007102A Operator’s Manual Supplement -- Shuttle--Shift


5-58

CALIFORNIA

Proposition 65 Warning

Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are knownto the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, andother reproductive harm.

Buhler Versatile Inc., Winnipeg, MBPrinted in Canada

Buhler Versatile Inc.Box 7300, 1260 Clarence AveWinnipeg, Manitoba R3C 4E8

Documents

Buhler Versatile - OwnerIQdl.owneriq.net/8/85708321-657d-6c34-29fc-5ca26a10d63f.pdf · Buhler Versatile is liable for damages to other engine components caused by the failure under